Home

ASTRO APX 5000/ APX 6000

1. Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Sec 2 3 3 RF ANT 50 ohm A SP2T Digital RF N N gt Rx Tx Atten D Y VHF VHF Reversed Wok Power o TA 569 Gr rm To RF Vocon GPS Connector Ki m 9 Sek 18Mh2 yo Synth Synth p o Nex Abacus III Figure 3 2 Receiver Block Diagram VHF RF ANT AUX ANT 50 ohm am A SP2T Sp r Digital RF gt gt gt RF AUX Rx Tx Atten Y UHF1 UHF1 Reversed d Power 69 N EAADC Dee nos To RF Vocon GPS Connector fe 2nd Abacus III Figure 3 3 Receiver Block Diagram UHF1 Xe Sec 2 3 4 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation RF ANT AUX ANT 50 ohm A Po AU SP2T Digital RF i Ne RF AUX RTX Aon Y UHF2 UHF2 Reversed To Tx Power HAD D 9 lt a To RF Vocon GPS Connector Ge to LO CLK ES MD Z m Synth Synth Wl ee Abacus III Figure 3 4 Receiver Block Diagram UHF2 RF ANT AUX ANT 50 ohm 800 800
2. 50 ohm A y SP2T SP2T Digital RF i gt RF AUX RTX Aon Y UHF2 UHF2 Reversed To Tx Power HAD D 9 lt a To RF Vocon GPS Connector Ge 2nd fs Plies CLK ES bo Synth Synth Geet Abacus III Figure 3 4 Receiver Block Diagram UHF2 RF ANT AUX ANT 50 ohm 800 208 Y Po t vg N SPZT gt gt gt sw RF AUX Y Y gt gt Reversed ToTx 700 700 Power SP2T Digital RF SW Rx Tx Atten gt Zi gt 2 Dec rk Sai ee HA gt gt 1X ZAADCH Ono To RF Vocon GPS Connector PL 2nd zc Hi LO CLK 18Mhz ALO 7 Synth Synth I ex Abacus III Figure 3 5 Receiver Block Diagram 700 800 MHz Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Sec 1 3 5 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 GPS The GPS architecture employs a combination GPS Bluetooth IC chip which decodes GPS signals at 1575 42 MHz It is capable of producing a final position solution including full tracking and data decode capability The GPS receiver will operate in the autonomous mode only The GPS signal is tapped at the antenna port via a ser
3. v v SP2T SP2T Digital RF L SW sw sw sw RF AUX Rx Tx Atten x x i A gt To Tx Reversed 700 700 Power Dec gt ssl X gt gt gt x ZAADCH no To RF Vocon GPS Connector Cn hol y Lo CLK ASMA Luo Synth Synth Ri E Abacus Ill Figure 3 5 Receiver Block Diagram 700 800 MHz Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Sec 2 3 5 3 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 GPS The GPS architecture employs a combination GPS Bluetooth IC chip which decodes GPS signals at 1575 42 MHz It is capable of producing a final position solution including full tracking and data decode capability The GPS receiver will operate in the autonomous mode only The GPS signal is tapped at the antenna port via a series resonant network which provides a very low capacitive load to the transceiver The signal is routed though a GPS LNA and it s output is applied to the RF Controller interface connector where it is eventually routed to the expansion board for processing by the GPS Bluetooth IC The GPS receiver is setup in an autonomous one track always OTA mode also known as continuous navigation This means the GPS will continuously track satellites for as long as the radio is powered to ensure the best possible accuracy In the event the radio loses visibility of the satellites due to terrain or environmental factors such as dri
4. N Figure 8 44 Knobs Assembly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 2 8 33 Frequency and Volume Knob Assembly 1 Place the respective knobs on their respective shafts ensuring the D shape of the post is aligned with the D shape of the knob 2 Press the knob into place NOTE Considerable force is needed to press the knobs into place The use of a solid surface may be require but if used should be covered with a clean rubbery covering such as a mouse pad to prevent markings to the knob 8 9 1 3 Assemble VOCON Board Assembly D Main Chassis Assembly E Figure 8 45 Insert VOCON Board 1 Inspect the Main Chassis 15 sealing surfaces to make sure there is no surface irregularities such as scratches or indentations Clean any debris or other foreign material 2 Orient the Main Chassis 15 with the Frequency Knob 56 on top Insert the VOCON Board Assembly 14 into the chassis starting at a 45 angle and rotate the board into place Ensure the control top flex is located below the PCB and is not being pinched between the PCB and the casting See Figure 8 45 3 Tighten the Vocon Board screw by hand first to avoid cross threading Then torque the screw with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in Ibs 8 9 1 4 Assemble RF Board Assembly C dr Always replace with new thermal pads See section 8 8 4 2 on page 2 8 24 Caution 1 Inspect the Battery Connector Sea
5. sssem em 1 3 8 Figure 3 11 Controller Block Diagramm 1 3 10 Figure 5 1 Performance Checks Test Zepp 1 5 1 Figure 6 1 Radio Alignment Test Getup nennen enne nennen nn 1 6 1 Figure 6 2 Tuner Software Main Men 1 6 2 Figure 6 3 Typical Softpot Screen disse it 1 6 3 Figure 6 4 Radio Information Screen ener enne nennen nnn 1 6 4 Figure 6 5 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen VHF sse 1 6 5 Figure 6 6 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen HEI 1 6 6 Figure 6 7 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen HE 1 6 6 Figure 6 8 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 7 Figure 6 9 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen VHE 1 6 8 Figure 6 10 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHET 1 6 9 Figure 6 11 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen HE 1 6 9 Figure 6 12 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen 700 800MHZ 1 6 10 Figure 6 13 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen HE 1 6 11 Figure 6 14 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF1 sssesssseess 1 6 11 Figure 6 15 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF2 sseseeeee 1 6 12 Figure 6 16 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 12 Figure 6 17 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen VE 1 6 13 Figure 6 18 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen
6. Sif Figure 8 40 Main Housing Assembly Top Display Version 8 8 10 1 Medallion NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the Medallion 2 1 Scrape off the Medallion 2 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the Medallion is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhersive liner and place the Medallion in the recess 4 Press the Medallion 8 8 10 2 FM Label NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the FM Label 1 Scrape off the FM Label 47 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the FM Label is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Label in the recess Press the Label NOTE There are No Other serviceable components on the Main Housing Assembly M Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 31 8 8 11 Servicing Speaker Module J 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 2 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Speaker Module Seal 35 D P 35 Eg NOTE For assembly ensure NO the seal key feature is SON aligned on top as shown NN N Speaker Module 34 ___ Mic Membrane 37 pa CN Mic Mesh 36 0 gt Figure 8 41 Speaker Module 8 8 11 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also nee
7. 43009291001 7505316J16 3275031C01 0400129054 Washer Lock Antenna HLN5977_ HLN5978_ 32009351001 0375962B02 0375962B03 3009304001 33009273001 32009355001 Assembly Main Chassis W O Control Top Insert Universal Connector Pad Coin Cell Battery Seal Control Cap Std Expansion Board Kit Opt Expansion Board Kit Seal Speaker Module Screw x2 M2 5X0 45 24 45 Screw x2 M2 5X0 45 9 2 Screw RF and Vocon Board Label FM Outer Seal Main Item Motorola Part Description No Number P 55 36009257001 Knob Volume 57 03009357001 Screw Top Bezel _ Sound Dampener 61 07009369001 Support Expander PCB NOTE 1 Kit NHN7033 includes Items 15 20 22 26 27 44 55 58 When purchasing this kit need to purchase item 23 qty 2 together 2 When purchasing item 58 need to purchase items 23 qty 2 26 27 55 57 together 3 Item 58 comes with items 22 and 56 4 Item 60 comes with items 40 and 59 5 Items 40 and 59 are not orderable Both items come with item 60 Sec 2 10 3 Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Sec 2 10 4 10 3 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 10 4 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Parts List i Geh Description Assy Front Housing M2 Black Dual Display Limited Keypad 50 NHN70
8. Dead Battery Replace with charged battery Blown Fuse 2 3 On Off Switch 4 Regulators Send radio to depot Radio Dead Display Turns On 1 VOCON Board 2 RF Board 3 Expansion Board Send radio to depot Radio On Front Display Off High operating temperature above 80 C Allow radio to return to normal operating temperature No Receive Audio or Receiver Does Not Unmute Programming 1 Check if transmitted signal matches the receiver configuration PL DPL etc 2 Check if radio able to unmute with monitor function enabled Audio Distorted or Not Loud Enough Synthesizer Not On Frequency Check synthesizer frequency by measuring the transmitter frequency realign if off by more than 1000 Hz RF Sensitivity Poor 1 Synthesizer Not On Frequency Check synthesizer frequency by measuring the transmitter frequency realign if off by more than 1000 Hz 2 Antenna Switch Connector Send radio to depot 3 Receiver Front End Tuning Check RF front end tuning for optimum sensitivity using the tuner Radio Will Not Turn Off VOCON Board Send radio to depot Sec 1 9 4 9 4 Basic Troubleshooting Transmitter Troubleshooting Transmitter Troubleshooting Table 9 4 lists the possible causes of and corrections for transmitter problems Table 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause
9. Themes m Print fu File E Navigation A X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 380 025000 MHz 380 025000 123ABC1234 Radio Information E Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization 25 a Test Pattern Type Digital Voice X Tx Power Low El Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Factory Override Figure 6 32 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF1 y vay gt APX Family Tuner 2 Home Option Feature Help Open zoue ly Save As go Read Device 3Windows Z Themes ee Print Ctri P YPrint Preview File pl Device m Windows m Themes Print f Navigation A X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 000000 MHz Tx Frequency MHz 450 000000 Channel Spacing KHz 25 wi Test Pattern Type Digital Voice Tx Power Low El 123ABC1234 Radio Information El Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 33 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF2 Sec
10. To avoid a possible explosion A DO NOT charge remove or attach the battery in an area labeled hazardous atmosphere WARNING e DO NOT discard batteries in a fire If the radio is programmed for volatile key retention encryption keys will be retained for approximately 30 seconds after battery removal Caution NOTE The Motorola approved battery shipped with the APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio is uncharged Prior to using a new battery charge it per the recommended procedure for the battery 8 5 1 Attach Battery To attach the battery 1 With the radio turned off verify that the battery seal is set properly in its groove as shown in Figure 8 6 Battery Seal e a Figure 8 6 Attaching Battery Battery Seal Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery Sec 1 8 9 2 Verify that the Vacuum Port is closed by ensuring it is fully seated and the catch feature on the tab is in the main chassis notch Ga QU Vacuum Port Seal Figure 8 7 Attaching Battery Vacuum Port Seal 3 Set the battery onto the chassis as shown in Figure 8 8 and slide into position Make sure both battery latches click into position Figure 8 8 Attaching Battery Slide into Position Sec 1 8 10 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery 8 5 2 Remove Battery To remove the battery 1 With the radio turned off squeeze the two latches located nea
11. 3275002C03 61009283002 NUD7120_ NUE7365_ NUE7366_ NUF6750_ 75009299002 3271829H02 01009364001 43009291001 7505316J16 1375044C02 75009418001 4575585B01 0275891B01 3675581B01 0275361H01 HLN5977 HLN5978 32009351001 3275002C03 Item Motorola Part Description No Number p 1 NHN7024_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Full Keypad NHN7068_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Hebrew Full Keypad NHN7069_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Cyrillic Full Keypad NHN7081_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Arabic Full Keypad Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display Mic Membrane Lens Front Display Board RF VHF Board RF UHF1 Board RF UHF2 Board RF 7 800 Thermal Pad Inner Seal Connector Battery Assembly Main Chassis W O Control Top Insert Universal Connector Pad Coin Cell Battery Assy Control Top Pad Support Lever Secure Nut Spanner Antenna Knob Volume Nut Spanner Volume Std Expansion Board Kit Opt Expansion Board Kit Seal Speaker Module Mic Membrane Item Motorola Part No Number Description 39 33009261001 Label Grille Speaker for APX6000 33009261002 Label Grille Speaker for APX6000R 33009261003 Label Grille Speaker for APX5000 33009261004 Label Grille Speaker for APX5000R 41 0375962B02 Screw x2 M2 5X0 45 24 45 43 0375962B03 Screw x2 M2 5X0 45
12. Ensure there are no debris or residue left on the amplifier s surfaces Replace with new thermal pads Peel off the back liner from the thermal pads Insert the Outer Thermal Pad 10 into the shield opening Make sure the bottom surface of the pad is mating with the top surface of the amplifiers Insert the Inner Thermal Pad 11 without compressing or deforming it dr Thermal pads should always be replaced when RF Board assembly is removed Caution Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 25 8 8 5 3 Back up Battery 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 7 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 2 Remove the battery with the Black Stick NOTE Make sure the positive side is facing upwards 3 Press the new battery into the battery carrier until it is secured and fully snapped into place NOTE There are no serviceable components on the RF Board Assembly 8 8 6 Servicing of Expansion Board Assembly 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 3 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Expansion Board Assembly H Figure 8 35 Expansion Board Assembly NOTE There are no serviceable components on the Expansion Board Assembly 8 8 7 Servicing Back Chassis Assembly B Dual Display Versions 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 5 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Mic Boot 4 Mic Membrane 37 p E Uu Mic Mesh 36 _ gt Lens 7 d
13. Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Specifications for APX 6000 VHF Radios Specifications for APX 6000 VHF Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL Sec 1 xix Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 2060 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 241 mA Standby Current Drain 137 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 4 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height
14. 241 mA Standby Current Drain 137 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g RECEIVER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 179 V Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 243 uV 5 BER 0 15 pV Intermodulation typical 81 88 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 81 3 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 73 34 dB Spurious Rejection typical 90 96 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C refe
15. 800 MHz 0 8 ppm 696 Hz RF Power As above As above As above VHF 1 6 Watts UHF1 1 5 Watt UHF2 1 5 Watt 700 1 2 7 Watt 800 1 3 Watt Voice As above Set fixed 1 kHz As above As above Deviation Modulation audio level to 400 mV 12 5 kHz gt 2 1 kHz but external lt 2 5 kHz 25 kHz gt 4 1 kHz but lt 5 0 kHz Sec 2 5 14 Performance Checks Transmitter Performance Checks Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 6000XE Continued Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Voice RF Control Monitor As above Remove Press PTT button on radio Modulation Meter RF Display modulation input Say four loudly into the internal Display Bar Graphs PTT to OFF radio mic Measure Freq Selected radio TX center deviation freq 12 5 kHz 2 2 1 kHz but lt 2 5 kHz 25 kHz 2 4 1 kHz but lt 5 0 kHz PL Modulation As above Conventional PTT to continuous Deviation radios with coded squelch during the 12 5 kHz 375 Hz but conventional personality clear performance 500 Hz clear mode mode operation check 25 kHz 2 500 Hz but coded squelch or TPL channel 1000 Hz operation only test mode Secure As above Programmed As above Deviation Modulation conventional gt 3 7 kHz but x 4 3 kHz radios with channel secure conventional secure mode talkaround operation only mode operation Load key into radio See Table 5 4 on pa
16. Ctrl P Print Preview File pl Device pl Windows Themes Print pl Navigation Y B X Rx Front End Filter Softpot Configuration Mode Program All Radio RSSI Autotune Test Signal Frequency 230 775 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 123ABC1234 a Radio Information 230 775 UHF R2 1312 1312 s Transmitter Alignments i558 DEE 240 775 UHF R2 1558 el Tx Power Characterization Points 251 775 UHF R2 1843 1843 E Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 265 625 UHF R2 2169 2169 Tx Deviation Balance mm Receiver Alignments 265 775 UHF R2 2172 2172 Rx Front End Filter A 2410 Performance Testing 275 775 UHF R2 2410 lus Bit Error Rate 286 775 UHF R2 2672 2872 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 300 625 UHF R2 3028 3028 Figure 6 26 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UHF2 Test Signal Amplitude 1 4095 Kal i de A Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 1 6 21 6 7 Performance Testing 6 7 1 Bit Error Rate This section describes the Bit Error Rate BER test of the radio s receiver at a desired frequency see Figure 6 27 to Figure 6 30 6 7 1 1 Bit Error Rate Fields Set up the R2670 Communication Analyzer as follows 1 Connect the RF Input port of the radio under test to the RF IN OUT port of the R2670 Service Monitor Set up the R2670 Service Monitor n the Display Zone select P
17. Figure 8 23 Remove Back Chassis Assembly from Main Chassis Assembly Sec 2 8 18 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly 8 7 6 Removal of the RF Board Assembly C NOTE Reconfirm the coax cable connector on the bottom side of the RF Board is disconnected before removing the RF Board 1 Remove the RF and Vocon Board screw 45 then unplug the RF Board Assembly C from the VOCON Board Assembly D by using the Black Stick Slowly lift the RF Board Assembly enough to allow access to the small coax cable Unplug the small coax cable using a Black Stick or a pair of small tweezers Place the RF Board Assembly in a clean and ESD safe area to avoid contamination to the Battery Connector Seal 13 and electrical damage to the electronics respectively Caution Replace Thermal Pads 10 11 whenever RF Board Assembly is removed CEN QS 62 gt AS RF and Vocon Board Screw 45 Small Coax Cable SS o NEN Q SN Connector RS 3 NN 88 AY aN 3 A S NA SS SINN IN S NO IN Z YX SA S O Sy Pd AY N M Y Ce K Y US lt Figure 8 25 Remove RF Board Assembly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 2 8 19 8 7 7 Removal of the VOCON Board Assembly D NOTE Reconfirm the Flex connector between the Control Top Assembly F and the VOCON Board Assembly D is disconnected Failure to do so may damage the connectors or the flex 1 Ensure RF Board is remov
18. Figure 8 36 Figure 8 37 Figure 8 38 Figure 8 39 Figure 8 40 Figure 8 41 Figure 8 42 Figure 8 43 Figure 8 44 Figure 8 45 Figure 8 46 Figure 8 47 Figure 8 48 Figure 8 49 Figure 8 50 Figure 8 51 Figure 8 52 Figure 8 53 Figure 8 54 Figure 8 55 Figure 8 56 Figure 8 57 Figure 8 58 List of Figures Removing the Antenna redada eaaa Ia pa adai a a A eaaa aR R aie 2 8 7 Attaching Battery Battery Seal rarose ain Enon r EnA EEE EREEREER ASEE ERARE 2 8 8 Attaching Battery Vacuum Port Geal enm 2 8 9 Attaching Battery Slide into Position oooonnnccccnnnnncccccnnnconcccconannncncnnnan occ ccnn non nccncnnnnnnnnnns 2 8 9 Squeezing the Release Latches 0 eeccccceeeeeecccceeteeeneneeeeenenceeeeteneneneeesenencaeeeeeneneesenetens 2 8 10 Removing the Battery diiniita lac pico Eee Pers cp e Eu M omo na 2 8 10 Removing the Thumb Screw a nennen ener nennen nennen nnns 2 8 11 Engaging Hook and Seating Cover 2 8 12 Securing the COVOITURAGE aia 2 8 12 Remove Center Screws dai ted dci n sativa eee 2 8 13 Remove BOOM STEWS aa roit Eden 2 8 13 REMOVE TOP COW Si cece anda uet sd UE ete ee epe dele er teeth ts 2 8 14 Remove Speaker Module 2 8 14 Pull Expander Board Support Opt Expansion Board 2 8 15 Remove Expander Board Support sssssssssssssseseeeeeeee mee men 2 8 15 Remove Flex Connectors and Expansion Board Aesembhy esses 2 8 16 Remove Antenna Coax Cable Connect
19. Ill State Law Rights SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR LIMITATION ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY This warranty gives specific legal rights and there may be other rights which may vary from state to state IV How To Get Warranty Service You must provide proof of purchase bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number in order to receive warranty service and also deliver or send the Product item transportation and insurance prepaid to an authorized warranty service location Warranty service will be provided by Motorola through one of its authorized warranty service locations If you first contact the company which sold you the Product it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service You can also call Motorola at 1 888 567 7347 US Canada V What This Warranty Does Not Cover A Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner B Defects or damage from misuse accident water or neglect Defects or damage from improper testing operation maintenance installation alteration modification or adjustment Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship E A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications disassemblies or repairs including without limitation the addition to the Product of no
20. and select 5 Hz on the soft key menu Select 20 kHz for the Low Pass setting n the RF Control section of the R 2670 move the cursor to the B W setting and select WIDE 100 kHz on the soft key menu Place the R 2670 cursor in the Display zone Select AC VOLTS on the soft key menu Move the cursor to the Range setting and select AUTO 2 Initial setup using the 8901 Series Modulation Analyzer Press the FM MEASUREMENT button The Error 03 input level too low indication is normal until an input signal is applied Simultaneously press the Peak and Peak buttons Both LEDs on the buttons should light Press the 15 kHz LP filter key 3 Select the TX Deviation Balance alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit frequencies to be used See Figure 6 21 to Figure 6 24 4 Inthe RF Control section of the R2670 set the service monitor to the desired frequency as shown in the frequency list in the TX Deviation Balance alignment screen 5 Left click the PTT Tone Low button Left click the slider of the frequency selected should be the same frequency as step 4 Left click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is transmitting 8 Measure and Record the Low Tone Tx Deviation value from the 8901 Series Analyzer or the AC voltage value from the R2670 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2
21. port on the R 2670 Press the SPF key on the R 2670 to display the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Move the cursor to High Pass and select 5 Hz on the soft key menu Select 20 kHz for the Low Pass setting In the RF Control section of the R 2670 move the cursor to the B W setting and select WIDE 100 kHz on the soft key menu Place the R 2670 cursor in the Display zone Select AC VOLTS on the soft key menu Move the cursor to the Range setting and select AUTO Sec 1 6 16 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments 2 Initial setup using the 8901_ Series Modulation Analyzer Press the FM MEASUREMENT button The Error Oinput level too low indication is normal until an input signal is applied Simultaneously press the Peak and Peak buttons Both LEDs on the buttons should light Press the 15 kHz LP filter key 3 Select the TX Deviation Balance alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit frequencies to be used See Figure 6 21 and Figure 6 24 4 Inthe RF Control section of the R2670 set the service monitor to the desired frequency as shown in the frequency list in the TX Deviation Balance alignment screen Left click the PTT Tone Low button Left click the slider of the frequency selected should be the same frequency as step 4 Left click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is
22. radio alignment 2 6 1 basic description 2 1 2 dual display model RF test mode 2 5 5 2 5 10 dual display version control top and keypad test mode 2 5 6 control top test mode 2 5 11 entering display test mode 2 5 3 2 5 8 exploded view complete top display version 2 10 5 complete dual display version 2 10 2 2 10 4 partial 2 8 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 features 2 1 2 FLASHport feature 2 1 2 information screen 2 6 4 model numbering system 2 x models 2 1 2 reassembling housing assembly 2 8 32 submergible models disassembling 2 8 41 reassembling 2 8 41 submersibility servicing 2 8 40 specialized test equipment 2 8 41 standards 2 8 40 vacuum test 2 8 41 test environments 2 5 6 test frequencies 2 5 5 2 5 10 test mode dual display version 2 5 3 top display model 2 5 8 radios submergibility checks 2 2 1 receiver ASTRO conventional channel tests 2 5 12 performance checks 2 5 12 troubleshooting 2 9 3 receiving analog mode 2 3 2 ASTRO mode 2 3 9 reference oscillator alignment 2 6 4 RF board assembly assemble 2 8 33 removing 2 8 18 servicing 2 8 24 Sec 2 Index 3 rf coax cable servicing 2 8 22 RF test mode dual display version 2 5 5 2 5 10 S secure kit encryption 2 7 1 service aids 2 4 2 servicing antenna o ring 2 8 21 back chassis assembly dual display 2 8 25 top display 2 8 27 backup battery 2 8 25 battery seal 2 8 24 chassis ground contact 2 8 22 coin cell pad 2 8 21 color display 2 8 26 control top assembly 2 8 23
23. 4 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly While holding the Speaker Module down place the two top screws 42 into the their respective holes and torque the screws to 10 in lbs with an IP8 Torx Bit in a torque driver See Figure 8 52 IMPORTANT For proper sealing Speaker Module J must be held down during the torquing of the screws Top Screws 42 8 9 1 9 Assemble Speaker Grille Assembly K 1 2 3 Install the Speaker Grille K by inserting the top lip under the Control Top Bezel 24 and rotating the grille into place See Figure 8 53 Center Screws 41 Vacuum Port Seal NN QNS N LY So NA WW NW NY eu H Wo BY Figure 8 53 Insert Center Screws NOTE Ensure the Vacuum Port Seal is in place and the Vacuum Port Seal screw shaft is aligned with the screw hole Insert the two center screws 41 and torque to 10 in Ibs See Figure 8 53 If removed insert the two bottom screws 43 into the screw holes at the bottom of the radio as shown in Figure 8 54 and torque to 10 in Ibs Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 1 8 39 8 10 8 10 1 8 10 2 8 10 3 Bottom Screws 43 N IA A Figure 8 54 Insert Bottom Screws NOTE Refer to the appropriate section in this manual for reinstalling the antenna battery or any other accessory that was previously connected or attached to the radio prior to servicing Ensuring Rad
24. 66009261001 Motorola Secure Lever Driver Torque Vacuum NLN9839 Motorola For Vacuum Test Pump Kit Vacuum 66009259001 Motorola For Vacuum Test and Pressure Test Adapter Pressure NTN4265_ Motorola For Pressure Test Pump Kit 8 3 Fastener Torque Chart Table 8 3 lists the various fasteners by part number and description followed by the torque values and the location where used Torque all fasteners to the recommended value when assembling the radio Table 8 3 Required Tools and Supplies E OL Description Repair Torque in Ibs 0275361H01 Volume Spanner Nut 31 8 0275891B01 Antenna Spanner Nut 27 16 0375962B01 Top Screw 42 10 0375962B02 Center Screw 41 10 0375962B03 Bottom Screw 43 10 0375962B04 Control Top Screw 44 8 03009304001 RF amp Vocon Board Screw 45 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Antenna Sec 1 8 7 8 4 Antenna This section explains how to attach and remove the antenna 8 4 1 Attach Antenna To attach the antenna With the radio turned off turn the antenna clockwise to attach it to the radio Figure 8 4 Attaching the Antenna 8 4 2 Remove Antenna To remove the antenna With the radio turned off turn the antenna counter clockwise to remove it from the radio Sec 1 8 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery 8 5 Battery This section explains how to properly attach and remove the battery
25. APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Partial Exploded View Sec 1 8 4 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Exploded View Main Subassemblies Figure 8 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Partial Exploded View Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Exploded View Main Subassemblies Sec 1 8 5 Item Letter Description Table 8 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Partial Exploded View Parts List Exploded View and Parts List A Main Housing Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 B Back Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 C RF Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 D VOCON Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 E Main Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 F Control Top Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1
26. C to 85 C Bandwidth 90 MHz RF Power 380 470 MHz 5W Power Supply Analog Sensitivity typical Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH 12 dB SINAD 0 224 yV Frequency Stability typical or Lithium lon Battery Li lon 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000035 Digital Sensitivity typical Battery Voltage 1 BER 0 298 uV Emission typical conducted 75 dBc Nominal 7 5 Vde 5 BER 0 2 uV Range 6 to 9 Vdc FM Hum and Noise typical Intermodulation typical 81 5 dB Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 5 dB Transmit Current Drain Typical 1960 mA 12 5 kHz 52 dB Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 242 mA Selectivity typical Standby Current Drain 133 mA 25 kHz Channel 77 dB Distortion typical 196 12 5 kHz Channel 66 7 dB Recommended Battery Modulation Limiting 25 kHz chnls 5 0 kHz Li lon Slim PMN4403_ Spurious Rejection typical 80 5 dB 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz or Li lon NNTN7038_ 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ Frequency Stability or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc or NiMH NNTN7037_ 12 5 kHz 68 dBc or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573_ Rated Audio or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 Internal Speaker 500 mW Emissions Designators or Li Ion Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 External Speaker 500 mW 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 8K10F1W 20KOF1E FM Intrins
27. Frequency Softpot Value 450 025 UHF R2 10496 460 025 UHF R2 11008 471 025 UHF R2 11648 485 025 UHF R2 12288 495 025 UHF R2 13056 506 025 UHF R2 13824 519 975 UHF R2 15104 Figure 6 23 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHF2 Sec 1 6 18 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments pM r GA WS APX Family Tuner E Home Option Feature Help Open zoue Jy Save As Read Device Windows Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File m Device f Windows Themes fi Print n Navigation DE Tx Deviation Balance Softpot Configuration Mode Program ANE PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 PTT Tone Low High x Frequency New Softpot Value 0 32767 123ABC1234 Radio Information 764 0125 19593 19593 lal de Transmitter Alignments o P fF la 769 0125 19930 19930 e Ae D Tx Power Characterization Points 775 9875 20592 20592 Tx Power Characterization E PA Saturation Reference 794 0125 18793 18793 m m SA 809 0125 19380 19380 A Bit Error Rate E Transmitter Test Pattern IMS meo 20931 es ch pda Factory Override 851 0125 18525 18525 mM 860 0125 18570 18570 869 8875 18977 18977 la Figure 6 24 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 9 Left click the PTT Tone High button 10 Adj
28. Gently seat the seal around the perimeter of the groove ensuring the key feature is oriented as shown in Figure 8 47 Set the Back Chassis Assembly onto the Main Chassis Assembly E Sec 2 8 36 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 8 9 1 6 Assemble Main Housing Assembly A L M 1 Stretch the Main Housing Assembly A L M side walls outward with both hands just enough to clear the Main Chassis Assembly E and place it onto the radio Ensure the top edge of the housing and the bottom edge of the control top are aligned as shown in Figure 8 48 Squeeze the Main Housing Assembly A L M and the Main Chassis Assembly E in the battery area until the Main Housing Assembly fully snaps in place onto the Main Chassis Assembly Stretch Outwards Figure 8 48 Place Housing into Main Chassis 8 9 1 7 Assemble Expansion Board Assembly H Control Top Assembly Flex Antenna Coax Cable Connector Figure 8 49 Assemble Expansion Board Assembly If the Control Top Assembly F or VOCON Board Assembly D was NOT removed skip to step 2 Connect the Control Top Flex to the VOCON Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 49 If replacing new Control Top 58 or Main Chassis Assembly 15 add Control Top Support Pads 23 to stainless steel backers at the locations shown on Figure 8 50 If the RF Board Assembly 9 was NOT removed skip to step 4 Carefully align the Antenna Coax Plug to the Coax Receptacle on t
29. HEI 1 6 14 Figure 6 19 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen HE 1 6 14 Figure 6 20 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 15 Figure 6 21 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen HE 1 6 16 Figure 6 22 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen HEI 1 6 17 Figure 6 23 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHF2 sse 1 6 17 Figure 6 24 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 18 Figure 6 25 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UIHET em 1 6 19 Figure 6 26 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UIHEZ eme 1 6 20 Figure 6 27 Bit Error Rate Screen VHE nenne eene nennen neris 1 6 22 Figure 6 28 Bit Error Rate Screen UHF 1 ennemis 1 6 22 Figure 6 29 Bit Error Rate Screen UHEZ eene ennemi TEREE 1 6 23 Figure 6 30 Bit Error Rate Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 23 Figure 6 31 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen HE 1 6 24 Figure 6 32 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF1 ssssssssee mee 1 6 25 Figure 6 33 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF2 sssssssssse emm eee 1 6 25 Figure 6 34 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen 700 800 MHz 1 6 26 Figure 8 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Partial Exploded View 1 8 2 Figure 8 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Partial Exploded View 1 8 3 Figure 8 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Partial E
30. K 8 9 Radio Reassembly This section contains instructions for reassembling the radio 8 9 4 Reassemble the Main Sub Assemblies 8 9 1 1 Assemble Control Top Assembly F to Main Chassis Assembly E Control Top Screws 44 Control Top Assembly 21 Figure 8 43 Control Top Bezel Assembly 1 Verify there are no surface irregularities such as scratches or indentations on both the Control Top Main Seal Grove and the Seal s mating surface on the Main Chassis Assembly 15 Also ensure that the Control Top Main Seal 22 and surrounding surfaces are free of debris and other foreign material 2 Verify Control Top Main Seal is properly seated into its groove and place Control Top Assembly onto Main Chassis Assembly as shown in Figure 8 43 3 Torque both screws with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in Ibs Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 1 8 33 8 9 1 2 Assemble Knobs and Top Bezel Assembly G Il lt Volume Knob 29 Frequency Knob 28 Torque Adder 30 Antenna Washer 26 e lt q Volume Spanner Nut 31 lt q Volume Washer 32 Figure 8 44 Top Bezel Assembly 1 With the Secure Lever 25 in place slide the Control Top Bezel onto the Control Top Ensure that the Secure Lever is keyed correctly on the Frequency outer shaft Use the Secure Lever Setter to fully set the lever into place 2 While holding down the bezel place the Volume Wa
31. Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUF6750_ Assembly RF Board 7 800 MHz X X X PMLN5335 User Guide CD APX 6000 APX 7000 Not Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 1 xxvi Specifications for APX 6000Li VHF Radios Specifications for APX 6000Li VHF Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vde Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 2060 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 273 mA Standby Current Drain 142 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery
32. Rx Frequency This field selects the Receive Frequency directly in MHz Test Pattern This field selects the Digital test pattern to be received by the radio Choices are Standard Tone Test Pattern Framed 1011 F2 1031 and Standard Interface Test Pattern CCITT V 52 Modulation Type This field represents the digital modulation type of the incoming signal on which BER is to be calculated Continuous Operation This field allows the user the option to repeat the BER test indefinitely A selection of Yes will cause the radio to calculate BER on a continuous basis and update the results on this screen after each integration time A selection of No will cause the BER test to execute for only one sample of the integration time and then update the display Audio This field allows the user to select the audio output during a test Selecting Internal will cause the radio s built in speaker to unmute to any signals at the desired frequency which are present during the test Selecting External will route the same signal to the radio s accessory connector audio output Selecting Mute will disable the audio output NOTE There will be no audio option available for APX 7000 when performing a Bit Error Rate Test BER Integration Time BER Integration Time carries with Test Pattern Type e Number of Frames Number of Frames over which bit error result are accumulated to produce the result Sec 2 6 22 Radio Alignment Procedures Performan
33. Tx Power Characterization Points 251 775 UHF R2 1843 1843 E Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 265 625 UHF R2 2169 2169 Tx Deviation Balance mm Receiver Alignments 265 775 UHF R2 2172 2172 Rx Front End Filter A 2410 Performance Testing 275 775 UHF R2 2410 lus Bit Error Rate 286 775 UHF R2 2672 2872 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 300 625 UHF R2 3028 3028 Figure 6 26 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UHF2 Test Signal Amplitude 1 4095 Kal i de A Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 2 6 21 6 7 Performance Testing 6 7 1 Bit Error Rate This section describes the Bit Error Rate BER test of the radio s receiver at a desired frequency see Figure 6 27 to Figure 6 30 6 7 1 1 Bit Error Rate Fields Set up the R2670 Communication Analyzer as follows 1 Connect the RF Input port of the radio under test to the RF IN OUT port of the R2670 Service Monitor Set up the R2670 Service Monitor n the Display Zone select PROJ 25 STD mode and set the meter to RF DISPLAY In the RF Zone configure the analyzer as follows RF Control Generate Preset B W NB Freq Test frequency Ex 851 0625 MHz Output Level 50 0 dBm Gen RF Out RF I O Inthe Audio Zone select the 1011 Hz PAT code and set the deviation to PROJ25Dev 2 83 kHz The bit error rate screen contains the following fields
34. W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g RECEIVER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 17uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 243 uV 5 BER 0 15 uV Intermodulation typical 81 88 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 81 3 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 73 34 dB Spurious Rejection typical 90 96 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 56 8 dB 12 5 kHz 50 29 dB Distortion typical 1 57 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz TRANSMITTER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz RF Power 136 174 MHz 1 6 W Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 75 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 1 xx Specifications fo
35. communication network Pins whose function is programmable See General Purpose Input Output Disconnect The first information display shown after a radio completes its self test Object code executed by the host processor in an ASTRO subscriber radio The host is responsible for control oriented tasks such as decoding and responding to user inputs See integrated circuit Intermediate Frequency A sub band voice encoding algorithm used in ASTRO digital voice Data transmitted on the control channel from a subscriber unit to the central control unit Glossary Term integrated circuit ISW key variable loader kHz kilohertz KVL LCD LED light emitting diode liquid crystal display LO low speed handshake LSH Master In Slave Out Master Out Slave In MCU MDC menu entry MHz Megahertz microcontroller unit MISO Sec 3 Glossary 5 Definition An assembly of interconnected components on a small semiconductor chip usually made of silicon One chip can contain millions of microscopic components and perform many functions See inbound signaling word A device used to load encryption keys into a radio See kilohertz One thousand cycles per second Used especially as a radio frequency unit See key variable loader See liquid crystal display See LED An electronic device that lights up when electricity is passed through it An LCD uses two sheets of polarizing material with a liquid c
36. main housing assembly assemble 1 8 36 removing 1 8 16 main lens servicing 1 8 27 maintenance cleaning 1 2 1 inspection 1 2 1 ruggedized radio submergibility checks 1 2 1 manual notations 1 1 1 medallion servicing 1 8 29 1 8 30 microphone boot servicing 1 8 26 1 8 28 microphone membrane servicing 1 8 26 1 8 27 1 8 31 microphone mesh servicing 1 8 26 1 8 27 1 8 31 model chart 7 800 1 xiii 1 xx 1 xxvii numbering system 1 x UHF1 1 xii 1 xviii 1 xxv 1 xxvi UHF2 1 xix VHF 1 xi 1 xvii model numbering system radio 1 x multikey conventional 1 7 2 trunked 1 7 2 N notations manual 1 1 1 warning caution and danger 1 1 1 Index P performance checks receiver 1 5 12 test setup 1 5 1 transmitter 1 5 13 performance test tuner 1 6 21 power up error codes 1 9 1 precautions handling 1 2 2 R radio alignment 1 6 1 basic description 1 1 2 dual display model RF test mode 1 5 5 1 5 10 dual display version control top and keypad test mode 1 5 6 control top test mode 1 5 11 entering display test mode 1 5 3 1 5 8 exploded view complete top display version 1 10 5 complete dual display version 1 10 2 1 10 4 partial 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 features 1 1 2 FLASHport feature 1 1 2 information screen 1 6 4 model numbering system 1 x models 1 1 2 reassembling housing assembly 1 8 32 submergible models disassembling 1 8 40 reassembling 1 8 40 submersibility servicing 1 8 39 specialized test equip
37. monitor scan list TSOP TX UART UHF USK Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter Universal Connector Universal Serial Bus USB Glossary Definition The user will talk on the channel that was selected before the radio entered the emergency state Bypassing a repeater and talking directly to another unit for local unit to unit communications An organization or group of radio users who communicate with each other using the same communications path A scan list that can include both talkgroups trunked and channels conventional A type of dynamic random access memory DRAM package that is commonly used in memory applications A timer that limits the length of a transmission A continuous sub audible tone transmitted with the carrier See time out timer Transmitter receiver A device that both transmits and receives analog or digital signals Also abbreviated as XCVR Electronic equipment that generates and amplifies an RF carrier signal modulates the signal and then radiates it into space The automatic sharing of communications paths between a large number of users Allows users to share a smaller number of frequencies because a repeater or communications path is assigned to a talkgroup for the duration of a conversation See also conventional A scan list that includes talkgroups that are all from the same trunking system See thin small outline package Transmit See also Universal Asynchron
38. release 54 0 appears Press 4 55 1 appears release 55 0 appears Press EA 56 1 appears release 56 0 appears Press 57 1 appears release 57 0 appears Press i 58 1 appears release 58 0 appears Press B 59 1 appears release 59 0 appears Press 4 128 1 appears release 128 0 appears Press 129 1 appears release 129 0 appears Press 5 130 1 appears release 130 0 appears Press ll 1131 1 appears release 131 0 appears Press E 132 1 appears release 132 0 appears Press BB 133 1 appears release 133 0 appears Press amp 134 1 appears release 134 0 appears Press a 135 1 appears release 135 0 appears Press e 136 1 appears release 136 0 appears 5 2 4 RGB Test Mode To perform the RGB Color Test 2 00 mS OV ON gt Press and release Top Button Orange button Press any key Crosstalk test patterns appears Press any key White color test appears Press any key Red color horizontal lines appears Press any key until all 13 red color horizontal lines appears Press any key Green color vertical line appears Press any key until all 13 green color vertical lines appears Press any key Black color test appears Press any key Blue color test appears Press any key Vendor specific display test appears Press any key T
39. test mode test environments 1 5 6 test frequencies 1 5 5 1 5 10 Sec 1 Index 2 dual display version control top and keypad test mode 1 5 6 control top test mode 1 5 11 entering test mode 1 5 3 1 5 8 RF test mode 1 5 5 1 5 10 E encryption index selecting with keypad 1 7 4 selecting with menu 1 7 3 key erasing all keys 1 7 4 key zeroization 1 7 4 selecting with keypad 1 7 3 selecting with menu 1 7 2 secure kit 1 7 1 troubleshooting chart 1 9 4 error codes operational 1 9 2 power up 1 9 1 expansion board assembly assemble 1 8 36 removing 1 8 15 servicing 1 8 25 expansion board theory of operation 1 3 11 exploded view complete dual display version 1 10 2 1 10 4 top display version 1 10 5 partial 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 F field programming equipment 1 4 2 FLASHport 1 1 2 FM Label servicing 1 8 29 1 8 30 G grille label servicing 1 8 32 H handling precautions non ruggedized radios 1 2 2 ruggedized radios 1 2 2 housing assembly reassembling 1 8 32 index encryption selecting with keypad 1 7 4 selecting with menu 1 7 3 Index K key encryption erasing all keys 1 7 4 key zeroization 1 7 4 loading 1 7 1 selecting with keypad 1 7 3 selecting with menu 1 7 2 knobs and top bezel assembly assemble 1 8 33 removing 1 8 19 servicing 1 8 23 L loading an encryption key 1 7 1 main chassis assembly removing 1 8 20 main housing dual display servicing 1 8 28 top display servicing 1 8 30
40. 1 6 26 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Transmitter Test Patterr Figure 6 34 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen 700 800 MHz Chapter 7 Encryption 7 1 This chapter provides procedures for using the encryption capability of your radio The following procedures are outlined Loading an encryption key Selecting an encryption key Selecting an Index only applicable to Dual Display configured radios Erasing an encryption key only applicable to Dual Display configured radios Load an Encryption Key Keys will be loaded from the KVL to the radio in either clear or encrypted form depending on the configuration of the CPS parameter KVL FIPS Level 3 Approved Mode If the parameter is disabled keys will be sent in clear form if the parameter is enabled keys will be sent to the radio in encrypted form NOTE A KVL3000 Plus with software version R03 52 45 or greater must be used to load keys to a radio with KVL FIPS Level 3 Approved Mode enabled To load an encryption key 1 Referto the key variable loader KVL manual for equipment connections and setup 2 Attach the KVL to the radio The top display shows KEYLOAD whereas KEYLOADING is shown on the front display of a Dual Display configured radio All other radio functions except for power down backlight and volume are locked out 3 Referto the KVL manual for how to load the encryption keys into the radio When the key is loaded
41. 10 2 G Knobs amp Top Bezel Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 H Expansion Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 J Speaker Module Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 K Speaker Grille Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 2 L Main Housing Assembly Refer Figure 10 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View on page 1 10 4 M Main Housing Assembly Refer Figure 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Top Display Exploded View on page 1 10 5 N Back Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Top Display Exploded View on page 1 10 5 Sec 1 8 6 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Required Tools and Supplies 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies Table 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies Motorola Supplier Tools Part Number Supplier Part Number Remarks Bit Torx IP8 Torx T8 may be used but Torx Plus IP8 is recommended Bit Volume 66009256001 Motorola Spanner Nut Bit Antenna 66009258001 Motorola Spanner Black Stick Hexacon MA 800G Electric Co Seater
42. 10 4 1 Vacuum Pump Kit NLN9839 The Vacuum Pump Kit includes a Vacuum Pump with gauge and a Vacuum Hose The Vacuum Adapter p n 66009259001 which connects the vacuum pump to the radio must be ordered separately 8 10 4 2 Pressure Pump Kit NTN4265 _ 8 10 5 8 10 6 8 10 7 The Pressure Pump Kit includes a Pressure Pump with gauge and a Pressure Hose As with the Vacuum Pump Kit above the Vacuum Adapter connects the pressure pump to the radio Disassembly Disassemble the radio according to section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Reassembly dr Do not reassemble the radio without first performing the following preliminary inspection procedure Caution To reassemble the radio 1 Inspect the seal on the Back Chassis Assembly B N for any damage or foreign material Inspect the seal on the Speaker Module J for any damage or foreign material Inspect the Battery Connector Seal 13 on the RF Board Assembly C for any damage PON Inspect the mating seal surfaces on the Main Chassis 15 for all of the above seals for damage or foreign material that might prevent the seals from sealing properly Continue reassembling the radio according to section 8 9 on page 2 8 32 Tighten all hardware that was loosened or removed Vacuum Test The Vacuum Test uses a Vacuum Pump to create a negative pressure condition inside the radio The gauge measures this pressure and is used to monitor any pressure changes in the radio A prope
43. 2 alignment tuner bit error rate test 2 6 21 introduction 2 6 1 main menu 2 6 2 radio information screen 2 6 4 reference oscillator 2 6 4 softpot use 2 6 2 test setup 2 6 1 transmit deviation balance 2 6 16 transmitter test pattern 2 6 24 analog mode receiving 2 3 2 transmitting 2 3 7 antenna attaching 2 8 7 removing 2 8 7 antenna o ring servicing 2 8 21 ARM theory of operation 2 3 11 assemble back chassis assembly 2 8 35 control top assembly 2 8 32 expansion board assembly 2 8 36 knobs 2 8 32 main housing assembly 2 8 36 RF board assembly 2 8 33 speaker grill assembly 2 8 39 speaker module 2 8 38 vocon board assembly 2 8 33 ASTRO mode receiving 2 3 9 transmitting 2 3 9 audio theory of operation 2 3 11 B back chassis assembly assemble 2 8 35 dual display servicing 2 8 25 removing 2 8 17 top display servicing 2 8 27 backup battery servicing 2 8 25 battery attaching 2 8 8 removing 2 8 10 battery seal servicing 2 8 24 bit error rate test 2 6 21 C chassis ground contact servicing 2 8 22 cleaning external plastic surfaces 2 2 1 coin cell pad servicing 2 8 21 color display servicing 2 8 26 control top and keypad test mode dual display version 2 5 6 control top assembly assemble 2 8 32 removing 2 8 20 servicing 2 8 23 control top main seal servicing 2 8 23 control top test mode dual display version 2 5 11 controller ARM theory of operation 2 3 11 audio theory of operation 2 3 11 theory of operation 2
44. 2 8 3 2 8 4 F field programming equipment 2 4 2 FLASHport 2 1 2 FM Label servicing 2 8 29 2 8 30 H handling precautions after submerging 2 2 2 non ruggedized radios 2 2 2 housing assembly reassembling 2 8 32 index encryption selecting with keypad 2 7 4 selecting with menu 2 7 3 Index K key encryption erasing all keys 2 7 4 key zeroization 2 7 4 loading 2 7 1 selecting with keypad 2 7 3 selecting with menu 2 7 2 knobs assemble 2 8 32 removing 2 8 20 L loading an encryption key 2 7 1 main chassis assembly removing 2 8 21 main housing dual display servicing 2 8 29 top display servicing 2 8 30 main housing assembly assemble 2 8 36 removing 2 8 17 main lens servicing 2 8 27 maintenance cleaning 2 2 1 inspection 2 2 1 radio submergibility checks 2 2 1 manual notations 2 1 1 medallion servicing 2 8 29 medallion servicing 2 8 30 microphone boot servicing 2 8 26 2 8 28 microphone membrane servicing 2 8 26 2 8 28 2 8 31 microphone mesh servicing 2 8 26 2 8 28 2 8 31 model chart 7 800 2 xiv numbering system 2 x UHF1 2 xii UHF2 2xiii VHF 2 xi model numbering system radio 2 x multikey conventional 2 7 2 trunked 2 7 2 N notations manual 2 1 1 Index warning caution and danger 2 1 1 P performance checks receiver 2 5 12 test setup 2 5 1 transmitter 2 5 13 performance test tuner 2 6 21 power up error codes 2 9 1 precautions handling 2 2 2 R
45. 3 10 user interface block theory of operation 2 3 11 controller expansion board theory of operation 2 3 11 D disassembly reassembly antenna attaching 2 8 7 removing 2 8 7 back chassis assembly removing 2 8 17 battery attaching 2 8 8 removing 2 8 10 control top assembly removing 2 8 20 expansion board assembly removing 2 8 15 housing assembly reassembling 2 8 32 introduction 2 8 1 knobs assembly removing 2 8 20 main chassis assembly removing 2 8 21 main housing assembly removing 2 8 17 RF board assembly removing 2 8 18 speaker grill assembly removing 2 8 13 speaker module removing 2 8 14 universal connector cover attaching 2 8 12 removing 2 8 11 vocon board assembly removing 2 8 19 Sec 2 Index 2 display radio test mode test environments 2 5 6 test frequencies 2 5 5 2 5 10 dual display version control top and keypad test mode 2 5 6 control top test mode 2 5 11 entering test mode 2 5 3 2 5 8 RF test mode 2 5 5 2 5 10 E encryption index selecting with keypad 2 7 4 selecting with menu 2 7 3 key erasing all keys 2 7 4 key zeroization 2 7 4 selecting with keypad 2 7 3 selecting with menu 2 7 2 secure kit 2 7 1 troubleshooting chart 2 9 4 error codes operational 2 9 2 power up 2 9 1 expansion board assembly assemble 2 8 36 removing 2 8 15 servicing 2 8 25 expansion board theory of operation 2 3 11 exploded view complete dual display version 2 10 2 2 10 4 top display version 2 10 5 partial 2 8 2
46. 4 Encryption Erase an Encryption Key 7 4 2 Use the Keypad To select an index using the keypad 1 Press until the display shows KSet 2 Press CM EI or directly below KSet The display shows the last user selected and stored index 3 Using the keypad enter the number of the desired key NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed 4 Press XM EES or ES directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display 5 Press a the PTT button or El EJ or ED directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu f the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone 7 5 Erase an Encryption Key This section describes two methods for erasing an encryption key 7 5 1 Method 1 Key Zeroization Multikey Only To zeroize an encryption key 1 Press until the display shows Eras 2 Press Ml EM or directly below Eras The display shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys Select single encryption key or all encrytion keys deletion from the OPTN menu 5 Press fm the PTT button or El E3 or ED directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob
47. 576 Mhz DDR Memory Main Microphone USER INTERFACE Enuvotion Provessor Acc Speaker Top Display Typ Acc Microphone Interface Top Display Data Display Data Display amp KeyPad KeyPad Expansion Board Side Side Connector EXPANSION MEMORY BLUETOOTH GPS Connector L amp ENCRYPTION PROCESSOR Expansion Board Expansion Board Basic Version Full Version Encryption Processor Encryption Processor e MMC NAND Flash 4GB Bluetooth GPS Accelerometer Figure 3 11 Controller Block Diagram Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section Sec 2 3 11 3 4 1 The ARM controller core of the OMAP processor handles the power up sequence of all devices including firmware upgrades and all operating system tasks that are associated with FLASH and SDRAM memories and user interface communication The FLASH memory 64 MB is required to store the firmware tuning and Codeplug settings which upon initialization get read and stored into SDRAM 32 MB for execution The ARM and DSP core jointly control and configure audio wireless and RF devices linked to the Serial Peripheral Interface SPI and Synchronous Serial Interface SSI buses to enable radio FM and optional wireless communication protocols For encryption a separate ARM processor is used MACE to encode and decode encryption packets coming in from the main OMAP processor through the SSI interface Its firmware is flashed via the main processor during an upgrade req
48. 7 Attaching Battery Vacuum Port Seal 3 Setthe battery onto the chassis as shown in Figure 8 8 and slide into position Make sure both battery latches click into position N A FE ZU pdt d ec E E Zi S N pets o Figure 8 8 Attaching Battery Slide into Position Sec 2 8 10 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery 8 5 2 Remove Battery To remove the battery 1 With the radio turned off squeeze the two latches located near the bottom on the sides of the battery Battery Latch other one on opposite side Figure 8 9 Squeezing the Release Latches 2 While squeezing the latches remove the battery by sliding it out as shown E ER A Figure 8 10 Removing the Battery Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Universal Connector Cover Sec 2 8 11 8 6 Universal Connector Cover This section explains how to remove and attach the Universal Connector Cover 46 dr When the universal connector is not in use keep it covered with the Universal Connector Cover Caution 8 6 1 Remove Universal Connector Cover To remove the Universal Connector Cover 46 1 Unscrew the thumb screw If the screw is too tight a hex driver may be used NOTE Do not remove the screw It should remain captive in the cover SEH KE Thumb Screw with Hex Head Socket Figure 8 11 Removing the Thumb Screw
49. 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 MHz 800 MHz 851 870 MHz Bandwidth 700 MHz 12 MHz 800 MHz 19 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 25uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 375 uV 5 BER 0 24 uV Intermodulation typical 80 05 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 75 87 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 65 58 dB Spurious Rejection typical 82 16 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 54 dB 12 5 kHz 47 92 dB Distortion typical 1 74 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 794 806 MHz 800 MHz 806 825 851 870 MHz RF Power 700 MHz 1 2 7 Watts 800 MHz 1 3 0 Watts Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 700 MHz 0 000080 800 MHz 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 2 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 66 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice ASTRO APX 6000Li VHF Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000Li VHF Model Chart MODEL NUMBER
50. 8 Transceiver UHF1 Block Diagram Sec 2 3 8 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Transmitter Final FET UHF2 TX Buffer Amp TX Driver Amplifier Harmonic LP Fi SP3T RF Switch N Log Amp Power Detector L Digital RF Attenuator A RMT port O X SP2T RF Switch x TO RX RF Switch Matrix Loop Filter l TX VCO Module RX TX VCO Module Trident IC Synthesizer Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection 0 Ref Oscillator L5 Figure 3 9 Transceiver UHF2 Block Diagram Transmitter Final FET 7 800 TX Buffer Amp TX Driver Amplifier Harmonic LP Fi SP3T RF Switch N Log Amp Power Detector LAC Digital RF Attenuator A EE O Antenna Connector GPS RMT port Y EY SP2T RF Switch A r Wl RF Switch Matrix Trident IC Synthesizer Loop Filter l TX VCO Module RX TX wi VCO Module Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection Ref Oscillator Figure 3 10 Transceiver 700 800 MHz Block Diagram Antenna Connector GPS Basic Theory
51. 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting Chart 1 9 4 Table 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Chart nennen nenne 1 9 4 Table 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Exploded Views and Controller Kit 1 10 1 Related Publications APX 6000 User Guide Model 68012001081 APX 6000 User Guide Model 2 68012001080 APX 6000 User Guide Model 3 68012001079 APX 6000 Quick Reference Card Model PMLN5715 APX 6000 Quick Reference Card Model 2 PMLN5716 APX 6000 Quick Reference Card Model 3 enne PMLN5717 APX 6000 Digital Portable Radios Detailed Service Manual 68012002026 APX 6000 APX 7000 Digital Portable Radios User Guide CID PMLN5335 APX 5000 Digital Portable Radios User Guide CD NNTN7930 List of Figures Sec 1 v List of Figures Figure 3 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Overall Block Diagram eee 1 3 2 Figure 3 2 Receiver Block Diagram HE 1 3 3 Figure 3 3 Receiver Block Diagram UE 1 3 3 Figure 3 4 Receiver Block Diagram UHF2 sse emere nen 1 3 4 Figure 3 5 Receiver Block Diagram 700 800 MHz 1 3 4 Figure 3 6 GPS Diagram asics iia eret dit ee e PR E RH E eR Ree Uia ee hU Eee ae 1 3 5 Figure 3 7 Transceiver VHF Block Diagram sseesseeeneeenenemeen nennen 1 3 7 Figure 3 8 Transceiver UHF 1 Block Diagramm 1 3 7 Figure 3 9 Transceiver UHF2 Block Diagramm 1 3 8 Figure 3 10 Transceiver 700 800 MHz Block Diagram
52. APX 6000Li Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION e X Item Included O Option available Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015 Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020 Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977 Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030_ Assembly
53. Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 2 Tuner Software Main Menu IMPORTANT Tuning should follow the order of the Tuning tree view in descending order from top to bottom 6 3 Softpot The alignment screens introduce the concept of the softpot an analog SOFTware controlled POTentiometer used for adjusting all transceiver alignment controls procedure Always left click the Close button on the screen to return to the Main Menu screen before disconnecting the Caution radio Improper exits from the alignment screens might leave the radio in an improperly configured state and result in seriously degraded radio or system performance DO NOT switch radios in the middle of any alignment Each alignment screen provides the ability to increase or decrease the softpot value by using a slider or by entering the new value from the keyboard directly into the box The slider bar indicates the current softpot value see Figure 6 3 Radio Alignment Procedures Softpot Sec 2 6 3 A gt APX Family Tuner __4 Home Option Feature Help Open Save dy Save As IJ Read Device C amp 3Windows fe Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File Tx Device fe II Windows x Themes fal Print fx Navigation A X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode io 123ABC1234 Radio Information T
54. Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green e NHN7068 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Hebrew Black e NHN7069 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Cyrillic Black e NHN7081 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Arabic Black Note X ltem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories ASTRO APX 6000 UHF2 Model Chart Sec 1 xvii ASTRO APX 6000 UHF2 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad H98SDD9PW5_N H98SDF9PW6_N H98SDH9PW7_N AZ489F T4858 AZ489F T4903 UHF2 APX 6000 Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015 Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020 Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connec
55. Block Diagram Transmitter Final FET UHF1 Ki TX Driver Amplifier SP3T RF Switch E A Harmonic LP Filter Loop Filter e TX VCO Module RX TX el VCO Module RF Switch Matrix Il Tridentic WR o Ref Oscillator GPS TO RX Synthesizer A Directional LL Coupler E gt Log Amp Power Detector RMT port Digital RF Attenuator SP2T RF Switch x Antenna Connector Reverse Power Detection Figure 3 8 Transceiver UHF1 Block Diagram Sec 1 3 8 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Transmitter Final FET UHF2 TX Buffer Amp TX Driver Amplifier Harmonic LP Fi SP3T RF Switch N Log Amp Power Detector L Digital RF Attenuator A RMT port O X SP2T RF Switch x TO RX RF Switch Matrix Loop Filter l TX VCO Module RX TX VCO Module Trident IC Synthesizer Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection 0 Ref Oscillator L5 Figure 3 9 Transceiver UHF2 Block Diagram Transmitter Final FET 7 800 TX Buffer Amp TX Driver Amplifier Harmonic LP
56. Color Display 8 44 Back Chassis Assembly 3 Figure 8 36 Back Chassis Assembly Dual Display Versions NOTE Take care not to damage the Color Display during disassembly Sec 1 8 26 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 7 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 37 and Microphone Mesh 36 from the microphone boot 4 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning Ensure the microphone is seated properly with the microphone boot opening Remove the backer from the Microphone Membrane Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone boss area on the Main Chassis Ensure the membrane is flat with no ripples or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 lbs of force Repeat step 6 for the microphone mesh Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening 8 8 7 2 Servicing Microphone Boot 4 NOTE When servicing microphone boot microphone membrane and microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Carefully remove the mic
57. Error Rate 445 025 3108 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 457 025 3110 A 469 925 3164 i Figure 6 18 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen UHF1 Ww APX Family Tuner e Home Option Feature Help Open Ag Save y Save As P Read Device windows Z Themes eig Print Ctrl P 1 Print Preview File m Device Windows Themes Print EI Navigation X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 123ABC1234 7 Radio Information 450 025 UHF R2 3616 3616 z Transmitter Alignments E 355 a KEE 460 025 UHF R2 3596 E Ki Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 3584 3584 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 3592 3592 Tx Deviation Balance m ET Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 3592 3592 Rx Front End Filter E 356 mm E Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 3596 lucu l Bit Error Rate 506 025 UHF R2 3604 3604 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 3608 3508 Figure 6 19 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen UHF2 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 15 Figure 6 20 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz Sec 2 6 16 Radio Alignment
58. Fatal Error Reprogram the codeplug 01 84 External EEPROM Blank or SLIC failure Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 88 External RAM Fatal Error Note Not a checksum failure Send radio to depot 01 90 General Hardware Failure Fatal Error Turn the radio off then on 01 92 Security Partition Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 93 FLASHport Authentication Code Failure Send radio to depot 01 94 Internal EEPROM Blank Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 98 Internal RAM Fail Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 A0 ABACUS Tune Failure Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 A2 Tuning Codeplug Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 02 81 DSP ROM Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 02 88 DSP RAM Fatal Error Note Not a checksum failure Turn the radio off then on Sec 2 9 2 Basic Troubleshooting Operational Error Codes Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Displays Continued Error Code Description Corrective Action 02 90 General DSP Hardware Failure DSP startup message not Turn the radio off then on received correctly 09 10 Secure Hardware Error Turn the radio off then on 09 90 Secure Hardware Fatal Error Turn the radio off then on Hardware board absent Expansion board is not connected properly to the radio Ensure the Expansion Hardware board absent board is fixed in place then Man Down Hw error Note If the corrective action does not fix the failure send the radio to the depot 9
59. Frequency This field selects the Transmit Frequency directly in MHz Channel Spacing This field allows the user to select the desired transmit deviation in kHz Test Pattern Type This field represents the type of test pattern which will be transmitted by the radio when PTT TOGGLE button is pressed NOTE Channel Spacing and Test Pattern Type fields will be grayed out while radio is transmitting T Ax APX Family Tuner AA 4 Home Option Feature Help Open Ap zoue dySave As Read Device Windows f Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File G Device Windows Themes ll Print Tx Navigation H X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025000 MHz x Tx Frequency MHz 136 025000 123ABC1234 j Radio Information Channel Spacing KHz 25 Transmitter Alignments Test Pattern Type Digital Voice M Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Low M Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 31 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen VHF Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 1 6 25 ws APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help GA Open diySave zoue As Read Device Windows Themes sig Print Ctrl P Print Preview Device Fs Windows
60. H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g RECEIVER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 179 V Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 243 uV 5 BER 0 15 pV Intermodulation typical 81 88 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 81 3 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 73 34 dB Spurious Rejection typical 90 96 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 56 8 dB 12 5 kHz 50 29 dB Distortion typical 1 57 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz TRANSMITTER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz RF Power 136 174 MHz 1 6 W Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnis 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 75 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc Emissions Designators 11K
61. Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green e NHN7068 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Hebrew Black e NHN7069 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Cyrillic Black Note X ltem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 1 xvi ASTRO APX 6000 UHF1 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID ASTRO APX 6000 UHF1 Model Chart H98QDD9PW5 N H98QDF9PW6 N H98QDH9PW7 N AZ489FT4899 BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION AZ489FT4892 UHF1 APX 6000 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x
62. Portable Radios Section 3 Appendices Notes Appendix A Accessories Motorola provides the following approved optional accessories to improve the productivity of the APX 6000 APX 6000XE portable radio For a complete list of Motorola approved antennas batteries and other accessories visit the following web site http www motorola com APX Sec 3 A 2 Accessories Notes Appendix B Replacement Parts Ordering B 1 B 2 B 3 B 4 Basic Ordering Information When ordering replacement parts or equipment information the complete identification number should be included This applies to all components kits and chassis If the component part number is not known the order should include the number of the chassis or kit of which it is a part and sufficient description of the desired component to identify it Transceiver Board VOCON Board and Expansion Board Ordering Information When ordering a replacement Transceiver Board VOCON Board or Expansion Board refer to the applicable Model Chart in the front of this manual Read the Transceiver Board VOCON Board or Expansion Board note and include the proper information with your order Motorola Online Motorola Online users can access our online catalog at http www motorola com businessonline To register for online access please call 1 800 422 4210 for U S and Canada Service Centers only International customers can obtain assistance at http www motorola com busi
63. Procedures Transmitter Alignments 6 5 5 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment This alignment procedure balances the modulation contributions of the low and high frequency portions of a baseband signal Proper alignment is critical to the operation of signalling schemes that have very low frequency components for example DPL and could result in distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to allow for proper alignment across the entire RF band The RF band is divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone NOTE This alignment is required after replacing or servicing the VOCON board or the transceiver board Proper alignment requires a modulation analyzer or meter with a frequency response to less than 10 Hz modulating frequency The modulation analyzer settings during this test should be set for average deviation a 15 kHz low pass filter no de emphasis and no high pass filter if these settings are supported This alignment can be done with either the R 2670 Communication Analyzer or the 8901_ Series Modulation Analyzer The method of choice is the R 2670 analyzer 1 Initial setup using the R 2670 Communication Analyzer Connect a BNC cable between the DEMOD OUT port and the VERT SINAD DIST DMM COUNTER IN port on the R 2670 Press the SPF key on the R 2670 to display the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS MENU Move the cursor to High Pass
64. TX RX TX RX TX F1 136 075 136 025 380 075 380 025 450 075 450 025 764 0625 764 0125 F2 142 075 142 125 390 075 390 025 460 075 460 025 769 0625 769 0125 F3 154 275 154 225 400 075 400 025 471 075 471 025 775 9375 775 9875 F4 160 175 160 125 411 075 411 025 484 925 484 975 851 0625 794 0125 F5 168 125 168 075 424 975 424 925 485 075 485 025 860 0625 809 0125 F6 173 925 173 975 435 075 435 025 495 075 495 025 869 9375 823 9875 F7 445 075 445 025 506 075 506 025 851 0625 851 0125 F8 457 075 457 025 519 925 519 975 860 0625 860 0125 F9 469 975 469 925 869 9375 869 8875 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version Sec 2 5 11 5 3 3 Control Top Test Mode This test mode is used to verify proper operation of all radio buttons and switches if a failure is suspected 5 3 3 1 Control Top Checks To perform the control top checks 1 8 9 10 11 Press and hold the Top Button Orange button the radio icons are displayed and the LED lights amber Release the Top Button 148 0 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the open position Your radio is now in the Control Top and Keypad test mode Press the Top Button again 148 1 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the closed position Rotate the 16 Position Sel
65. Test Mode To enter the display radio test mode 1 Turn the radio on 2 Within 10 seconds after SELF TEST is complete press Side Button 2 five times in succession The radio shows a series of displays that give information regarding various version numbers and subscriber specific information The displays are described in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Test Mode Displays Name of Display Description Appears Service The literal string indicates the radio has Always entered test mode Host version The version of host firmware is displayed Always DSP version The version of DSP firmware is displayed Always Secure version Version of the encryption software When the radio is secure equipped KGI algorithms name Encryption Type 1 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped KG2 algorithms name Encryption Type 2 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 2 or more algorithms are loaded KG3 algorithms name Encryption Type 3 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 3 or more algorithms are loaded KG4 algorithms name Encryption Type 4 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 4 or more algorithms are loaded KG5 algorithms name Encryption Type 5 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 5 or more algorithms are loaded KG6
66. Top test mode Go to Section 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode on page 2 5 6 NOTE Each press of the Top Side Button Purple button scrolls through RF TEST CH TEST and CID TEST Press the Top Button Orange button to stop the displays and put the radio into the RF test mode The test mode menu 1 CSQ is displayed indicating test frequency 1 Carrier SQuelch mode Go to Section 5 3 2 RF Test Mode below NOTE Once your radio is in a particular test mode you must turn off the radio and turn it back on again to access the other test mode RF Test Mode When the ASTRO APX 6000 radio is operating in its normal environment the radio s microcomputer controls the RF channel selection transmitter key up and receiver muting according to the customer codeplug configuration However when the unit is on the bench for testing alignment or repair it must be removed from its normal environment using a special routine called RF TEST MODE While in RF test mode Each additional press of Side Button 2 advances to the next test channel Refer to Table 5 5 Pressing Side Button 1 scrolls through and accesses the test environments shown in Table 5 4 Pressing Top Side Button scrolls through the Tx Deviation Frequency NOTE Transmit into a load when keying a radio under test Table 5 6 Test Frequencies MHz VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 MHz EDINA ee TX RX
67. Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 3411 3411 Figure 6 11 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHF2 Sec 2 6 10 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments A Home Option Open dy Save Ey Save As File fu Feature Help Read Device Ze3Windows Device Windows APX Family Tuner f Themes bail Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview EI Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Points E 123ABC1234 6 5 3 Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 Radio Information 764 0125 3710 3710 gt Transmitter Alignments 3710 m Reference Oscillator Ee ES Eun en CA Tx Power Characterization Points 775 9875 3710 3710 Tx Power Characterization O PA Saturation Reference 794 0125 3704 3704 Tx Deviation Balance e El Performance Testing 809 0125 3778 S75 EA Bit Error Rate 3777 Transmitter Test Pattern Hess xu C Sa Factory Override 851 0125 3772 3772 860 0125 3775 3775 de 869 8875 3771 3771 Figure 6 12 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen 700 800MHz Power Characterization Tuning Tuning of the radio is done through Power Characterization tuning screen IMPORTANT Power Characterization Tuning P
68. Ver Version of Processor Always Option Board Type of Option board being used When the radio has an Option Type Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Serial number of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Serial Number displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Bluetooth Address of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Bluetooth Addr displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Software version of the Option Board is When the radio has an Option SW Version displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Exp Board Type Type of Expansion Board is displayed When the radio has an Expansion Board NOTE All displays are temporary and will expire without any user intervention If NOTE information is longer than the physical length of the radio s display the information will wrap around to the next display After the last display RF TEST is displayed To freeze any of the displays press the left arrow on the 4 Way Navigation Button To resume automatic scrolling press the right arrow on the 4 Way Navigation Button To rapidly scroll forward through the displays continue pressing the right arrow You cannot scroll backwards Press the Top Side Button Purple button to advance the test environments from RF TEST CH TEST RGB TEST CID TEST then press the Top Button Orange button to confirm selection Press any other buttons to
69. Voice X Tx Power Low El Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Factory Override Figure 6 32 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF1 y vay gt APX Family Tuner 2 Home Option Feature Help Open zoue ly Save As go Read Device 3Windows Z Themes ee Print Ctri P YPrint Preview File pl Device m Windows m Themes Print f Navigation A X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 000000 MHz Tx Frequency MHz 450 000000 Channel Spacing KHz 25 wi Test Pattern Type Digital Voice Tx Power Low El 123ABC1234 Radio Information El Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 33 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF2 Sec 2 6 26 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Transmitter Test Patterr Figure 6 34 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen 700 800 MHz Chapter 7 Encryption 7 1 This chapter provides procedures for using the encryption capability of your radio The following procedures are outlined Loading an encryption key Selecting an encryption key Selecting an Index onl
70. advance the test Once a test is carried out restart the radio to proceed to another test 3 Doone ofthe following Press the Top Side Button to stop the displays and toggle between RF test mode and the Control Top and Keypad test mode The test mode menu CH TEST is displayed indicating that you have selected the Control Top and Keypad test mode Go to Section 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode on page 1 5 6 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Sec 1 5 5 NOTE Each press of the Top Side Button Purple button scrolls through RF TEST CH TEST RGB TEST and CID TEST Press the Top Button Orange button to stop the displays and put the radio into the RF test mode The test mode menu 1 CSQ is displayed indicating test frequency 1 Carrier SQuelch mode Go to Section 5 2 2 RF Test Mode below NOTE Once your radio is in a particular test mode you must turn off the radio and turn it back on again to access the other test mode 5 2 2 RF Test Mode When the ASTRO APX 6000 radio is operating in its normal environment the radio s microcomputer controls the RF channel selection transmitter key up and receiver muting according to the customer codeplug configuration However when the unit is on the bench for testing alignment or repair it must be removed from its normal environment using a special routine called RF TEST MODE While in RF test mode Each a
71. array A type of IC package characterized by solder balls arranged in a grid that are located on the underside of the package Privately paging an individual by sending an audible tone Sec 3 Glossary 2 Term carrier squelch central controller channel CODEC coded squelch codeplug coder decoder control channel conventional conventional scan list CPS cursor Customer Programming Software D A DAC deadlock default Glossary Definition Feature that responds to the presence of an RF carrier by opening or unmuting turning on a receiver s audio circuit A squelch circuit silences the radio when no signal is being received so that the user does not have to listen to noise A software controlled computer driven device that receives and generates data for the trunked radios assigned to it It monitors and directs the operations of the trunked repeaters A group of characteristics such as transmit receive frequency pairs radio parameters and encryption encoding See coder decoder Used on conventional channels to ensure that the receiver hears only those communications intended for the receiver Firmware that contains the unique personality for a system or device A codeplug is programmable and allows changes to system and unit parameters See also firmware A device that encodes or decodes a signal In a trunking system one of the channels that is used to provide a continuo
72. be latent resulting in failures occurring weeks or months later Therefore special precautions must be taken to prevent device damage during disassembly troubleshooting and repair Handling precautions are mandatory for this radio and are especially important in low humidity conditions MN Caution The APX5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio has a vent port that allows for pressure equalization in the radio Never poke this vent with any objects such as needles tweezers or screwdrivers This could create a leak path into the radio and in the case of APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radios the radio s submergibility will be lost The pressure equalization vent is located adjacent to the battery contact opening of the main chassis Never touch the equalization vent Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with this vent APX 5000 R APX 6000 R Radios Only The APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of six 6 feet with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours per U S MIL STD Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio For specific U S MIL STD details see Section 8 10 Ensuring Radio Submergibility on page 1 8 39 APX 5000 R APX 6000 R Radios Only If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio Otherwise the water could short circuit the radio If the radio ha
73. control top main seal 2 8 23 expansion board assembly 2 8 25 FM Label 2 8 29 2 8 30 main housing dual display 2 8 29 top display 2 8 30 main lens 2 8 27 medallion 2 8 29 2 8 30 microphone boot 2 8 26 2 8 28 microphone membrane 2 8 26 2 8 28 2 8 31 microphone mesh 2 8 26 2 8 28 2 8 31 RF board assembly 2 8 24 rf coax cable 2 8 22 speaker grille assembly 2 8 31 speaker module 2 8 31 thermal pads 2 8 24 universal connector insert 2 8 21 vocon board assembly 2 8 23 servicing radio submersibility 2 8 40 softpot 2 6 2 speaker grill assembly assemble 2 8 39 removing 2 8 13 speaker grille assembly servicing 2 8 31 speaker module assemble 2 8 38 removing 2 8 14 servicing 2 8 31 specifications 7 800 radios 2 xviii UHF1 radios 2 xvi UHF2 radios 2 xvii VHF radios 2 xv standards radio submersibility 2 8 40 submergibility radio disassembly 2 8 41 radio reassembly 2 8 41 submersibility specialized test equipment 2 8 41 standards 2 8 40 vacuum test 2 8 41 Sec 2 Index 4 T test equipment recommended 2 4 1 specialized submersibility 2 8 41 test mode entering dual display version 2 5 3 2 5 8 test setup alignment 2 6 1 performance checks 2 5 1 tests receiver ASTRO conventional channels 2 5 12 performance checks 2 5 12 transmitter ASTRO conventional channels 2 5 14 performance checks 2 5 13 theory of operation analog mode 2 3 2 ASTRO mode 2 3 9 controller 2 3 10 ARM 2 3 11 audio 2 3 11 expansion board 2 3 11 user
74. ed 2 8 6 9 4 Antenna ehe ed pie a ede Log cL deed euo Hig Eed 2 8 7 HE Baten ys ee DR ER 2 8 8 8 6 Universal Connector Cover 2 8 11 9 Radio DisassemblV icon dali 2 8 13 8 8 Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies ssnnnnnsnsnnnnesneseeenetntrrnrtnnssnssreerenn nenn 2 8 21 8 9 Radio Reassembly ehe taria ARR EES SE 2 8 32 8 10 Ensuring Radio Submergibility nennen 2 8 40 Chapter 9 Basic Troubleshooting eeeeseeesse 2 9 1 971 Power Up Error Codes octets e er pa ee ak a Peek See RE Re e oe a PRA HUBER adel 2 9 1 9 2 Operational Error Codes ere adt e ede ha ceeds ene ennai desta HR Ea eund 2 9 2 9 3 Receiver Troubleshooting ssssssssssesese enne nnnm ern nennen en nenne nenne 2 9 3 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting nennen enne rr narrar nennen 2 9 4 9 5 Encryption Troublesbootmg eee nennen nennen nennen nennen nns 2 9 4 Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists 2 10 1 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 2 102 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List sssesssssss 2 10 3 10 3 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 2 10 4 10 4 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Parts List ss 2 10 4 10 5 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View sssssssseeeem emen 2 10 5 10 6 AP
75. encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 2 equipped and 2 or more algorithms are loaded KG3 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 3 equipped and 3 or more algorithms are loaded KG4 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 4 equipped and 4 or more algorithms are loaded KG5 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 5 equipped and 5 or more algorithms are loaded Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version Sec 2 5 9 Table 5 5 Test Mode Displays Continued Name of Display Description Appears KG6 algorithms name Encryption Type 6 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 6 or more algorithms are loaded Serial Number Model number The radio s model number as Always programmed in the codeplug Serial number The radio s serial number as programmed Always in the codeplug ESN The radio s unique electronic serial Always number ROM Size The memory capacity of the host FLASH Always part FLASHcode The FLASH codes as programmed in the Always codeplug RF band 1 The radio s operating frequency Always Tuning Ver Version of Tuning codeplug Always Proc Ver Version of Processor Always Option Board Type of Option board being used When the radio has an Opti
76. or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 Ibs of force 5 Repeat step 4 for the Microphone Mesh 8 8 11 Servicing Speaker Grille Assembly K Speaker Grille Label 59 i V i J Speaker Grille 60 Figure 8 42 Speaker Grille Assembly NOTE There are No serviceable components on the Speaker Grille Assembly K Sec 2 8 32 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 8 9 Radio Reassembly This section contains instructions for reassembling the radio 8 9 1 Reassemble the Main Sub Assemblies 8 9 1 1 Assemble Control Top Assembly F to Main Chassis Assembly E Antenna Nut and Washer 26 27 Control Top Assembly 58 Figure 8 43 Control Top Bezel Assembly 1 Verify there are no surface irregularities such as scratches or indentations on both the Control Top Main Seal Grove and the Seal s mating surface on the Main Chassis Assembly 15 Also ensure that the Control Top Main Seal 22 and surrounding surfaces are free of debris and other foreign material 2 Verify Control Top Main Seal is properly seated into its groove and place Control Top Assembly onto Main Chassis Assembly as shown in Figure 8 43 3 Torque both screws with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 7 in Ibs Place Antenna Washer 26 over the antenna nut then torque Antenna Spanner Nut 27 with the Antenna Spanner Bit to 16 in Ibs 8 9 1 2 Assemble Knobs G VA Frequency Knob 56
77. ounie a an aE aA aae RaRa etat ER A cn tetas 1 8 25 Back Chassis Assembly Dual Display Versions see 1 8 25 Back Chassis Assembly Top Display Version 1 8 27 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Full kevpad 1 8 28 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Limited Keypad 1 8 29 Main Housing Assembly Top Display Version 1 8 30 speaker Module iii RR eid e ENEE che e e anda aed ae 1 8 31 Speaker Grille Assembly sess nennen 1 8 31 Control Top Bezel Assembly enemies 1 8 32 Top Bezel ASS Dl ia ieas decedere Ferr ien dug dn age SER Exe danke dde SIR MERDA TREES 1 8 33 Insert VOCON Board EE 1 8 34 Connect RF Board to VOCON Board 1 8 35 Place Back Chassis eiecit edite da dee de v de a dy a eee d cd 1 8 35 Place Housing into Main Chassis 1 8 36 Assemble Expansion Board Aesembhy emnes 1 8 36 Insert Flex COMNectorS ici apte Gee E die ane 1 8 37 Insert Speaker Module eene eren nennen nennen rene n nnns 1 8 37 Insert TOPSCTOWS T 1 8 38 Insert Center SCrews coccion dd 1 8 38 Insert Bottom Screws oic ciat eee cs Pr Ep PRU eae ae LE de ME uaa oi eet ER 1 8 39 Attaching Vacuum Adapte ener nennen enne 1 8 41 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 1 102 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 1 10 4 List of Figures Sec 1 vii Figure 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded V
78. oz 631 g Frequency Range 450 520 MHz Bandwidth 70 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 203 uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 296 uV 5 BER 0 204 uV Intermodulation typical 80 4 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 78 1 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 68 5 dB Spurious Rejection typical 80 8 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 9 dB 12 5 kHz 47 6 dB Distortion typical 0 9 Channel Spacing 12 5 kHz 25 kHz Frequency Range 450 520 MHz RF Power 450 520 MHz BW Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 dB 12 5 kHz 44 dB Distortion typical 196 25 kHz chnis 5 0 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnis 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 65 dBc Emissions Designators 11K0F3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20K0F1E Note UHF2 operation within the United States is limited to 12 5 kHz Channel Spacing due to the 2011 FCC narrowband regulations Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 1 xxii Specifications for APX 6000 7 800 MHz Radios Specifications for APX 6000 7 800 MHz Radios All specifications are per Telecomm
79. the analog mode receive and transmit theory of operation 3 2 1 Receiving The RF signal is received at the antenna and is routed through the Auxiliary and Multi Switch SP3T ICs on the UHF1 UHF2 and 7 800MHz designs The latter contains a switchable attenuator that is enabled at predetermined RF power thresholds present at the antenna port The VHF design does not include the Auxiliary switch and thus RF is routed directly to the SP3T switch See Figure 3 2and Figure 3 5 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Sec 1 3 3 RF ANT 50 ohm A SP2T Digital RF N N gt Rx Tx Atten D Y VHF VHF Reversed Wok Power o TA 569 sell El rm To RF Vocon GPS Connector Ki m 9 Sek 18Mh2 yo Synth Synth ax Abacus III Figure 3 2 Receiver Block Diagram VHF RF ANT AUX ANT 50 ohm am A SP2T Sp r Digital RF gt gt gt RF AUX Rx Tx Atten Y UHF1 UHF1 Reversed d Power 69 N EAADC Dee nos To RF Vocon GPS Connector fe 2nd Abacus III Figure 3 3 Receiver Block Diagram UHF1 Xe Sec 1 3 4 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation RF ANT AUX ANT
80. the radio has an Expansion Board NOTE All displays are temporary and will expire without any user intervention If NOTE information is longer than the physical length of the radio s display the information will wrap around to the next display After the last display RF TEST is displayed To freeze any of the displays press the left arrow on the 4 Way Navigation Button To resume automatic scrolling press the right arrow on the 4 Way Navigation Button To rapidly scroll forward through the displays continue pressing the right arrow You cannot scroll backwards Press the Top Side Button Purple button to advance the test environments from RF TEST CH TEST RGB TEST CID TEST then press the Top Button Orange button to confirm selection Press any other buttons to advance the test Once a test is carried out restart the radio to proceed to another test 3 Doone ofthe following Press the Top Side Button to stop the displays and toggle between RF test mode and the Control Top and Keypad test mode The test mode menu CH TEST is displayed indicating that you have selected the Control Top and Keypad test mode Go to Section 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode on page 2 5 6 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Sec 2 5 5 NOTE Each press of the Top Side Button Purple button scrolls through RF TEST CH TEST RGB TEST and CID TEST Press the Top Button
81. to 20 V div Leader L 88050 www leaderusa com Tektronix TDS1001b www tektronix com or equivalent Waveform measurements Power Meter and Sensor 596 Accuracy 100 MHz to 500 MHz Bird 43 Thruline Watt Meter www bird electronic com or Transmitter power output measurements 50 Watts equivalent RF Millivolt 100 mV to 3 V RF Boonton 92EA Waveform measurements Meter 10 kHz to 1 GHz www boonton com or equivalent Power Supply 0V to 32 V B amp K Precision 1790 Voltage supply 0Ato20A www bkprecision com or equivalent Sec 2 4 2 4 2 Service Aids Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids Service Aids Refer to Table 4 2 for a listing and description of the service aids designed specifically for servicing this family of radios These kits and or parts are available from the Radio Products and Solutions Organization offices listed in Appendix B Replacement Parts Ordering on page B 1 While all of these items are available from Motorola most are standard shop equipment items and any equivalent item capable of the same performance may be substituted for the item listed Table 4 2 Service Aids Motorola Part EST gU as Number Description Application 5880384G68 SMA to BNC Adapter Adapts radio s antenna port to BNC cabling of test equipment 66009254001 APX Battery Adapter Used in place of battery to connect radio to an external pow
82. to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 700 MHz 1410 mA 800 MHz 1696 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 250 mA Standby Current Drain 142 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 6 15 156 3 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 4 35 5 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 6 41 162 8 mm W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 5 5 mm With NiMH Battery H 8 41 213 6 mm W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 35 5 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 13 7 oz 389 g 18 7 oz 530 g 24 1 oz 683 g 25 3 oz 717 g Frequency Range 700 MHz 800 MHz Bandwidth 700 MHz 800 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 5 BER Intermodulation typical Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 12 5 kHz Channel Spurious Rej
83. to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 1990 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 238 mA Standby Current Drain 134 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMNA4403 or Li lon NNTN7038 or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034 or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573_ or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 6 15 156 3 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 4 35 5 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 6 41 162 8 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 5 5 mm With NiMH Battery H 8 41 213 6 mm W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 35 5 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 13 7 oz 389 g 18 7 oz 530 g 24 1 oz 683 g 25 3 oz 717 g Frequency Range 450 520 MHz Bandwidth 70 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 203 uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 296 uV 5 BER 0 204 uV Intermodulation typical 80 4 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 78 1 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 68 5 dB Spurious Rej
84. to add software that drives the radio s capabilities both at the time of purchase and later on Previously changing a radio s features and capabilities meant significant modifications or buying a new radio But now similar to how a computer can be loaded with different software the radio s features and capabilities can be upgraded with FLASHport software Chapter 2 Basic Maintenance 2 1 This chapter describes preventive maintenance and handling precautions Each of these topics provides information vital to the successful operation and maintenance of your radio General Maintenance In order to avoid operating outside the limits set by the FCC we recommend that you align the ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio s reference oscillator every time the radio is taken apart or once per year whichever comes first Checking this parameter when the product is placed in service is especially important if the product has been in storage for a significant period of time 6 months or more between being shipped from the factory and commissioned for service See Section 6 5 1 Reference Oscillator Alignment on page 1 6 4 Periodic visual inspection and cleaning is also recommended For APX 5000 R APX 6000 R Ruggedized Radios Radio submergibility should be checked annually by qualified service technicians Inspection Check that the external surfaces of the radio are clean and that all external controls and switches are functiona
85. transmitting 8 Measure and Record the Low Tone Tx Deviation value from the 8901_ Series Analyzer or the AC voltage value from the R2670 ws APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help HF Open ag Save dy Save As IJ Read Device Ce3Windows Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview File e Device Windows x Themes T Print fx Navigation X Tx Deviation Balance Softpot Configuration Mode Program AL PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025 PTT Tone Low O High Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 32767 E 123ABC1234 nein NN _ Radio Information 136 025 20510 20510 L 2 Transmitter Alignments Fe EE 142 125 19704 19704 n Tx Power Characterization Points 154 225 19720 19720 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 160 125 20088 20088 93 TI EN El Performance Testing 168 075 21931 21931 m n iin 173 975 23000 23000 _ Figure 6 21 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen VHF Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 17 E JE Figure 6 22 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHF1 Kaes ix Tn 2 Home Option Feature Help pen gy Save Igp Save As Read Device Windows Themes at Print Ctrt P Print Preview figation Tx Deviation Balance Een aa
86. until the radio transmits as close as possible to the rated power For rated power refer to the help text in the Tuner Left click the slider of the frequency selected should be the same frequency as step 2 5 Left click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is transmitting 6 Repeat the steps 2 to 5 for all frequencies 7 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values P gt APX Family Tuner 4 Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Ca3Windows F Themes ee Print Ctri P 1 Print Preview File Tx Device Windows Themes m Print fx Navigation A X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode Program All j PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 El 123ABC1234 m Radio Information 136 025 2922 2922 y EA El Transmitter Alignments S Referee Ond WERT ER po Lal Tx Power Characterization Points 154 225 3070 3070 Tx Power Characterization 160 125 3049 3049 _ Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing 168 075 3085 3085 LJ EA idu 173 975 3116 326 Lei l Figure 6 17 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen VHF Sec 1 6 14 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Ho
87. used When the radio is secure equipped and 6 or more algorithms are loaded Serial Number Model number The radio s model number as Always programmed in the codeplug Serial number The radio s serial number as programmed Always in the codeplug ESN The radio s unique electronic serial Always number ROM Size The memory capacity of the host FLASH Always part FLASHcode The FLASH codes as programmed in the Always codeplug RF band 1 The radio s operating frequency Always Tuning Ver Version of Tuning codeplug Always Proc Ver Version of Processor Always Option Board Type of Option board being used When the radio has an Option Type Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Serial number of the Option board is When the radio has an Option displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Bluetooth Address of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Bluetooth Addr displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Software version of the Option Board is When the radio has an Option SW Version displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Exp Board Type Type of Expansion Board is displayed When the radio has an Expansion Board NOTE All displays are temporary and will expire without any user intervention If information is longer than the physical length of the radio s display the information will wrap around to the next display Aft
88. x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUD7120_ Assembly RF Board VHF X X X PMLN5335_ User Guide CD APX 6000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display
89. 001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner X X X 07009369001 Support Expander PCB O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green X NHN7030_ Assembly Main Housing Top Display e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUD7120_ Assembly RF Board VHF X X X PMLN5817 User Guide CD APX 6000XE e NHN7069 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Cyrillic Black e NHN7081 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Arabic Black Note X ltem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec
90. 012002028 E Updated CPS part number Added extra Reference Oscillator Alignment service info Jun 2013 Commercial Warranty V Commercial Warranty Limited Warranty MOTOROLA COMMUNICATION PRODUCTS Il What This Warranty Covers And For How Long MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS INC MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured Communication Products listed below Product against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below ASTRO APX 6000 APX 6000XE Digital Portable Units One 1 Year Product Accessories One 1 Year Motorola at its option will at no charge either repair the Product with new or reconditioned parts replace it with a new or reconditioned Product or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an office
91. 036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 MHz 800 MHz 851 870 MHz Bandwidth 700 MHz 12 MHz 800 MHz 19 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 25uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 375 uV 5 BER 0 24 uV Intermodulation typical 80 05 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 75 87 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 65 58 dB Spurious Rejection typical 82 16 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 54 dB 12 5 kHz 47 92 dB Distortion typical 1 74 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz Frequ
92. 0_ SMA BNC 5880384G68 RADIO COMPUTER Figure 6 1 Radio Alignment Test Setup SYSTEM ANALYZER SUB FAD OR COUNTER TRANSMIT gt 30 dB PAD WATTMETER BNC lt RF GENERATOR RECEIVE SET TO APPROX 8mV FOR Tx AUDIO IN TX AUDIO GENERATOR 4 TEST SET IF RLN4460 RX SINAD METER AC VOLTMETER PROGRAM TEST CABLE MEASURE 3 74Vrms FOR Rx PMKN4013 DM Caution These radio alignment procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform alignment procedures properly may result in seriously degraded radio or system performance Sec 2 6 2 Radio Alignment Procedures Tuner Main Menu 6 2 Tuner Main Menu Select Tuner from the START menu by clicking Start gt Program Files gt Motorola gt ASTRO 25 Products gt ASTRO 25 Tuner To read the radio use the File gt Read Device menu or click on d Read Device Figure 6 2 illustrates how the alignment screens are organized To access a screen double click on the desired screen name in the Tuner menu Softpot Configuration Mode 123ABC1234 Radio Information Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver
93. 1 5 1 Test Equipment Setup eene iL de eee deci eee dra e o Eee dede aede abad eua 2 5 1 5 2 Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 2 5 3 5 3 Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version 2 5 8 5 4 Receiver Performance Check 2 5 12 5 5 Transmitter Performance Check 2 5 13 Sec 2 8 Table of Contents Chapter 6 Radio Alignment Procedures 2 6 1 MEME E GIU 2 6 1 6 2 Tuner Main Menu i joie eines deena Lei duke det e dur e e d qva a e na e ird va nee dne ee dd n aedis 2 6 2 0 3 O EE 2 6 2 6 4 Radio gl eu Le 2 6 4 6 5 Transmitter Alignment ccceccececeeecceeeeeeseeceneecsneecceeeensneeeeeesedsneseesseeceeeeesnenseeeeeneeceneneesees 2 6 4 6 6 Front End Filter Alignment eeiieeeeeeiieeseees eiie eene ee nnne ned nnn E hn NA 2 6 19 6 7 Performance Testing x intet peret ic Orte uU Meta cn MO ER dnd 2 6 21 Chapter 7 Encrypti n Eegen 2 7 1 TA Load an Encryption EE 2 7 1 2 2 Multikey Feature ccoo dos 2 7 2 7 9 Selectian Encryption Key icti dit 2 7 2 7 4 Select an Encryption Index cece aTe anA ARA ra AES KAARE DS raa aT er Taa aaa Tiea 2 7 3 7 5 Erase an Encryption Key 2 devel eet a 2 7 4 Chapter 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures 2 8 1 8 1 APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Gubassembles nana rnnnnns 2 8 1 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies eee enne nnne 2 8 6 8 3 Fastener Torque Chalino al coe peto
94. 1 025 775 9375 775 9875 F4 160 175 160 125 411 075 411 025 484 925 484 975 851 0625 794 0125 F5 168 125 168 075 424 975 424 925 485 075 485 025 860 0625 809 0125 F6 173 925 173 975 435 075 435 025 495 075 495 025 869 9375 823 9875 F7 445 075 445 025 506 075 506 025 851 0625 851 0125 F8 457 075 457 025 519 925 519 975 860 0625 860 0125 F9 469 975 469 925 869 9375 869 8875 Sec 2 5 6 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Table 5 4 Test Environments Display Description Function CSQ Carrier RX unsquelch if carrier detected Squelch TX mic audio TPL Tone RX unsquelch if carrier and tone 192 8 Hz Private Line detected TX mic audio tone 192 8 Hz AST ASTRO RX none TX Digital Voice USQ Carrier RX unsquelch always Unsquelch TX mic audio All deviation values are based on deviation tuning of this mode 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode This test mode is used to verify proper operation of all radio buttons and switches if a failure is suspected 5 2 3 1 Control Top Checks To perform the control top checks 1 10 11 Press and hold the Top Button Orange button the radio icons are displayed and the LED lights amber Release the Top Button 148 0 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the
95. 123ABC1234 Radio Information Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance E Receiver Alignments E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override x ee Print Ctrl P Program All Radio RSSI Autotune Test Signal Frequency 160 775 L Print Preview G Test Signal Amplitude 4 0 Frequency 160 775 170 775 180 775 191 775 205 675 215 775 225 775 237 775 250 675 Softpot Value 960 1190 1295 1535 1920 2130 2335 2600 2920 New Softpot Value 0 4095 aen 1190 1295 1535 1920 2130 2335 2600 2920 Figure 6 25 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UHF1 E JE JE JE JE JE JE E E Sec 2 6 20 Radio Alignment Procedures Front End Filter Alignment Home APX Family Tuner Option Feature Help Open BySave dy Save As Read Device 3Windows Z Themes eig Print Ctrl P Print Preview File pl Device pl Windows Themes Print pl Navigation Y B X Rx Front End Filter Softpot Configuration Mode Program All Radio RSSI Autotune Test Signal Frequency 230 775 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 123ABC1234 a Radio Information 230 775 UHF R2 1312 1312 s Transmitter Alignments i558 DEE 240 775 UHF R2 1558 el
96. 14 15 16 W 9 A Positions 13 16 N S P 0 1 SP Model Suffix Position 12 Unique Model Variations C Cenelec N Standard Package Position 11 Version Version Letter Alpha Major Change Position 10 Feature Level 1 Basic 6 Standard Plus 2 Limited Package 7 Expanded Package 3 Limited Plus 4 Intermediate 5 Standard Package 8 Expanded Plus 9 Full Feature Programmable Position 9 Primary System Type A Conventional B Privacy Plus C Clear SMARTNET D Advanced Conventional Stat Alert E Enhanced Privacy Plus F Nauganet 888 Series G Japan Specialized Mobile Radio JSMR H Multi Channel Access MCA J CoveragePLUS K MPT1327 Public L MPT1327 Private M Radiocom N Tone Signalling P Binary Signalling Q Phonenet W Programmable X Secure Conventional Y Secure SMARTNET MPT Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications Position 8 Primary Operation A Conventional Simplex B Conventional Duplex C Trunked Twin Type D Dual Mode Trunked E Dual Mode Trunked Duplex F Trunked Type I G Trunked Type II H FDMA Digital Dual Mode J TDMA Digital Dual Mode K Single Sideband L Global Positioning Satellite Capable M Amplitude Companded Sideband ACSB P Programmable FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access TDMA Time Division Multiple Access ASTRO APX 6000XE VHF Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000XE V
97. 16 dBm is obtained Use test setup shown in Figure 6 1 on page 2 6 1 Performance Checks Transmitter Performance Checks Sec 2 5 13 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels Continued Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Audio Output Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to OFF Distortion lt 3 0 Distortion RF Control Gen Software not used center Output Level 47 dBm Radio Out of Meter selector to Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz TEST MODE Audio PA Code 1011 Hz PAT Select a Spkr Load to Meter Ext Distortion conventional Speaker ASTRO channel Residual Mode Proj 25 Std As above As above Residual Audio Noise Ratio Audio Noise RF Control Gen 45 dB Ratio Output Level 47 dBm Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz Code A 1011 Hz PAT B Silence PAT Meter AC Volts These tests require a communications system analyzer with the ASTRO 25 test options 5 5 Transmitter Performance Checks The following tables outline the performance checks for the transmitter Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 6000XE Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Reference RF Control Monitor TESTMODE CSQ PTT to continuous VHF 0 8 ppm Frequency Meter RF Display channel or during the 140 Hz Display Bar Graphs programmed performance UHF1 0 8 ppm Freq Selected radio TX conventional check 376 Hz freq channel UHF2 0 8 ppm 416 Hz 700
98. 2 16 ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF1 Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF1 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98QDD9PW5 N H98QDF9PW6 N H98QDH9PW7 N AZ489FT4899 AZ489FT4892 UHF1 APX 6000XE Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7033 Sub Assembly Main Chassis NHN7042_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Yellow NHN7043_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Green X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7034_ Grille Speaker Black NHN7036_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7037_ Grille Speaker Green X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Gri
99. 2 8 16 Remove Houslng 2 tote e ette t te de a eet M de ba ce trei iata 2 8 17 Remove Back Chassis Assembly from Main Chassis Assembly sssssss 2 8 17 Remove RF Board Screw esccccscecesencccedesesnseceedensncececeunsneeedeeeenteceeesbanseeecesbaneaeetedeaeeee 2 8 18 Remove RF Board Assembly esses enenatis 2 8 18 Remove VOCON Board Gcrew eene 2 8 19 Remove VOCON Board Assembly sssssssssessssee eene nennen nenne nenne 2 8 19 Remove Knobs 5 iioi uten e td t tei us 2 8 20 Remove Control Top Aesembhy eene enne enne nnns 2 8 20 Serviceable Components Main Chassis Aesembhy ano ncnannns 2 8 21 Remove Chassis Ground Contact 2 8 22 Control Top Assembly and Control Top Gezai 2 8 23 VOGON Board Assertbly iii epp Ores ia ire ER Res 2 8 23 RE Board Assembly 5 24 italia 2 8 24 Expansion Board Assembly irer oriri E E A A A A 2 8 25 Back Chassis Assembly Dual Display Versions oooooccccnnnicicccnnncocncccnnnnannnnnonnra nana ronnnn no 2 8 25 Back Chassis Assembly Top Display Version 2 8 27 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Full kevpad 2 8 29 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Limited Keypad oooccocooccccnnccccccccccccnns 2 8 29 Main Housing Assembly Top Display Version 2 8 30 Speaker Module erort ve et dite tiem d aet EES deg 2 8 31 Speaker Grille Assembly seesi esses eseeeesdee enne ndn nnn nh nasse dn nnne r nnn 2 8 31
100. 2 Operational Error Codes During radio operation the radio performs dynamic tests to determine if the radio is working properly Problems detected during these tests are presented as error codes on the radio s display The presence of an error code should prompt a user that a problem exists and that a service technician should be contacted Use Table 9 2 to aid in understanding particular operational error codes Table 9 2 Operational Error Code Displays Error Code Description Corrective Action FAIL 001 Synthesizer Out of Lock 1 Reprogram external codeplug 2 Send radio to depot FAIL 002 Selected Mode Zone Codeplug Reprogram external codeplug Checksum Error Basic Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Table 9 3 lists the possible causes of and corrections for receiver problems Sec 2 9 3 Table 9 3 Receiver Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Correction or Test Measurements at Room Temperature Radio Dead Display Does Not Turn On Dead Battery Replace with charged battery Blown Fuse 2 3 On Off Switch 4 Regulators Send radio to depot Radio Dead Display Turns On 1 VOCON Board 2 RF Board 3 Expansion Board Send radio to depot Radio On Front Display Off High operating temperature above 80 C Allow radio to return to normal operating temperature No Receive Audio or Re
101. 2 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016 Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUF6750_ Assembly RF Board 7 800 MHz X X X PMLN5335_ User Guide CD APX 6000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow NHN7026_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green e NHN7068 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Hebrew Black e NHN7069 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Cyrillic Black Note X ltem Included O Option available
102. 27_ NHN7028_ Assy Front Housing M2 Yellow Dual Display Limited Keypad NHN7029_ Assy Front Housing M2 Green Dual Display Limited Keypad 2 33009265001 Medallion Figure 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View 10 5 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View 10 6 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View Parts List Item Motorola Part nasenotion No Number P 51 NHN7030_ Assy Front Housing M1 Black Top Display NHN7031_ Assy Front Housing M1 Yellow Top Display NHN7032_ Assy Front Housing M1 Green Top Display 2 33009265001 Medallion 52 NHN7014_ Assy Back Chassis Top Display 53 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Figure 10 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View Sec 2 10 5 Sec 2 10 6 10 7 APX 6000XE Controller Kit Numbers Kit Number Description NNTN8177_ APX 6000 Mace Expansion Board NNTN8178_ MHLN4004_ APX 6000 Mace wth Apps Expansion Board APX 6000 VOCON Kit Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 6000XE Controller Kit Numbers Index Numerics 7 800 model chart 2 xiv radio specifications 2 xviii A after submerging handling precautions 2 2
103. 4 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View 2 10 5 APX 6000XE Controller Kit Numbers 2 10 6 Sec 2 10 2 Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View NOTE Kit NHN7033 includes Items 15 20 22 26 27 44 455 458 When purchasing this kit need to purchase item 23 qty 2 together Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List Item Motorola Part Desciiption No Number P 1 NHN7024_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Full Keypad NHN7025_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Yellow Full Keypad NHN7026_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Green Full Keypad NHN7069_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Cyrillic Full Keypad NHN7081_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display M3 Black Arabic Full Keypad NHN7013_ Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display 3275002C03 61009283002 MNUD7120_ 75009299002 3271829H02 Mic Membrane Lens Front Display Board RF Thermal Pad Inner Seal Connector Battery 151 22 26 33 35 41 43 45 47 49 01009364001
104. 4 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030_ Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X MNUE7365 Assembly RF Board UHF X X X PMLN5335_ User Guide CD APX 6000 APX 7000 Not Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories ASTRO APX 6000Li 700 800 Model Chart Sec 1 xxv ASTRO APX 6000Li 700 800 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad H98UCD9PW5_N H98UCF9PW6 N H98UCH9PW7 N AZ489FT5859 AZ489F T5863 700 800
105. 47 Place Back Chassis Top Display version Inspect the Back Chassis Assembly N seal for any debris or foreign material 2 Place the Main Seal 50 onto the main chassis groove Gently seat the seal around the perimeter of the groove ensuring the key feature is oriented as shown in Figure 8 47 3 Set the Back Chassis Assembly onto the Main Chassis Assembly E Sec 1 8 36 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 8 9 1 6 Assemble Main Housing Assembly A L M 1 Stretch the Main Housing Assembly A L M side walls outward with both hands just enough to clear the Main Chassis Assembly E and place it onto the radio 2 Ensure the top edge of the housing and the bottom edge of the control top are aligned as shown in Figure 8 48 3 Squeeze the Main Housing Assembly A L M and the Main Chassis Assembly E in the battery area until the Main Housing Assembly fully snaps in place onto the Main Chassis Assembly Stretch Outwards Figure 8 48 Place Housing into Main Chassis 8 9 1 7 Assemble Expansion Board Assembly H Control Top Assembly Flex Antenna Coax Cable Connector Figure 8 49 Assemble Expansion Board Assembly 1 Ifthe Control Top Assembly F or VOCON Board Assembly D was NOT removed skip to step 2 Connect the Control Top Flex to the VOCON Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 49 2 If replacing new Control Top 21 or Main Chassis Assembly 15 add Control Top Support Pads 23 to stai
106. 5 UHF R2 3596 E Ki Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 3584 3584 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 3592 3592 Tx Deviation Balance m ET Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 3592 3592 Rx Front End Filter E 356 mm E Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 3596 lucu l Bit Error Rate 506 025 UHF R2 3604 3604 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 3608 3508 Figure 6 19 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen UHF2 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 15 AA Y APX Family Tuner da Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As H Read Device Windows Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview File EH Device m Windows Themes G Print G Navigation A X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode Program AN PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 z nl Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 123ABC1234 Seen em Radio Information 764 0125 3329 gt ul E Transmitter Alignments 3331 Reference Oscillator SU 3331 C da Tx Power Characterization Points 775 9875 3330 3330 Tx Power Characterization _ PA Saturation Reference 794 0125 3335 3335 Tx Deviation Balance pa em El Performance Testing 809 0125 3422 3422 P Bit Error Rate 339 Transmitter Test Pattern PESTE 599 C Vd Factory Override
107. 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Position 4 Frequency Band A Less than 29 7MHz P 336 to 410MHz B 29 7 to 35 99MHz Q 380 to 470MHz C 36 to 41 99MHz R 438 to 482MHz D 42 to 50MHz S 470 to 520MHz F 66 to 80MHz T Dual Band Capable G 74 to 90MHz U 764 to 870MHz H Product Specific V 825 to 870MHz J 136 to 162MHz W 896 to 941MHz K 146 to 178MHz Y 1 0 to 1 6GHz L 174 to 210MHz Z 1 5 to 2 0GHz M 190 to 235MHz Values given represent range only they are not absolute Position 5 Power Level A 0 to 0 7 Watts B 0 7 to 0 9 Watts C 1 0 to 3 9 Watts D 4 0 to 5 0 Watts E 5 1 to 6 0 Watts F 6 1 to 10 Watts G 0 to 6 Watts Position 6 Physical Packages A RF Modem Operation B Receiver Only C Standard Control No Display D Standard Control With Display E Limited Keypad No Display F Limited Keypad With Display G Full Keypad No Display H Full Keypad With Display J Limited Controls No Display K Limited Controls Basic Display L Limited Controls Limited Display M Rotary Controls Standard Display N Enhanced Controls Enhanced Display P Low Profile No Display Q Low Profile Basic Display R Low Profile Basic Display Full Keypad Position 7 Channel Spacing 9 7 A 1 5kHz 5 15kHz 2 6 25kHz 6 20 25kHz 3 10kHz 7 30kHz 4 12 5kHz 9 Variable Programmable P 8 A 5 A 10 11 12 13
108. 53 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Figure 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View Sec 1 10 6 Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Controller Kit Numbers 10 7 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Controller Kit Numbers Kit Number Description NNTN8177_ APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Mace Expansion Board NNTN8178_ APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Mace wth Apps Expansion Board MHLNA4004 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li VOCON Kit Index Numerics 7 800 model chart 1 xiii 1 xx 1 xxvii radio specifications 1 xvi 1 xxiv 1 xxx A alignment tuner bit error rate test 1 6 21 introduction 1 6 1 main menu 1 6 2 radio information screen 1 6 4 reference oscillator 1 6 4 softpot use 1 6 2 test setup 1 6 1 transmit deviation balance 1 6 15 transmitter test pattern 1 6 24 analog mode receiving 1 3 2 transmitting 1 3 7 antenna attaching 1 8 7 removing 1 8 7 antenna o ring servicing 1 8 21 ARM theory of operation 1 3 11 assemble back chassis assembly 1 8 35 control top assembly 1 8 32 expansion board assembly 1 8 36 knobs and top bezel assembly 1 8 33 main housing assembly 1 8 36 RF board assembly 1 8 34 speaker grill assembly 1 8 38 speaker module 1 8 37 vocon board assembly 1 8 34 ASTRO mode receiving 1 3 9 transmitting 1 3 9 audio theory of operation 1 3 11 B ba
109. 5859 BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION AZ489F T5863 700 800 APX 5000 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015 Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020 Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261003 Label Grille Top APX 5000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977 Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Disp
110. 6 17 Figure 6 21 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen VHF m m 5 m A m m D Figure 6 22 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHF1 Sec 2 6 18 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments m W APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help 5 Open Save dep Save As Read Device Windows Themes ee Print Ctri P L Print Preview File fx Device G Windows Themes la Print E Navigation H X TxDeviation Balance Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 PTT Tone Low O High Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 32767 El 123ABC1234 ma CH Radio Information 450 025 UHF R2 10496 1096 e E Transmitter Alignments i 11008 a Reference Oscillator ELE IE EELS Z Gd Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 11648 11648 Tx Power Characterization _ PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 12288 12288 Tx Deviation Balance e frm Fl Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 12288 12288 iS ih Rx Front End Filter 0 pm Pal z 13056 E Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 13056 i a Bit Error Rate 506 025 UHF R2 13824 13824 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 15104 15104 Figure 6 23 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHF2 r ay US APX Family Tuner X Home Option Featu
111. 7 E 123ABC1234 em 7 xal 173 975 1150 1150 _ A Radio Information El Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance El Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 5 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen VHF Sec 2 6 6 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Figure 6 6 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen UHF1 Figure 6 7 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen UHF2 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 7 Y APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Z amp Windows Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File e Device m Windows Themes Print ei Navigation H X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode Program SI PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 869 8875 Frequency Softpot Value 869 8875 New Softpot Value 0 2047 E 123ABC1234 Radio Information Lal E Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate 1149 1149 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 8 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 Make sure the Communication Analyzer is in Manual mode 2 Setthe bas
112. 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030_ Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X MNUE7365 Assembly RF Board UHF1 X X X PMLN5335_ User Guide CD APX 6000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031
113. 7037_ 12 5 kHz 68 dBc or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573_ Rated Audio or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 Internal Speaker 500 mW Emissions Designators or Li Ion Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 External Speaker 500 mW 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 8K10F1W 20KOF1E FM Intrinsically Safe FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 5 dB Dimensions H x W x D 12 5 kHz 47 4 dB Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm Distortion typical 0 91 96 W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery 10 7 oz 303 g With Li lon Slim 15 7 oz 445 g With Li lon Ultra High Cap 21 1 oz 559 g With NiMH 22 3 oz 631 g Specifications subject to change without notice Specifications for APX 6000 UHF2 Radios Specifications for APX 6000 UHF2 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted Sec 1 xxi NOTE UHF2 operation within the United Stated is limited t
114. 800 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model H98UCD9PW5_N Dual Display Limited Keypad H98UCF9PW6 N Dual Display Full Keypad H98UCH9PW7 N Non BT Models FCC ID AZ489FT5859 BT Models FCC ID AZ489F T5863 MODEL DESCRIPTION 700 800 APX 6000XE Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7033_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X X NHN7042_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Yellow X X X NHN7043_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Green X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7034_ Grille Speaker Black NHN7036_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7037_ Grille Speaker Green X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Labe
115. 851 0125 3526 3526 860 0125 3598 3598 869 8875 3675 3675 z Figure 6 20 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 6 5 5 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment This alignment procedure balances the modulation contributions of the low and high frequency portions of a baseband signal Proper alignment is critical to the operation of signalling schemes that have very low frequency components for example DPL and could result in distorted waveforms if improperly adjusted This procedure needs to be performed at multiple frequencies to allow for proper alignment across the entire RF band The RF band is divided into frequency zones with a calibration point value in each zone NOTE This alignment is required after replacing or servicing the VOCON board or the transceiver board Proper alignment requires a modulation analyzer or meter with a frequency response to less than 10 Hz modulating frequency The modulation analyzer settings during this test should be set for average deviation a 15 kHz low pass filter no de emphasis and no high pass filter if these settings are supported This alignment can be done with either the R 2670 Communication Analyzer or the 8901_ Series Modulation Analyzer The method of choice is the R 2670 analyzer 1 Initial setup using the R 2670 Communication Analyzer Connect a BNC cable between the DEMOD OUT port and the VERT SINAD DIST DMM COUNTER IN
116. 9 2 45 3009304001 Screw RF and Vocon Board 47 33009273001 Label FM Outer 49 32009355001 Seal Main NOTE 1 Kit NHN7015 includes Items 15 21 22 24 32 and 43 When purchasing this kit need to purchase item 23 aty 2 together 2 When purchasing item 21 need to purchase item 23 qty 2 together Sec 1 10 3 Sec 1 10 4 Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded 10 4 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View View Parts List Item Motorola Part Description No Number P 50 NHN7027_ Assy Front Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad 2 33009265001 Medallion Figure 10 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View 10 5 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View Sec 1 10 5 10 6 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View Parts List Item Motorola Part Description No Number P 51 NHN7030_ Assy Front Housing Top Display 2 33009265001 Medallion 52 NHN7014_ Assy Back Chassis Top Display
117. 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz TRANSMITTER Frequency Range 380 470 MHz RF Power 380 470 MHz BW Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000035 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 5 dB 12 5 kHz 52 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 0 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 1 xiv Specifications for APX 5000 7 800 MHz Radios Specifications for APX 5000 7 800 MHz Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium Ion Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 700 MHz 1410 mA 800 MHz 1696 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 250 mA Standby Current Drain 142 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7
118. A D Abacus IC active channel ACK ADC ADDAG analog Analog to Digital Digital to Analog and Glue analog to digital conversion analog to digital converter ASTRO 25 trunking ASTRO conventional automatic level control autoscan band BGA ball grid array Call Alert Definition See analog to digital conversion A custom integrated circuit providing a digital receiver intermediate frequency IF backend A channel that has traffic on it Acknowledgment of communication See analog to digital converter See Analog to Digital Digital to Analog and Glue Refers to a continuously variable signal or a circuit or device designed to handle such signals See also digital An integrated circuit designed to be an interface between the radio s DSP which is digital and the analog transmitter and receiver ICs Conversion of an instantaneous dc voltage level to a corresponding digital value See also D A A device that converts analog signals into digital data See also DAC Motorola standard for wireless digital ttunked communications Motorola standard for wireless analog or digital conventional communications A circuit in the transmit RF path that controls RF power amplifier output provides leveling over frequency and voltage and protects against high VSWR A feature that allows the radio to automatically scan the members of a scan list Frequencies allowed for a specific purpose See ball grid
119. ASTRO transmit mode microphone audio is processed identically to an analog mode with the exception of the algorithm the DSP uses to encode the information Using this algorithm transmitter FM deviation is limited to discrete levels Sec 1 3 10 Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section 3 4 Controller Section The controller section see Figure 3 11 comprises of five functional sections that are split among two boards which are the VOCON and EXPANSION boards The main functional section consists of a dual core ARM and DSP controller Flash memory and a Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory DDR SDRAM The Power and Clocks section includes a power management IC MAKO and various external switching regulators and two clock sources 12 MHz and 24 576 MHz from which all other controller digital clocks are derived The Audio section has a CODEC and a class D audio power amplifier that provides the radio with a multiple microphone single speaker design The User Interface section provides communication and control to the top and main Liquid Crystal Displays LCD on the radio as well as a keypad and a side connector interface conforming to Universal Connector specifications The Mace Expansion Board consists on the main class D audio power amplifier and the Type III secure IC MACE In addition to the Mace features the Mace with Apps Expansion Board consists of an e MMC NAND Flash 4GB a combination integrated circuit
120. AT B Silence PAT Meter AC Volts These tests require a communications system analyzer with the ASTRO 25 test options 5 5 Transmitter Performance Checks The following tables outline the performance checks for the transmitter Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Reference RF Control Monitor TESTMODE CSQ PTT to continuous VHF 0 8 ppm Frequency Meter RF Display channel or during the 140 Hz Display Bar Graphs programmed performance UHF1 0 8 ppm Freq Selected radio TX conventional check 376 Hz freq channel UHF2 0 8 ppm 416 Hz 700 800 MHz 0 8 ppm 696 Hz RF Power As above As above As above VHF 1 6 Watts UHF1 1 5 Watt UHF2 1 5 Watt 700 1 2 7 Watt 800 1 3 Watt Voice As above Set fixed 1 kHz As above As above Deviation Modulation audio level to 400 mV 12 5 kHz gt 2 1 kHz but external lt 2 5 kHz 25 kHz gt 4 1 kHz but lt 5 0 kHz Sec 1 5 14 Performance Checks Transmitter Performance Checks Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Continued Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Voice RF Control Monitor As above Remove Press PTT button on radio Modulation Meter RF Display modulation input Say four loudly into the internal Display Bar Graphs PTT to OFF radio mi
121. Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 4 Radio Information Screen Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Alignment Adjustment of the reference oscillator is critical for proper radio operation Improper adjustment will result not only in poor operation but also in a misaligned radio that will interfere with other users operating on adjacent channels For this reason the reference oscillator should be checked every time the radio is serviced or once a year whichever comes first The frequency counter used for this procedure must have a stability of 0 1 ppm or better Also checking this parameter when the product is placed in service is especially important if the product has been in storage for a significant period of time 6 months or more between being shipped from the factory and commissioned for service NOTE Reference oscillator alignment is required after replacing or servicing the transceiver board Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 5 This test can be done with either the R 2670 Communication Analyzer or the 8901 Modulation Analyzer Initial setup using the R 2670 Communication Analyzer RF Control MONITOR B W WB Freq CPS frequency under test Attenuation 20dB Mon RF in RF I O Meter RF Display Mode STD Input Level uV or W Display Bar Graphs Squelch Mid range or adjust as necessary Initial setup using the 8901 Series Modula
122. Control Top Bezel Assembly nennen nennen enne 2 8 32 Knobs Assembly ege ette ener eee teer me denn tee d nete d ee dd tee 2 8 32 Insert VOCON Board ne ten deed atender neta e RR area da SE 2 8 33 Connect RF Board to VOCON Board sss eem nennen nn 2 8 34 Place Back Chassis 1 tetto ia Ee ue TA 2 8 35 Place Housing into Main Chassis 2 8 36 Assemble Expansion Board Aesembhy sss eene 2 8 36 Insert Flex Connectors 2 ciere ad 2 8 37 Expander Board Support 671 2 8 37 Insert Expander Board Gupport eem 2 8 37 Press Expander Board Support into Place Opt Expansion Board 2 8 38 Insert Speaker Module sse nnne nennt renes nnns 2 8 38 Insert TOPS CHEWS ct uet eer A de Pee e dti de a eed DERE RERO 2 8 39 Insert Center Screws cnica cd 2 8 39 Insert BOOM SCreWS tee 2 8 40 Attaching Vacuum Adatpter nono n o nano ener nennen nennen nnns 2 8 42 List of Figures Sec 2 13 Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 2 10 2 Figure 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 2 10 4 Figure 10 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View 2 10 5 Sec 2 14 Portable Radio Model Numbering System Model Numbering Charts and Specifications Portable Radio Model Numbering System Typical Model Number H 9 8 K G D Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 T L A A A Position 1 Type of Unit A H Hand Held Portable Positions 2 amp 3 Model Series 98 APX
123. Correction or Test Measurements Taken at Room Temperature No RF Power Out 1 TX Power Level or Frequency Check TX power level and frequency programming from tuner 2 No Injection To Power Amplifier 3 Antenna Switch Connector Send radio to depot No Modulation Distorted Modulation 1 Programming Check deviation and compensation settings using the tuner 2 VOCON Board Send radio to depot Bad Microphone Sensitivity 1 Check Deviation and Compensation Realign if necessary 2 Microphone Send radio to depot No Low signaling PL DPL MDC 1 Programming Check programming 2 VOCON Board Send radio to depot Cannot Set Deviation Balance RF Board Send radio to depot 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Table 9 5 lists the possible causes of and corrections for encryption problems Table 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action No KEYLOAD on Radio Display When Keyloading Cable is Attached to the Radio Side Connector 1 Defective Keyload Cable Send radio to depot 2 Defective Radio Keyloader Displays FAIL 1 Wrong Keyloader Type Use correct keyloader type Refer to Keyloader User Guide for more information 2 Bad Keyloader Try another keyloader 3 Defective Radio Send radio to depot Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts L
124. Fi SP3T RF Switch N Log Amp Power Detector LAC Digital RF Attenuator A EE O Antenna Connector GPS RMT port Y EY SP2T RF Switch A r Wl RF Switch Matrix Trident IC Synthesizer Loop Filter l TX VCO Module RX TX wi VCO Module Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection Ref Oscillator Figure 3 10 Transceiver 700 800 MHz Block Diagram Antenna Connector GPS Basic Theory of Operation Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation Sec 1 3 9 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 4 3 3 VHF Transmit Once a VHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal An RF switch then routes the signal to the VHF Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal routes the power to the main antenna
125. From the RX TX select switch the signal is routed to an RF switch which selects the 700 or 800 Mhz band signal and routes it through a filter an LNA another filter and another LNA All filters are Surface Acoustic Wave SAW designs used to band limit the received energy and suppress known spurious responses The output of the second filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz Intermediate Frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and an amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 Analog To Digital Converter The ADC IC s front end down converts the first IF to a second IF a 2 25 MHz signal The second IF is sampled at 18 MHz a signal generated by an integrated clock synthesizer The sampled signal is decimated by a factor of 900 to 20 kHz and converted to SSI format at the ADC s output The Serial Synchronous Interface SSI serial data waveform is composed of a 16 bit in phase word I followed by a 16 bit Quadrature word Q A 20 kHz Frame Synch and a 1 2 MHz clock waveform are used to synchronize the SSI IQ data transfer to the Digital Signal Processor IC OMAP for post processing and demodulation Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation 3 2 2 Transmitting When the radio is transmitting microphone audio is digitize
126. HF Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98KGD9PW5_N H98KGF9PW6 N H98KGH9PW7 N AZ489FT3824 AZ489FT3929 VHF APX 6000XE Sec 2 15 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7033_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis NHN7042_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Yellow NHN7043_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Green X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7034_ Grille Speaker Black NHN7036_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7037_ Grille Speaker Green X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273
127. Hz a signal generated by an integrated clock synthesizer The sampled signal is decimated by a factor of 900 to 20 kHz and converted to SSI format at the ADC s output The Serial Synchronous Interface SSI serial data waveform is composed of a 16 bit in phase word I followed by a 16 bit Quadrature word Q A 20 kHz Frame Synch and a 1 2 MHz clock waveform are used to synchronize the SSI IQ data transfer to the Digital Signal Processor IC OMAP for post processing and demodulation Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation 3 2 2 Transmitting When the radio is transmitting microphone audio is digitized and then processed by the DSP and sent to the Trident IC see Figure 3 7 to Figure 3 10 via the SSI interface The Trident IC processes the SSI data for application to the voltage controlled oscillator as a modulation signal TX Buffer Amp Sec 1 3 7 Transmitter Final FET VHF TX Driver Amplifier Loop Filter l IX VCO Module RX VCO t Module RF Switch Matrix TX Buffer Amp Trident IC SP3T RF Switch Harmonic LP Filter Synthesizer N Log Amp Power Detector LEO Digital RF Attenuator A Antenna Connector TO RX Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection Ref Oscillator Figure 3 7 Transceiver VHF
128. LF circuit uses a 125 kHz radiated signal to communicate the secure pairing information between the Bluetooth accessory and low frequency receiver The low frequency receiver is programmed by the AVR32 processor through a dedicated SPI bus and transfers the pairing data through a dedicated UART There is a digital accelerometer on the expansion board that detects the 3 axis force of gravity which can be used to determine the radio s orientation The accelerometer s position is communicated to the AVR32 processor through a SPI bus Chapter 4 Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids This chapter provides lists of recommended test equipment and service aids as well as information on field programming equipment that can be used in servicing and programming ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radios 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment The list of equipment contained in Table 4 1 includes all of the standard test equipment required for servicing two way portable radios as well as several unique items designed specifically for servicing this family of radios The Characteristics column is included so that equivalent equipment may be substituted however when no information is provided in this column the specific Motorola model listed is either a unique item or no substitution is recommended Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Characteristics Example Application Service Can be used as a Substitute for Aeroflex 3920 Fr
129. MHz frequency bands All ASTRO APX 6000XE radios are capable of both analog operation 12 5 kHz or 25 kHz bandwidths ASTRO mode digital operation 12 5 kHz only and X2 TDMA mode 25 kHz only Major Assemblies The ASTRO APX 6000XE radio includes the following major assemblies See Figure 3 1 VOCON Board contains a dual core processor which includes both the microcontroller unit MCU and a digital signal processor DSP core the processor s memory devices an audio and power supply support integrated circuit IC a digital support IC and external audio power amplifier Transceiver XCVR Board contains all transmit receive and frequency generation circuitry including the digital receiver back end IC and the reference oscillator Expansion Board Mace contains the internal audio power amplifier circuitry and a Type III secure IC Mace with Apps contains the internal audio power amplifier circuitry a combination Global Positioning System GPS Bluetooth 2 1 IC and support circuitry a 3 axes digital accelerometer an e MMC NAND flash and a Type III secure IC Top Display 112 pixels x 32 pixels transflective monochrome liquid crystal display LCD Control Top contains five switches On Off amp Volume Knob a 16 position Channel Frequency Knob with concentric 2 position switch for Secure Enable Disable operation a 3 position toggle switch for Zone Selection and a push button switch used for Emergency c
130. MOTOROLA CERN MODEL 1 MODEL 2 MODEL 3 MODEL 1 MODEL 2 MODEL 3 Foreword This manual covers all models of the ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li APX 6000XE digital portable radio unless otherwise specified It includes all the information necessary to maintain peak product performance and maximum working time using levels 1 and 2 maintenance procedures This level of service goes down to the board replacement level and is typical of some local service centers self maintained customers and distributors For details on radio operation or component level troubleshooting refer to the applicable manuals available separately A list of related publications is provided in the section Related Publications on page 1 iv and page 2 10 Product Safety and RF Exposure Compliance ATTENTION Before using this radio read the guide enclosed with your radio which contains important operating instructions for safe usage and RF energy awareness and control for compliance with applicable standards and regulations For a list of Motorola approved antennas batteries and other accessories visit the following web site which lists approved accessories www motorolasolutions com APX Manual Revisions Changes which occur after this manual is printed are described in FMRs Florida Manual Revisions These FMRs provide complete replacement pages for all added changed and deleted items including pertinent parts list data sche
131. N5224 Customer Programming CPS allows customer specific programming of modes and Software CPS and Tuner features Tuner software required to perform alignment of Software radio parameters PMKN4012_ Programming Cable Used to program the radio through Customer Programming Software and Tuner Software PMKN4013_ Programming Service Cable Used to program and service the radio through Customer Programming Software and Tuner Software RLN4510_ 7 5 Volt Universal Battery Used in conjunction with the 66009254001 to adjust the Eliminator supply voltage to 7 5 Vdc Allows a multimeter to be attached for monitoring and adjusting voltage and current levels RLN4460_ Portable Test Set Used for radio performance checks Connects to radio s universal connector and allows remote switching and signal injection outputs for test equipment measurements 4 3 Field Programming This family of radios can be aligned and programmed in the field This requires specific equipment and special instructions Refer to the online help in the Customer Programming Software CPS for complete field programming information Chapter 5 Performance Checks This chapter covers performance checks used to ensure that the ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio meets published specifications The recommended test equipment listed in the previous section approaches the accuracy of the manufacturing equipment with a few exceptions Accuracy of the test equipment must b
132. NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display xX X X NUD7120_ Assembly RF Board VHF X X X PMLN5335_ User Guide CD APX 6000 APX 7000 Note X Item Included O Option available Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 1 xxiv ASTRO APX 6000Li UHF1 Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000Li UHF1 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98QDD9PW5 N H98QDF9PW6 N H98QDH9PW7 N AZ489FT4899 AZ489FT4892 UHF1 APX 6000Li e X Iltem Included O Option available Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B0
133. OF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Specifications for APX 6000Li UHF1 Radios Specifications for APX 6000Li UHF1 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER Sec 1 xxvii Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 1960 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 303 mA Standby Current Drain 133 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMNA4403 or Li lon NNTN7038 or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 oor NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Ba
134. Only To zeroize an encryption key 1 Press until the display shows Eras 2 Press Ml EM or directly below Eras The display shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys Select single encryption key or all encrytion keys deletion from the OPTN menu 5 Press fm the PTT button or El E3 or ED directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone 7 5 2 Method 2 All Keys Erased To erase all encryption keys at one time With the radio on press and hold the Top Side button and while holding this button down press the Top button NOTE DO NOT press the Top button before pressing the Top Side button unless you are in an emergency situation This sends an emergency alarm Before the keys are erased the display shows PLEASE WAIT When all the encryption keys have been erased the display shows ALL KEYS ERASED Chapter 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures 8 1 This chapter provides detailed procedures for disassembling reassembling and ensuring submergibility of the APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li R radios When performing these procedures refer to Chapter 10 Exploded View
135. Orange button to stop the displays and put the radio into the RF test mode The test mode menu 1 CSQ is displayed indicating test frequency 1 Carrier SQuelch mode Go to Section 5 2 2 RF Test Mode below NOTE Once your radio is in a particular test mode you must turn off the radio and turn it back on again to access the other test mode 5 2 2 RF Test Mode When the ASTRO APX 6000 radio is operating in its normal environment the radio s microcomputer controls the RF channel selection transmitter key up and receiver muting according to the customer codeplug configuration However when the unit is on the bench for testing alignment or repair it must be removed from its normal environment using a special routine called RF TEST MODE While in RF test mode Each additional press of Side Button 2 advances to the next test channel Refer to Table 5 3 Pressing Side Button 1 scrolls through and accesses the test environments shown in Table 5 4 Pressing Top Side Button scrolls through the Tx Deviation Frequency NOTE Transmit into a load when keying a radio under test Table 5 3 Test Frequencies MHz SE VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 MHz hannes px TX RX TX RX TX RX TX F1 136 075 136 025 380 075 380 025 450 075 450 025 764 0625 764 0125 F2 142 075 142 125 390 075 390 025 460 075 460 025 769 0625 769 0125 F3 154 275 154 225 400 075 400 025 471 075 47
136. ROJ 25 STD mode and set the meter to RF DISPLAY In the RF Zone configure the analyzer as follows RF Control Generate Preset B W NB Freq Test frequency Ex 851 0625 MHz Output Level 50 0 dBm Gen RF Out RF I O Inthe Audio Zone select the 1011 Hz PAT code and set the deviation to PROJ25Dev 2 83 kHz The bit error rate screen contains the following fields Rx Frequency This field selects the Receive Frequency directly in MHz Test Pattern This field selects the Digital test pattern to be received by the radio Choices are Standard Tone Test Pattern Framed 1011 F2 1031 and Standard Interface Test Pattern CCITT V 52 Modulation Type This field represents the digital modulation type of the incoming signal on which BER is to be calculated Continuous Operation This field allows the user the option to repeat the BER test indefinitely A selection of Yes will cause the radio to calculate BER on a continuous basis and update the results on this screen after each integration time A selection of No will cause the BER test to execute for only one sample of the integration time and then update the display Audio This field allows the user to select the audio output during a test Selecting Internal will cause the radio s built in speaker to unmute to any signals at the desired frequency which are present during the test Selecting External will route the same signal to the radio s accessory connector audio
137. S 2 Slightly swing the Universal Connector Cover away from radio before sliding it upward to disengage the hook feature 3 Pull the Universal Connector Cover away from the radio Sec 2 8 12 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Universal Connector Cover 8 6 2 Attach Universal Connector Cover To attach the Universal Connector Cover 46 1 Insert the hooked end of the cover into the pocket Engage the hook beneath the undercut and swing the cover down onto the radio Ensure the cover is seated properly and the screw is aligned into the threaded hole Figure 8 12 Engaging Hook and Seating Cover 2 Hand tighten the thumb screw clockwise until secured NOTE Do not overtighten the screw The screw should be snugged and not allow the cover to move o 7 Z Py 220000 228228 H Thumb Screw with Hex Head Socket e N Figure 8 13 Securing the Cover Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 2 8 13 8 7 Radio Disassembly This section contains instructions for disassembling the radio s main subassemblies Prepare the radio for disassembly Turn off the radio by rotating the On Off Volume Knob 55 fully counterclockwise until a click is heard Remove the antenna the battery Belt Clip Cover 53 Top Display Only the Universal Connector Cover 46 and any other accessory connected to the radio 8 7 1 Removal of the Speaker Grille Assemblies K 1 Wi
138. Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98KGD9PW5_N H98KGF9PW6 N H98KGH9PW7 N AZ489FT3824 AZ489FT3929 VHF APX 6000Li Sec 1 xxiii Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION X X X NHN7015_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit xX X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X
139. Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHEZ 2 6 18 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 18 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UIHET eem 2 6 19 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UIHEZ mem 2 6 20 Bit Error Rate Screen VHF arora A denne earn ttr nnne ian 2 6 22 Bit Error Rate Screen UHF1 esee d et tenen reser thee 2 6 22 Bit Error Rate Screen EZ eege teer etate a Pa eite 2 6 23 Bit Error Rate Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 23 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen VHE eene 2 6 24 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHF1 sssssssseee eene 2 6 25 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen UHE2 eene 2 6 25 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 26 APX 6000XE Dual Display Partial Exploded View 2 8 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Partial Exploded View 2 8 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Partial Exploded View oooocoocccconoccococncccococcconnnonnnnconccnnnnnnnnnnns 2 8 4 Attaching thie Antenra EE 2 8 7 Sec 2 12 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 8 24 Figure 8 25 Figure 8 26 Figure 8 27 Figure 8 28 Figure 8 29 Figure 8 30 Figure 8 31 Figure 8 32 Figure 8 33 Figure 8 34 Figure 8 35
140. UHF1 Transmit Once a UHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal Then the RF signal is routed to the UHF1 Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio UHF2 Transmit Once a UHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal Then the RF signal is routed to the UHF2 Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the drive
141. Version Sec 1 5 11 5 3 3 Control Top Test Mode This test mode is used to verify proper operation of all radio buttons and switches if a failure is suspected 5 3 3 1 Control Top Checks To perform the control top checks 1 8 9 10 11 Press and hold the Top Button Orange button the radio icons are displayed and the LED lights amber Release the Top Button 148 0 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the open position Your radio is now in the Control Top and Keypad test mode Press the Top Button again 148 1 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the closed position Rotate the 16 Position Select Switch 4 0 through 4 15 appears which indicates that the selector switch is in mode zone position 1 through 16 Rotate the Two Position Concentric Switch 65 0 and 65 1 appear Cycle through the Three Position A B C Switch 67 0 67 1 and 67 2 appear Rotate the Volume Control 2 0 through 2 255 appear The display values may vary slightly at the upper and lower limits Press the Top Side Button 96 1 appears release 96 0 appears Press Side Button 1 97 1 appears release 97 0 appears Press Side Button 2 98 1 appears release 98 0 appears Press the PTT Button 1 1 appears release 1 0 appears 5 3 4 CID Test Mode To perform the CID Test ak wr gt Press and rel
142. X 6000XE Top Display Exploded View Parts Ust 2 10 5 10 7 APX 6000XE Controller Kit Number 2 10 6 Table of Contents Sec 2 9 lite TE EE 2 Index 1 Sec 2 10 List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 1 ASTRO APX 6000XE Basic Features 2 1 2 Table 4 1 Recommended Test Eoutpment sett ceaaaaeaeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeteeesenea 2 4 1 Table 4 2 Service Alds oiii eee eiecti aa adnate che n dia edet deu cenae ete e d RUE Ra 2 4 2 Table 5 1 Initial Equipment Control Settings ssssssssssseeeeemeeenen nennen 2 5 2 Table 5 2 Test Mode DisplayS cccccccccccceeseecccceeedeecaneceeseeccneneeeeecaneeensdeceaeeeedeedanecenseeaeaeeeeseceuaanees 2 5 3 Table 5 3 Test Frequencies MHz 2 5 5 Table 5 4 Test Environmehts ioi en euet tepido Pao gesqer a el 2 5 6 Table 5 5 Test Mode Display Scoe arrer ar EAEE EEIE a EAIA EEEE AIETE AREA AE E E 2 5 8 Table 5 6 Test Frequencies MHZ urita ieee AAEREN NEENA EE EET EIE EE 2 5 10 Table 5 7 Receiver Performance Checks oooccoccccoccocccoccccccnccoconnnnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnns 2 5 12 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels uoioicocccnnoccccccccccocnnnonnnnonnccnnnnnnninnns 2 5 12 Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 6000XE ooooocoocococcoconccccccncccnnnnonnnnnnconnncnnnnnnnnnnns 2 5 13 Table 5 10 Transmitter Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels APX 6000XE susse 2 5 14 Table 6 1 Base Frequencies rere
143. a With the radio turned off turn the antenna clockwise to attach it to the radio S Figure 8 4 Attaching the Antenna 8 4 2 Remove Antenna To remove the antenna With the radio turned off turn the antenna counter clockwise to remove it from the radio Figure 8 5 Removing the Antenna Sec 2 8 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery 8 5 Battery This section explains how to properly attach and remove the battery To avoid a possible explosion A DO NOT charge remove or attach the battery in an area labeled hazardous atmosphere WARNING e DO NOT discard batteries in a fire If the radio is programmed for volatile key retention encryption keys will be retained for approximately 30 seconds after battery removal Caution NOTE The Motorola approved battery shipped with the APX 6000XE radio is uncharged Prior to using a new battery charge it per the recommended procedure for the battery 8 5 1 Attach Battery To attach the battery 1 With the radio turned off verify that the battery seal is set properly in its groove as shown in Figure 8 6 tt Battery Seal Figure 8 6 Attaching Battery Battery Seal Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Battery Sec 2 8 9 2 Verify that the Vacuum Port is closed by ensuring it is fully seated and the catch feature on the tab is in the main chassis notch Vacuum Port Seal Figure 8
144. a belt clip battery and universal connector cover Level Two servicing covers disassembly and reassembly of the radio to replace circuit boards Manual Contents Included in this manual is radio specification for the VHF 136 174 MHz UHF1 380 470 MHz UHF2 450 520 MHz and 764 870 MHz frequency bands a general description of ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li models recommended test equipment service aids radio alignment procedures general maintenance recommendations procedures for assembly and disassembly and exploded views and parts lists Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication you will notice the use of note caution warning and danger notations These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist and due care must be taken and observed NOTE An operational procedure practice or condition that is essential to emphasize CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided might result in equipment damage gt Caution WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or injury gt WARNING DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or LIT injury gt Sec 1 1 2 Introduction Radio Description 1 3 Radio Description The ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radios
145. a pre selector filter followed by a Low Noise Amplifier LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and fixed designs and are used to band limit incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as image and 7 IF spur The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 UHF1 Front End From the RX TX select switch a UHF1 signal is routed to the first pre selector filter followed by an LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and tunable designs and are used to band limit the incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as Image spur The output of the second pre selector filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 Sec 1 3 6 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 3 2 1 6 UHF2 Front End From the RX TX select switch a UHF2 signal is routed to the first pre selector filter
146. a water filled container 6 Watch for any continuous series of bubbles A steady stream of bubbles indicates a sign of leakage NOTE Some accumulation of air may be entrapped in the main housing which may cause a false diagnosis of a leak Ensure there is a steady stream of bubbles before concluding there is a leak 7 Note all of the seal areas that show signs of leakage Rotate the radio to view all sides to pinpoint the problem s to one or more of the following areas Seal Interfaces Speaker Assembly Battery Connector Seal Main Chassis including the Control Top Back Chassis Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 1 8 43 8 Remove the radio from the water container and dry the radio thoroughly Be especially careful to dry the area around the Vacuum Port and the battery contacts area To avoid equipment damage keep the area inside the Battery contact pocket is dry before assembling battery Caution 9 With the Radio in an upright position and Control Top up remove the vacuum adapter by squeezing the release latches and pulling the adapter down and away from the radio 10 See 8 10 9 Troubleshooting Leak Areas on page 1 8 43 8 10 9 Troubleshooting Leak Areas Before repairing any leak first read all of the steps within the applicable section This will help to eliminate unnecessary disassembly and reassembly of a radio with multiple leaks Troubleshoot only th
147. ace circuit boards Manual Contents Included in this manual is radio specification for the VHF 136 174 MHz UHF1 380 470 MHz UHF2 450 520 MHz and 764 870 MHz frequency bands a general description of ASTRO APX 6000XE models recommended test equipment service aids radio alignment procedures general maintenance recommendations procedures for assembly and disassembly and exploded views and parts lists Notations Used in This Manual Throughout the text in this publication you will notice the use of note caution warning and danger notations These notations are used to emphasize that safety hazards exist and due care must be taken and observed NOTE An operational procedure practice or condition that is essential to emphasize CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided might result in equipment damage gt Caution WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or injury gt WARNING DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or LIT injury gt Sec 2 1 2 Introduction Radio Description 1 3 Radio Description The ASTRO APX 6000XE radios are among the most sophisticated two way radios available The ASTRO APX 6000XE radio provides improved voice quality across more coverage area The digital process call
148. acuum test skip steps 1 through 4 To conduct the pressure test 1 Ensure that an seal is attached to the Vacuum Adapter 2 Attach the Vacuum Adapter onto the radio in the same manner as a radio battery Ensure both the latches are clicked into place NOTE Vacuum Port door must be opened and held out of the way prior to assembly of the Vacuum Adaptor 3 Attach one end of the hose to the Pressure Pump Attach the other side of the hose to the Vacuum Adapter 4 Operate the pump until the gauge reads approximately 1 psig Pressure must remain between 0 5 psig and 1 5 psig Pressure lower then 0 5 psig may allow water into the radio which will damage the radio Caution Ensure that the pressure NEVER exceeds 1 5 psig The radio has pressure sensitive components that can be damaged if the pressure exceeds this limit Caution 5 Maintain the pressure around 1 psig and submerge the radio into a water filled container 6 Watch for any continuous series of bubbles A steady stream of bubbles indicates a sign of leakage NOTE Some accumulation of air may be entrapped in the main housing which may cause a false diagnosis of a leak Ensure there is a steady stream of bubbles before concluding there is a leak 7 Note all of the seal areas that show signs of leakage Rotate the radio to view all sides to pinpoint the problem s to one or more of the following areas Seal Interfaces Speaker Assembly Batt
149. algorithms name Encryption Type 6 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 6 or more algorithms are loaded number Model number The radio s model number as Always programmed in the codeplug Serial number The radio s serial number as programmed Always in the codeplug ESN The radio s unique electronic serial Always Sec 2 5 4 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Table 5 2 Test Mode Displays Continued Name of Display Description Appears ROM Size The memory capacity of the host FLASH Always part FLASHcode The FLASH codes as programmed in the Always codeplug RF band 1 The radio s operating frequency Always Tuning Ver Version of Tuning codeplug Always Proc Ver Version of Processor Always Option Board Type of Option board being used When the radio has an Option Type Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Serial number of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Serial Number displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Bluetooth Address of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Bluetooth Addr displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Software version of the Option Board is When the radio has an Option SW Version displayed Board Mace with Apps Expansion Board Exp Board Type Type of Expansion Board is displayed When
150. alignment procedures properly may result in seriously degraded radio or system performance Sec 1 6 2 Radio Alignment Procedures Tuner Main Menu 6 2 Tuner Main Menu Select Tuner from the START menu by clicking Start gt Program Files gt Motorola gt ASTRO 25 Products gt ASTRO 25 Tuner To read the radio use the File gt Read Device menu or click on d Read Device Figure 6 2 illustrates how the alignment screens are organized To access a screen double click on the desired screen name in the Tuner menu Softpot Configuration Mode 123ABC1234 Radio Information Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 2 Tuner Software Main Menu IMPORTANT Tuning should follow the order of the Tuning tree view in descending order from top to bottom 6 3 Softpot The alignment screens introduce the concept of the softpot an analog SOFTware controlled POTentiometer used for adjusting all transceiver alignment controls procedure Always left click the Close button on the screen to return to the Main Menu screen before disconnecting the Caution radio Improper exits from the alignment screens might leave the radio in an improperly configured state and result in seriously degraded radi
151. alling The control top also includes an TX RX LED that is solid amber upon receive red on PTT and blinks amber on secure TX RX Front Display Dual Display Version only 130 pixels x 130 pixels transflective color LCD Keypad Dual Display Version Only Dual Display version Limited Kaypad Version has a 3 x 2 Menu keypad with 4 way navigation button and Full Keypad Version has a 3x 4 alphanumeric keypad Sec 2 3 2 Antenna a Transceiver Board 40 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Bluetooth Antenna Expansion 16 External Accessory Connector Board External Antenna 80 22 Front Display 20 Keypad VOCON Board 50 20 Top Display Controls Top 30 Figure 3 1 APX 6000XE Overall Block Diagram 3 2 Analog Mode of Operation This section provides an overview of the analog mode receive and transmit theory of operation 3 2 1 Receiving The RF signal is received at the antenna and is routed through the Auxiliary and Multi Switch SP3T ICs on the UHF1 UHF2 and 7 800MHz designs The latter contains a switchable attenuator that is enabled at predetermined RF power thresholds present at the antenna port The VHF design does not include the Auxiliary switch and thus RF is routed directly to the SP3T switch See Figure 3 2 to Figure 3 5
152. alog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 17uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 243 uV 5 BER 0 15 uV Intermodulation typical 81 88 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 81 3 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 73 34 dB Spurious Rejection typical 90 96 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 56 8 dB 12 5 kHz 50 29 dB Distortion typical 1 57 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz TRANSMITTER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz RF Power 136 174 MHz 1 6 W Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 75 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 2 20 Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF1 Radios Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF1 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40
153. an Encryption Key eie eret ee ores ru te abe PO ER OR E DR HERR ERR RR RR 1 7 1 7 2 OI TTT 1 7 2 To Select an Encryption Key eie ient tenete nnt Le i ene LER RR RERRR LER ERR Len kt REIR e uk n Enea 1 7 2 7 4 Selectian Encryption Index iR Pee taie an 1 7 3 TS Erase an Ernctyption Key rria geed EE dE 1 7 4 Chapter 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures 1 8 1 8 1 Exploded View Main Gubassembles nemen 1 8 1 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies ee ener nnne 1 8 6 8 3 Eastener Torque Chart TT 1 8 6 9 4 Antenna incide rct Pudet in eeu n Dea eder a Iota e ex E Ln taeda IR teu C aret s 1 8 7 9 5 Battery iocos aaa cen bd aec etre tit tuc Revera m eun 1 8 8 8 6 Universal Connector Cover aana ae AEN entren eren nnne nnt tenen ek enn nnn sen kannten nennen nnns 1 8 11 9 7 Radio Disassembly viciado 1 8 13 8 8 Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies sse 1 8 20 H Radio Reassembly aom e See eene edente e to ee nes 1 8 32 8 10 Ensuring Radio Gubmeroibiltv nennen nennen 1 8 39 Chapter 9 Basic Troubleshooting eeeeseees 1 9 1 9 4 Power p Error Codes iio tu ette etait inn 1 9 1 9 2 Operational Error Codes ooooocooninncnnonoccnoccnncnncconnnnnnnnnnn cnn nnnnnnnnnnn rra anna nnn nn nn nnnnn nn nn rn nena nnnnnmanennnanin 1 9 2 9 37 Receiver Troubleshooting eerte nte RR Lea EM tu CU Re pee E RERUM ede Ea bbs 1 9 3 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting nennen nenne
154. and Vocon Board screw 45 then unplug the RF Board Assembly C from the VOCON Board Assembly D by using the Black Stick Slowly lift the RF Board Assembly enough to allow access to the small coax cable Unplug the small coax cable using a Black Stick or a pair of small tweezers to avoid contamination to the Battery Connector Seal 13 and Place the RF Board Assembly in a clean and ESD safe area electrical damage to the electronics respectively caution Replace Thermal Pads 10 11 whenever RF Board Assembly is removed RF and Vocon Board Screw 45 Small Coax Cable RF Board Assembly 9 Connector Figure 8 23 Remove RF Board Assembly Sec 1 8 18 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly 8 7 7 Removal of the VOCON Board Assembly D NOTE Reconfirm the Flex connector between the Control Top Assembly F and the VOCON Board Assembly D is disconnected Failure to do so may damage the connectors or the flex 1 Ensure RF Board is removed see Section 8 7 6 on page 1 8 17 Remove RF and VOCON Board screw 45 as shown in Figure 8 24 Gently rotate the VOCON Board Assembly just enough to clear the Main Chassis Slide out the VOCON Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 25 Figure 8 25 Remove VOCON Board Assembly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 1 8 19 8 7 8 Removal of the Knobs amp Top Bezel Assembly G A Remove the Frequency Knob To remove the Frequ
155. are among the most sophisticated two way radios available The ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio provides improved voice quality across more coverage area The digital process called embedded signaling intermixes system signaling information with digital voice resulting in improved system reliability and the capability of supporting a multitude of advanced features ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radios are available in two configurations Top Display and Dual Display Table 1 1 describes their basic features Table 1 1 ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Basic Features Feature Top Display Dual Display Display LCD monochrome LCD Fully bit mapped Top Display monochrome Top Displav Front Display color 1line of text 8 characters per line Fully Bremapped 1line of icons Top Display 1 line of text 8 characters per line 1line of icons Front Display Dispatch Mode 5 lines of text 14 characters per line List Feature Mode 6lines of text 14 characters per line 2lines of icons Keypad None Dual Display Limited Keypad Version 3 x 2 Menu Buttons with 4 way Navigation button Dual Display Full Keypad Version 3 x 4 Alphanumeric Keypad Channel Capability 96 APX 6000Li APX 5000 APX 6000 512 1250 Dialing from Prestored List No Yes Programmable Softkeys No Yes 1 4 FLASHport The ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio utilizes Motorola s FLASHport technology FLASHport makes it possible
156. assembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility 8 10 9 6 Main Chassis If leak occurs through the Main Seal 50 it will need to be replaced If leak occurs elsewhere on the Main Chassis 15 it will need to be replaced Chapter 9 Basic Troubleshooting This section of the manual contains troubleshooting charts and error codes that will help you to isolate a problem Level one and two troubleshooting will support only radio alignment programming battery replacement and knob replacement and circuit board replacement Component level service information can be found in the ASTRO APX 6000 APX 6000XE Portable Radios Detailed Service Manual Motorola publication number 68012002026 9 1 Power Up Error Codes When the radio is turned on power up the radio performs self tests to determine if its basic electronics and software are in working order Problems detected during these tests are presented as error codes on the radio s display For non display radios the problem will be presented at power up by a single low frequency tone The radio should be sent to the depot if cycling power and reprogramming the code plug do not solve the problem The presence of an error should prompt the user that a problem exists and that a service technician should be contacted Self test errors are classified as either fatal or non fatal Fatal errors will inhibit user operation n
157. aturation Referenc e Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 16 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 13 6 5 4 PA Saturation Reference Tuning Tuning is done through PA Saturation Referencing screen 1 Select the PA Saturation Reference alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit frequencies to be used See Figure 6 17 to Figure 6 20 2 In Manual Mode set the service monitor to the desired frequency as shown in the frequency list in the PA Saturation Reference alignment screen 3 Adjust the PA Saturation Reference softpot value with the slider until the radio transmits as close as possible to the rated power For rated power refer to the help text in the Tuner Left click the slider of the frequency selected should be the same frequency as step 2 5 Left click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is transmitting 6 Repeat the steps 2 to 5 for all frequencies 7 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values P gt APX Family Tuner 4 Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Ca3Windows F Themes ee Print Ctri P 1 Print Preview File Tx Device Windows Themes m Print fx Nav
158. available from the Radio Products and Solutions Organization offices listed in Appendix B Replacement Parts Ordering on page B 1 While all of these items are available from Motorola most are standard shop equipment items and any equivalent item capable of the same performance may be substituted for the item listed Table 4 2 Service Aids Motorola Part EST gU as Number Description Application 5880384G68 SMA to BNC Adapter Adapts radio s antenna port to BNC cabling of test equipment 66009254001 APX Battery Adapter Used in place of battery to connect radio to an external power supply Requires RLN4510_ 66009256001 Volume Potentiometer Outer Used to assemble and disassemble the spanner nut on the Spanner Bit volume potentiometer 66009258001 Antenna Spanner Bit Used to assemble and disassemble the spanner nut on the antenna bushing 66009259001 Vacuum Adapter Submersible radios only Connects the vacuum pressure hose to the radio 66009260002 Board Analysis Fixture Special fixture that allows radio s internal board to be mounted externally Provides easy access to electronic circuits required for board level troubleshooting NLN9839 Vacuum Pump Kit Submersible radios only Vacuum pump with gauge and vacuum hose Requires 66009259001 Adapter Kit NTN4265 Pressure Pump Kit Submersible radios only Pressure pump with gauge and pressure hose Requires 66009259001 Adapter Kit RV
159. ax Cable Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Remove the two screws 44 from the top of the assembly Note the routing of the RF Coax cable 20 as seated onto the chassis grooves Gently remove the cable by sliding it away from the control top Sec 1 8 22 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 4 Replace the RF Coax Cable Bend and seat the new RF cable within the chassis grooves as noted in step 3 5 Torque both screws 44 with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in Ibs Chassis Ground Contact 18 Figure 8 30 Remove Chassis Ground Contact NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Main Chassis Assembly E 8 8 2 Servicing Control Top Assembly F Control Top Assembly 21 Figure 8 31 Control Top Assembly and Control Top Seal 8 8 2 1 Control Top Main Seal 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Remove the Control Top Seal 22 with the Black Stick Replace the new seal into the groove provided in the Control Top Assembly s casting PON Ensure that seal is set properly and not stretched NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Control Top Assembly F Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 23 8 8 3 Servicing Knobs and Top Be
160. black stick Make sure the flex is not stretched Ensure the microphone cartridge is seated properly with the microphone boot Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening Follow Section 8 8 6 1 steps 5 8 to complete assembling and placing the microphone mesh and membrane 8 8 6 3 Servicing Color Display 1 2 Disconnect the Back Chassis Flex from the back of the Color Display 8 Gently pry the Color Display out of the Back Chassis Assembly 3 by using the Black Stick against the white section of the frame upper right corner at the back of the Color Display Remove any remnants of the Display s Pad if it does not come off completely with the Color Display from the Back Chassis Assembly Clean the area to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris once the Display is completely removed Ensure there are no foreign material on the new Color Display or the Lens 7 Remove the liner from the new Color Display and seat it into the Back Chassis Assembly Ensure the Display is oriented correctly and seated properly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 27 8 8 6 4 Servicing the Main Lens NOTE Prior to Lens removal Color Display must be removed See Section 8 8 6 3 on page 2 8 26 1 Remove the main Lens 7 carefully and slowly with the Black Stick NOTE To ease the breaking of the adhesive bond place Back Chassis in freezer Ar Over
161. c Measure Freq Selected radio TX center deviation freq 12 5 kHz 2 2 1 kHz but lt 2 5 kHz 25 kHz 2 4 1 kHz but lt 5 0 kHz PL Modulation As above Conventional PTT to continuous Deviation radios with coded squelch during the 12 5 kHz 375 Hz but conventional personality clear performance 500 Hz clear mode mode operation check 25 kHz 2 500 Hz but coded squelch or TPL channel 1000 Hz operation only test mode Secure As above Programmed As above Deviation Modulation conventional gt 3 7 kHz but x 4 3 kHz radios with channel secure conventional secure mode talkaround operation only mode operation Load key into radio See Table 5 4 on page 1 5 6 Table 5 10 Transmitter Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments RF Power Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to continuous VHF 1 6 Watts RF Control Monitor Software not used during UHF1 1 5 Watt Meter RF Display Radio Out of measurement UHF2 1 5 Watt TEST MODE 700 1 2 7 Watt Select a 800 1 3 Watt conventional ASTRO channel Frequency As above As above As above Error lt 1 0 kHz Error Frequency As above Radio Tuner PTT to OFF Duicu Deviation Software center 2 2 543 kHz but Transmitter Test lt 3 110 kHz Pattern screen is Di ow required 2 0 841 kHz but High use Symbol lt 1 037 kHz Rate PAT Use tes
162. ce Testing NOTE When Continuous Operation Yes all fields will be grayed out while the test is in progress They will be enabled when the STOP button is pressed When Continuous Operation No a wait cursor will be displayed while the test is in progress and return to normal when the test is done Bit Error Rate Figure 6 27 Bit Error Rate Screen VHF Figure 6 28 Bit Error Rate Screen UHF1 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 2 6 23 TAA XT V Home Option Feature Help 450 000000 Framed 1011 Figure 6 30 Bit Error Rate Screen 700 800 MHz 3 Press Start Stop button to begin or end BER testing Sec 2 6 24 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing 6 7 2 Transmitter Test Pattern The Transmitter Test Pattern test is used to transmit specific test patterns at a desired frequency so that the user can perform tests on the radio s transmitter see Figure 6 31 to Figure 6 34 6 7 2 1 Transmitter Test Fields This screen contains the following fields Tx Frequency This field selects the Transmit Frequency directly in MHz Channel Spacing This field allows the user to select the desired transmit deviation in kHz Test Pattern Type This field represents the type of test pattern which will be transmitted by the radio when PTT TOGGLE button is pressed NOTE Channel Spacing and Test Pattern Type fields will be grayed out while ra
163. cedures Transmitter Alignments ws APX Family Tuner A Open Ar zoue zoue As Read Device Windows Z Themes aig Print Ctd P Print Preview Home Option Feature Help File Tu Device G amp Windows Themes Print fa Navigation H X Tx Power Characterization Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency MHz Measured Power 1 Measured Power 2 El 123ABC1234 a sos En E Transmitter Alignments E oa Geli 460 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 29 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 1 60 5 28 Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 1 60 5 28 Rx Front End Filter El Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattem 506 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 29 Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Figure 6 15 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF2 ws APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open zoue zoue As E Read Device Ci Windows Themes al Print Ctri P Print Preview Windows Themes lx Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Softpot Configuration Mode Program All E PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 File IE Device Print EI Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA S
164. ceeds this limit Caution 3 Observe the gauge for approximately 2 minutes fthe needle falls less than 2 inHg the radio passes the vacuum test i Ifthe seal passes this inspection this radio is approved for submergibility No additional testing is required Ifthe needle falls more than 2 inHg the radio fails the vacuum test and the radio might leak if submerged Additional troubleshooting of the radio is required i Keep the Vacuum Adapter on but remove the Vacuum Pump from the Vacuum Adapter ii Continue with Pressure Test as described in Section 8 10 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 2 8 43 8 10 8 Pressure Test using NTN4265 Pressure testing the radio is necessary only if the radio has failed the vacuum test Do not perform the pressure test until the vacuum test has been completed Pressure testing involves creating a positive pressure condition inside the radio submerging the radio in water and observing the radio for a stream of bubbles leak Since all areas of the radio are being checked observe the entire unit carefully for the possibility of multiple leaks before completing this test NOTES When Radio is placed under the water there will be some air trapped which will be released This is not a failure Refer to the exploded view diagrams and parts lists found in Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists on page 2 10 1 If the radio is still set up from v
165. ceiver Does Not Unmute Programming 1 Check if transmitted signal matches the receiver configuration PL DPL etc 2 Check if radio able to unmute with monitor function enabled Audio Distorted or Not Loud Enough Synthesizer Not On Frequency Check synthesizer frequency by measuring the transmitter frequency realign if off by more than 1000 Hz RF Sensitivity Poor 1 Synthesizer Not On Frequency Check synthesizer frequency by measuring the transmitter frequency realign if off by more than 1000 Hz 2 Antenna Switch Connector Send radio to depot 3 Receiver Front End Tuning Check RF front end tuning for optimum sensitivity using the tuner Radio Will Not Turn Off VOCON Board Send radio to depot Sec 2 9 4 9 4 Basic Troubleshooting Transmitter Troubleshooting Transmitter Troubleshooting Table 9 4 lists the possible causes of and corrections for transmitter problems Table 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Correction or Test Measurements Taken at Room Temperature No RF Power Out 1 TX Power Level or Frequency Check TX power level and frequency programming from tuner 2 No Injection To Power Amplifier 3 Antenna Switch Connector Send radio to depot No Modulation Distorted Modulation 1 Programming Check deviation and compensation settings using the tuner 2 VOCON Board S
166. ck chassis assembly assemble 1 8 35 dual display servicing 1 8 25 removing 1 8 16 top display servicing 1 8 27 backup battery servicing 1 8 25 battery attaching 1 8 8 removing 1 8 10 battery seal servicing 1 8 24 bit error rate test 1 6 21 C chassis ground contact servicing 1 8 21 cleaning external plastic surfaces 1 2 1 coin cell pad servicing 1 8 21 color display servicing 1 8 26 control top and keypad test mode dual display version 1 5 6 control top assembly assemble 1 8 32 removing 1 8 20 Servicing 1 8 22 control top main seal servicing 1 8 22 control top test mode dual display version 1 5 11 controller ARM theory of operation 1 3 11 audio theory of operation 1 3 11 theory of operation 1 3 10 user interface block theory of operation 1 3 11 controller expansion board theory of operation 1 3 11 D disassembly reassembly antenna attaching 1 8 7 removing 1 8 7 back chassis assembly removing 1 8 16 battery attaching 1 8 8 removing 1 8 10 control top assembly removing 1 8 20 expansion board assembly removing 1 8 15 housing assembly reassembling 1 8 32 introduction 1 8 1 knobs and top bezel assembly removing 1 8 19 main chassis assembly removing 1 8 20 main housing assembly removing 1 8 16 RF board assembly removing 1 8 17 speaker grill assembly removing 1 8 13 speaker module removing 1 8 14 universal connector cover attaching 1 8 12 removing 1 8 11 vocon board assembly removing 1 8 18 display radio
167. code FLASHport FMR Florida Manual Revision frequency frequency generation unit General Purpose Input Output GPIO hang up home display host code IC IF IMBE inbound signaling word Glossary Definition Code executed by an embedded processor such as the Host or DSP in a subscriber radio This type of code is typically resident in non volatile memory and as such is more difficult to change than code executed from RAM See frequency generation unit A non volatile memory device similar to an EEPROM Flash memory can be erased and reprogrammed in blocks instead of one byte at a time A 13 digit code which uniquely identifies the System Software Package and Software Revenue Options that are enabled in a particular subscriber radio FLASHcodes are only applicable for radios which are upgradeable through the FLASHport process A Motorola term that describes the ability of a radio to change memory Every FLASHport radio contains a FLASHport EEPROM memory chip that can be software written and rewritten to again and again See Florida Manual Revision A publication that provides supplemental information for its parent publication before it is revised and reissued Number of times a complete electromagnetic wave cycle occurs in a fixed unit of time usually one second This unit generates ultra stable low phase noise master clock and other derived synchronization clocks that are distributed throughout the
168. consisting of a Global Positioning System GPS receiver and a Bluetooth BT 2 1 transceiver an encryption processor MACE and a 3 axes digital accelerometer Battery Supply RF Interface POWER amp CLOCKS CONTROLLERS amp MEMORY AUDIO ARM Processor Data Microphone Voltage Regulators Digital Signal Processor Clocks Sources Expansion Board Audio 12 Mhz Flash Memory Main Amplifier Speaker 24 576 Mhz DDR Memory Main Microphone USER INTERFACE Enuvotion Provessor Acc Speaker Top Display Typ Acc Microphone Interface Top Display Data Display Data Display amp KeyPad KeyPad Expansion Board Side Side Connector EXPANSION MEMORY BLUETOOTH GPS Connector L amp ENCRYPTION PROCESSOR Expansion Board Expansion Board Basic Version Full Version Encryption Processor Encryption Processor e MMC NAND Flash 4GB Bluetooth GPS Accelerometer Figure 3 11 Controller Block Diagram Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section Sec 1 3 11 3 4 1 The ARM controller core of the OMAP processor handles the power up sequence of all devices including firmware upgrades and all operating system tasks that are associated with FLASH and SDRAM memories and user interface communication The FLASH mem
169. crete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation In the ASTRO digital mode of operation the transmitted or received signal is limited to a discrete set of frequency deviation levels The receiver handles an ASTRO mode signal identically to an analog mode signal up to the point where the DSP decodes the received data In the ASTRO receive mode the DSP uses a different algorithm to recover data In the ASTRO transmit mode microphone audio is processed identically to an analog mode with the exception of the algorithm the DSP uses to encode the information Using this algorithm transmitter FM deviation is limited to discrete levels Sec 2 3 10 Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section 3 4 Controller Section The controller section See Figure 3 11 comprises of five functional sections that are split among two boards which are the VOCON and EXPANSION boards The main functional section consists of a dual core ARM and DSP controller Flash memory and a Double Data Rate Synchronous Dynamic Random Access M
170. ct has been in storage for a significant period of time 6 months or more between being shipped from the factory and commissioned for service NOTE Reference oscillator alignment is required after replacing or servicing the transceiver board Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 5 This test can be done with either the R 2670 Communication Analyzer or the 8901_ Modulation Analyzer Initial setup using the R 2670 Communication Analyzer RF Control MONITOR B W WB Freq CPS frequency under test Attenuation 20dB Mon RF in RF I O Meter RF Display Mode STD Input Level uV or W Display Bar Graphs Squelch Mid range or adjust as necessary Initial setup using the 8901 Series Modulation Analyzer Press the green Automatic Operation button on the analyzer Press the FREQ key Type 7 1 followed by SPCL button to set the 8901B modulation analyzer for maximum accuracy To align the reference oscillator Select the Reference Oscillator alignment screen See Figure 6 5 to Figure 6 8 APX Family Tuner AA Qe Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As L Read Device Windows Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File G Device m Windows Themes Print e Navigation v A X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 173 975 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 204
171. current levels RLN4460_ Portable Test Set Used for radio performance checks Connects to radio s universal connector and allows remote switching and signal injection outputs for test equipment measurements 4 3 Field Programming This family of radios can be aligned and programmed in the field This requires specific equipment and special instructions Refer to the online help in the Customer Programming Software CPS for complete field programming information Chapter 5 Performance Checks This chapter covers performance checks used to ensure that the ASTRO APX 6000XE radio meets published specifications The recommended test equipment listed in the previous section approaches the accuracy of the manufacturing equipment with a few exceptions Accuracy of the test equipment must be maintained in compliance with the manufacturer s recommended calibration schedule Checks should be performed if radio performance degradation is suspected Supply voltage can be connected from the battery eliminator The equipment required for the performance checks is connected as shown in Figure 5 1 5 1 Test Equipment Setup APX 7 5V UNIVERSAL BATTERY ADAPTER BATTERY 66009254001 IL ELIMINATOR RLN4510_ S SYSTEM ANALYZER gt S
172. customer codeplug configuration However when the unit is on the bench for testing alignment or repair it must be removed from its normal environment using a special routine called RF TEST MODE While in RF test mode Each additional press of Side Button 2 advances to the next test channel Refer to Table 5 5 Pressing Side Button 1 scrolls through and accesses the test environments shown in Table 5 4 Pressing Top Side Button scrolls through the Tx Deviation Frequency NOTE Transmit into a load when keying a radio under test Table 5 6 Test Frequencies MHz VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 MHz EDINA ee TX RX TX RX TX RX TX F1 136 075 136 025 380 075 380 025 450 075 450 025 764 0625 764 0125 F2 142 075 142 125 390 075 390 025 460 075 460 025 769 0625 769 0125 F3 154 275 154 225 400 075 400 025 471 075 471 025 775 9375 775 9875 F4 160 175 160 125 411 075 411 025 484 925 484 975 851 0625 794 0125 F5 168 125 168 075 424 975 424 925 485 075 485 025 860 0625 809 0125 F6 173 925 173 975 435 075 435 025 495 075 495 025 869 9375 823 9875 F7 445 075 445 025 506 075 506 025 851 0625 851 0125 F8 457 075 457 025 519 925 519 975 860 0625 860 0125 F9 469 975 469 925 869 9375 869 8875 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display
173. d Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261003 Label Grille Top APX 5000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUD7120_ Assembly RF Board VHF X X X NNTN7930_ User Guide CD APX 5000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green Note X Item Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicabl
174. d Filter Alignment 6 6 Front End Filter Alignment DM Caution This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service technicians Sec 2 6 19 The alignment procedure adjusts the front end receiver bandpass filters for the best receiver sensitivity and selectivity This procedure should be performed for all test frequencies to allow for proper software interpolation of frequencies between the test frequencies in the band see Figure 6 25 and Figure 6 26 NOTE Rx Front End Filter Alignment is required after replacing or servicing the transceiver board 6 6 1 Procedure for UHF Range 1 and UHF Range 2 Auto Tune Tuning of the radio is done through Rx Front End Filter tuning screen 1 Select the Rx Front End Filter alignment screen See Figure 6 25 and Figure 6 26 2 Click on the slider or the New Softpot Value text box to select which frequency to tune 3 Apply RF test signal input with no modulation at 14 dBm on the Test Signal Frequency displayed at the top of the screen Left click the Autotune button Repeat the steps 2 4 for all frequencies 6 Left click the Program All button on the screen to save the tuned values in the radio f AA dy gt APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Open dy Save dy Save As g Read Device Windows File Tx Device a Navigation Softpot Configuration Mode Help 7 Themes Windows Themes amp y A X Rx Front End Filter E
175. d Type II H FDMA Digital Dual Mode J TDMA Digital Dual Mode K Single Sideband L Global Positioning Satellite Capable M Amplitude Companded Sideband ACSB P Programmable FDMA Frequency Division Multiple Access TDMA Time Division Multiple Access ASTRO APX 5000 VHF Model Chart Sec 1 ix ASTRO APX 5000 VHF Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model H98KGD9PW5_NI Dual Display Limited Keypad H98KGF9PW6 NI Dual Display Full Keypad H98KGH9PW7 NI Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION AZ489FT3824 AZ489FT3929 VHF APX 5000 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION X X X NHN7015 Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pa
176. d and then processed by the DSP and sent to the Trident IC see Figure 3 7 to Figure 3 10 via the SSI interface The Trident IC processes the SSI data for application to the voltage controlled oscillator as a modulation signal TX Buffer Amp Sec 2 3 7 Transmitter Final FET VHF TX Driver Amplifier Loop Filter l IX VCO Module RX VCO t Module RF Switch Matrix TX Buffer Amp Trident IC SP3T RF Switch Harmonic LP Filter Synthesizer N Log Amp Power Detector LEO Digital RF Attenuator A Antenna Connector TO RX Directional Coupler y Reverse Power Detection Ref Oscillator Figure 3 7 Transceiver VHF Block Diagram Transmitter Final FET UHF1 Ki TX Driver Amplifier SP3T RF Switch E A Harmonic LP Filter Loop Filter e TX VCO Module RX TX el VCO Module RF Switch Matrix Il Tridentic WR o Ref Oscillator GPS TO RX Synthesizer A Directional LL Coupler E gt Log Amp Power Detector RMT port Digital RF Attenuator SP2T RF Switch x Antenna Connector Reverse Power Detection Figure 3
177. d to be replaced 1 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 37 and Microphone Mesh 36 from the Speaker Module 2 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning 3 Remove the backer from the Microphone Membrane 4 Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone opening with no ripples or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 Ibs of force 5 Repeat step 4 for the Microphone Mesh 8 8 12 Servicing Speaker Grille Assembly K Speaker Grille Label 39 y bw Speaker Grille 38 Figure 8 42 Speaker Grille Assembly NOTE Grille Label will be damaged during disassembly Sec 1 8 32 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 8 8 12 1 Servicing Grille Label NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the Speaker Grille Label 39 NOTE Grille Label will be damaged during disassembly 1 Remove the Grille Label by using the Black Stick to lift it Be careful not to damage the Speaker Grille Assembly s 38 surface 2 Clean the area once the Grille Label is removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the backer of the new Grille Label and place in the appropriate location using a flat tip tweezer NOTE There are No Other serviceable components on the Speaker Grille Assembly
178. data to determine RX signal type See software potentiometer Computer programs procedures rules documentation and data pertaining to the operation of a system A computer adjustable electronic attenuator Frequency range within which radiation has specific characteristics See Serial Peripheral Interface Muting of audio circuits when received signal levels fall below a pre determined value With carrier squelch all channel activity that exceeds the radio s preset squelch level can be heard See static RAM Smart Radio Interface Box See RIB See Synchronous Serial Interface An operating mode in which the radio is muted but still continues to monitor data A type of memory used for volatile program data memory that does not need to be refreshed Pre defined text messages that allow the user to send a conditional message without talking DSP interface to peripherals that consists of a clock signal line a frame synchronization signal line and a data line Main control unit of the trunked dispatch system handles ISW and OSW messages to and from subscriber units See SW and OSW The act of selecting the desired operating system with the system select switch also the name given to this switch Sec 3 Glossary 10 Term tactical non revert TalkAround talkgroup talkgroup scan list thin small outline package time out timer tone TOT transceiver transmitter trunking trunking priority
179. dditional press of Side Button 2 advances to the next test channel Refer to Table 5 3 Pressing Side Button 1 scrolls through and accesses the test environments shown in Table 5 4 Pressing Top Side Button scrolls through the Tx Deviation Frequency NOTE Transmit into a load when keying a radio under test Table 5 3 Test Frequencies MHz SE VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 MHz hannes px TX RX TX RX TX RX TX F1 136 075 136 025 380 075 380 025 450 075 450 025 764 0625 764 0125 F2 142 075 142 125 390 075 390 025 460 075 460 025 769 0625 769 0125 F3 154 275 154 225 400 075 400 025 471 075 471 025 775 9375 775 9875 F4 160 175 160 125 411 075 411 025 484 925 484 975 851 0625 794 0125 F5 168 125 168 075 424 975 424 925 485 075 485 025 860 0625 809 0125 F6 173 925 173 975 435 075 435 025 495 075 495 025 869 9375 823 9875 F7 445 075 445 025 506 075 506 025 851 0625 851 0125 F8 457 075 457 025 519 925 519 975 860 0625 860 0125 F9 469 975 469 925 869 9375 869 8875 Sec 1 5 6 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Table 5 4 Test Environments Display Description Function CSQ Carrier RX unsquelch if carrier detected Squelch TX mic audio TPL Tone RX unsquelch if carrier and tone 192 8 Hz Private Li
180. dio is transmitting T Ax APX Family Tuner AA 4 Home Option Feature Help Open Ap zoue dySave As Read Device Windows f Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File G Device Windows Themes ll Print Tx Navigation H X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025000 MHz x Tx Frequency MHz 136 025000 123ABC1234 j Radio Information Channel Spacing KHz 25 Transmitter Alignments Test Pattern Type Digital Voice M Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Low M Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 31 Transmitter Test Pattern Screen VHF Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 2 6 25 ws APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help GA Open diySave zoue As Read Device Windows Themes sig Print Ctrl P Print Preview Device Fs Windows Themes m Print fu File E Navigation A X Transmitter Test Pattern Softpot Configuration Mode PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 380 025000 MHz 380 025000 123ABC1234 Radio Information E Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization 25 a Test Pattern Type Digital
181. dio s features and capabilities can be upgraded with FLASHport software Chapter 2 Basic Maintenance 2 1 This chapter describes preventive maintenance and handling precautions Each of these topics provides information vital to the successful operation and maintenance of your radio General Maintenance In order to avoid operating outside the limits set by the FCC we recommend that you align the ASTRO APX 6000XE radio s reference oscillator every time the radio is taken apart or once per year whichever comes first Checking this parameter when the product is placed in service is especially important if the product has been in storage for a significant period of time 6 months or more between being shipped from the factory and commissioned for service See Section 6 5 1 Reference Oscillator Alignment on page 2 6 4 Periodic visual inspection and cleaning is also recommended Radio Submergibility Radio submergibility should be checked annually by qualified service technicians Inspection Check that the external surfaces of the radio are clean and that all external controls and switches are functional A detailed inspection of the interior electronic circuitry is not needed Cleaning The following procedures describe the recommended cleaning agents and the methods to be used when cleaning the external surfaces of the radio External surfaces include the housing assembly and battery case These surfaces should be cleaned whe
182. e Microphone Membrane 6 Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone boss area on the Main Chassis Ensure the membrane is flat with no ripples or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 lbs of force 7 Repeat step 6 for the microphone mesh Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening 8 8 7 2 Servicing Microphone Boot 4 NOTE When servicing microphone boot microphone membrane and microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced 1 Carefully remove the microphone boot out of the Back Chassis opening 2 Pinch the sides of the microphone boot 4 and carefully slide out the microphone cartridge Make sure the flex is not stretched 3 Insert the microphone cartridge into the new microphone boot slot using the black stick Make sure the flex is not stretched Ensure the microphone cartridge is seated properly with the microphone boot Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening 6 Follow Section 8 8 7 1 steps 5 8 to complete assembling and placing the microphone mesh and membrane NOTE There are No serviceable Components on the Back Chassis Assembly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 29 8 8 8 Servicing Main Housing A L Dual Display Versions Medallion 2 FM Label 47 O Medallion 2 gt FM Label 47 O Front Ho
183. e accessories Sec 1 x ASTRO APX 5000 UHF1 Model Chart ASTRO APX 5000 UHF1 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98QDD9PW5 NI H98QDF9PW6 NI H98QDH9PWT7 NI AZ489FT4899 AZ489FT4892 UHF1 APX 5000 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261003 Label Grille Top APX 5000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Boa
184. e driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio UHF2 Transmit Once a UHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal Then the RF signal is routed to the UHF2 Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio 700 800 MHz Transmit Once a 700 800 MHz frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal An RF switch then routes the signal to the 700 800 MHz Driver amplifier and then to the dis
185. e faulty seal areas listed in 8 10 8 Pressure Test using NTN4265_ on page 1 8 42 and when multiple leaks exist in the order listed NOTES AII disassembly and reassembly methods can be found in Section 8 7 and Section 8 9 If in the field water is found around the battery leads the O ring on the Battery should be inspected and replaced if needed 8 10 9 1 Seal Interfaces If leak occurs at one or more of the seal interfaces disassembly of the component s and inspection of the interfaces to determine if there is any damage If no damage is observed re assemble the radio as directed If damage has occurred replacement parts will be needed 8 10 9 2 Speaker Module If leak occurs through the Microphone Membrane 37 or the Speaker Module Seal 35 replace these items If leak occurs elsewhere on the Speaker Module J the module will need to be replaced 8 10 9 3 Battery Contact Seal If leak occurs due to damage to the Battery Connector Seal 13 it will need to be replaced 8 10 9 4 Back Chassis If leak occurs through the Microphone Boot 4 replace it If leak occurs through the Color Display Lens 7 replace it If leak occurs elsewhere on the Back Chassis B N it will need to be replaced 8 10 9 5 Control Top If leak occurs through the antenna or the Control Top Seal 22 replace it If leak occurs elsewhere on the Control Top Assembly F it will need to be replaced Sec 1 8 44 Dis
186. e frequency to Table 6 1 Base Frequencies VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 173 975 MHz 469 925 MHz 519 975 MHz 869 8875 MHz 3 Adjust the reference oscillator s softpot value with the slider until the measured value is as close as possible to the frequency shown on the screen See Table 6 2 NOTE Increases the slider decreases the frequency and vice versa Table 6 2 Reference Oscillator Alignment Band Target VHF 50 Hz UHF1 50 Hz UHF2 50 Hz 700 800 MHz 50 Hz 4 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values 5 Left click the Close button on the screen to return to the Transmitter Alignments menu Sec 2 6 8 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments 6 5 2 Power Characterization Points Tuning of the radio is done through Power Characterization Points tuning screen 1 Select the TX Power Characterization Points alignment screen See Figure 6 9 to Figure 6 12 Set power supply voltage and current limit 3 Adjust softpot value by manipulating the slider bar incrementing the New Softpot Value text box or directly entering the desired value into the New Softpot Value text box until the rated power is indicated on the service monitor For rated power refer to the help text in the Tuner 4 Repeatthe steps 2 and 3 for all frequencies 5 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tun
187. e maintained in compliance with the manufacturer s recommended calibration schedule Checks should be performed if radio performance degradation is suspected Supply voltage can be connected from the battery eliminator The equipment required for the performance checks is connected as shown in Figure 5 1 SMA BNC 5880384G68 RADIO 5 1 Test Equipment Setup APX 7 5V UNIVERSAL BATTERY ADAPTER BATTERY 66009254001 __ ELIMINATOR RLN4510_ NOT USED Figure 5 1 Performance Checks Test Setup SYSTEM ANALYZER gt SOE PAD OR COUNTER TRANSMIT gt 30 dB PAD WATTMETER BNC RF GENERATOR RECEIVE SET TO APPROX 8mV FOR Tx AUDIO IN TX AUDIO GENERATOR Lu TEST SET RLN4460_ RX SINAD METER Fe AC VOLTMETER PROGRAM TEST CABLE PMKN4013_ MEASURE 3 74Vrms FOR Rx Sec 1 5 2 Performance Checks Test Equipment Setup Initial equipment control settings should be as indicated in Table 5 1 and should be the same for all performance checks and alignment procedures except as noted Table 5 1 Initial Equipment Control Settings System Analyzer Test Set Power Supply Monitor Mode Standard Spkr Load Speaker Voltage 7 5 Vdc Receiver Checks PTT OFF center DC On Standby Standby RF Control GEN Outp
188. eable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 6 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 5 and Microphone Mesh 6 from the microphone boot 4 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning Ensure the microphone is seated properly with the microphone boot opening Remove the backer from the Microphone Membrane Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone boss area on the Main Chassis Ensure the membrane is flat with no ripples or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 lbs of force Repeat step 6 for the microphone mesh Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening 8 8 6 2 Servicing Microphone Boot 4 NOTE When servicing microphone boot microphone membrane and microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Carefully remove the microphone boot 4 out of the Back Chassis opening Pinch the sides of the microphone boot and carefully slide out the microphone cartridge Make sure the flex is not stretched Insert the microphone cartridge into the new microphone boot slot using the
189. eas orna nia 1 3 2 3 3 Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation ssssseseeeene ener nennen 1 3 9 3 4 Controller Sectlori ern I eR ra 1 3 10 Chapter 4 Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids 1 4 1 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment sss rennen nennen nne rrmerensn nnne 1 4 1 Sec 1 ii Table of Contents AD SPICE AIGS seas M 1 4 2 4 3 Ee Meel Tu Un e DT 1 4 2 Chapter 5 Performance Checks csse 1 5 1 5 1 Test Equipment Setup tere Rho des D ARR E ipo ue NOR RDRRR RATER HEAR RE idas 1 5 1 5 2 Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 1 5 3 5 3 Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version 1 5 8 5 4 Receiver Performance Checks 2 cccccccecesscccececeseseecerenneececeesesaeeceeenseaaeereensaaaeceensnaaeeeeetnnneee 1 5 12 5 5 Transmitter Performance Checks nennen enne enne nnns 1 5 13 Chapter 6 Radio Alignment Procedures 1 6 1 6 1 Test Setups tte eor A re ait aa rette ette oie um 1 6 1 0 20 Tuner Man MEn s oerte o e e CR 1 6 2 037 SOMO ET 1 6 2 6 4 Radio Informaticas 1 6 4 65 Transmitter Alignments dada os 1 6 4 6 6 Front End Filter Alignment eese tenente eaten nenas then na E annie na Een aenea anni 1 6 19 DC Performance Testirig s idc etes hr aM PR M A a a Pee abe E ER IR BR c ERE 1 6 21 Chapter 7 xa fea foro o 1 7 1 GA Load
190. ease Top Button Orange button all pixels are on Press any key Checker box 1 test appears Press any key Checker box 2 test appears Press any key 4 bolder test test appears on the top display Press any key Test completed appears Sec 1 5 12 5 4 Receiver Performance Checks Performance Checks Receiver Performance Checks The following tables outline the performance checks for the receiver Table 5 7 Receiver Performance Checks Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Reference RF Control Monitor TEST MODE CSQ PTTtocontinuous VHF 0 8 ppm Frequency Meter RF Display channel or during the 227 Hz Display Bar Graphs programmed performance UHF1 0 8 ppm Freq Selected radio TX conventional check 289 Hz freq channel UHF2 0 8 ppm 329 Hz 700 800 MHz 0 8 ppm 709 Hz Rated Audio RF Control Gen As above PTT to OFF Set volume control to Output Level 47 dBm center 3 74 Vrms Freq Selected radio RX Load Selector A freq Mod 1 kHz tone 3 kHz dev Meter AC Volts Distortion As above except As above As above Distortion 3 096 Meter Ext Dist Sensitivity As above except As above As above RF input to be lt 0 35 uV SINAD Meter SINAD Noise Squelch Set as for rated audio Out of TEST As above Set volume control to Threshold check MODE select a 3 74 Vrms only radios conventional Set RF level to 130 dBm with system and raise until radio conventional unsquelc
191. ecane 2 xi ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF1 Model Chart 2 xii ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF2 Model Chart 2xiii ASTRO APX 6000XE 700 800 Model Chart 2 xiv Specifications for APX 6000XE VHF Radios 2 XV Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF 1 Radios 2 xvi Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF2 Radios 2 xvii Specifications for APX 6000XE 7 800 MHz Radios 2 xviii Chapter 1 Introduction E 2 1 1 1 1 ManualiGontents sx iti b o eti nete tetti aa saa 2 1 1 1 2 Notations Used in This Manuel nn n nro nn cnn nnnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnn 2 1 1 EC W E Lee HR ele te ET 2 1 2 dui a E NET 01011 S s aput A EE 2 1 2 Chapter 2 Basic Maintenance ccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeneeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeees 2 2 1 2 4 GeneraliMaintenance ie iiit ada eate e ar pearl 2 2 1 2 2 Handling Precautioris socios tite ped ion Pu e DEE ENEE CERN 2 2 2 Chapter 3 Basic Theory of Operation 2 3 1 3 1 Major Assemblies 22 2 1o ED EH Hem E p bd dum e RE ee aere E oc tad edie 2 3 1 3 2 Analog Mode of Operation cec e ente eaa eda Ea E 2 3 2 3 3 Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation sissien teekenen ranken LEENE nee 2 3 9 3 4 GController Section eR d ERE MERE 2 3 10 Chapter 4 Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids 2 4 1 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment sse nenmmentnsn nnns 2 4 1 4 2 ee EE 2 4 2 4 3 Fek ee eine E 2 4 2 Chapter 5 Performance Checks ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseaeeeeeeeeees 2 5
192. eccaeeeedeeacaseeeeeaecasenedeaceneneeeas 2 6 1 Tuner Software Main Mem 2 6 2 Typical Softpot Screen eei Lei denen td 2 6 3 Radio Information Screen enne nennen nnne nen 2 6 4 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen VHF sse 2 6 5 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen HEI 2 6 6 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen IHF 2 6 6 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 7 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen VHF sess 2 6 8 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen OUIHET 2 6 9 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHF2 ssss 2 6 9 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen 700 800MHZz 2 6 10 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen VE 2 6 11 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF1 ssssesess 2 6 11 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF2 c ooconoccccccnnocicinonanancnnnnnananas 2 6 12 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 12 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen VHET nono 2 6 13 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen HEI 2 6 14 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen HE 2 6 14 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 2 6 15 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen VHE 2 6 17 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen UHET 2 6 17
193. ect Switch 4 0 through 4 15 appears which indicates that the selector switch is in mode zone position 1 through 16 Rotate the Two Position Concentric Switch 65 0 and 65 1 appear Cycle through the Three Position A B C Switch 67 0 67 1 and 67 2 appear Rotate the Volume Control 2 0 through 2 255 appear The display values may vary slightly at the upper and lower limits Press the Top Side Button 96 1 appears release 96 0 appears Press Side Button 1 97 1 appears release 97 0 appears Press Side Button 2 98 1 appears release 98 0 appears Press the PTT Button 1 1 appears release 1 0 appears 5 3 4 CID Test Mode To perform the CID Test ak wr gt Press and release Top Button Orange button all pixels are on Press any key Checker box 1 test appears Press any key Checker box 2 test appears Press any key 4 bolder test test appears on the top display Press any key Test completed appears Sec 2 5 12 5 4 Receiver Performance Checks Performance Checks Receiver Performance Checks The following tables outline the performance checks for the receiver Table 5 7 Receiver Performance Checks Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Reference RF Control Monitor TEST MODE CSQ PTTtocontinuous VHF 0 8 ppm Frequency Meter RF Display channel or during the 227 Hz Di
194. ection typical Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference Rated Audio Internal Speaker External Speaker FM Hum and Noise typical 764 776 MHz 851 870 MHz 12 MHz 19 MHz 0 25uV 0 375 uV 0 24 uV 80 05 dB 75 87 dB 65 58 dB 82 16 dB 0 000086 500 mW 500 mW 25 kHz 54 dB 12 5 kHz 47 92 dB Distortion typical Channel Spacing 1 74 12 5 25 kHz Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 794 806 MHz 800 MHz 806 825 851 870 MHz RF Power 700 MHz 1 2 7 Watts 800 MHz 1 3 0 Watts Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 700 MHz 0 000080 800 MHz 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 2 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 66 dBc ACPR typical Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 This manual contains information needed for Levels One and Two radio servicing Level One servicing consists of radio programming radio alignment knobs replacement and installation and removal of the antenna belt clip battery and universal connector cover Level Two servicing covers disassembly and reassembly of the radio to repl
195. ection typical 80 8 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 9 dB 12 5 kHz 47 6 dB Distortion typical 0 9 Channel Spacing 12 5 kHz 25 kHz Frequency Range 450 520 MHz RF Power 450 520 MHz 5W Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 dB 12 5 kHz 44 dB Distortion typical 196 25 kHz chnis 5 0 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnis 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 65 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Note UHF2 operation within the United States is limited to 12 5 kHz Channel Spacing due to the 2011 FCC narrowband regulations Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 2 22 Specifications for APX 6000XE 7 800 MHz Radios Specifications for APX 6000XE 7 800 MHz Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium Ion Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6
196. ed see Section 8 7 6 on page 2 8 18 Remove RF and VOCON Board screw 45 as shown in Figure 8 26 Gently rotate the VOCON Board Assembly just enough to clear the Main Chassis Slide out the VOCON Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 27 NS Figure 8 27 Remove VOCON Board Assembly Sec 2 8 20 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly 8 7 8 Removal of the Knobs G NOTE Knobs should only be removed when damaged Knob removal is not necessarily to remove the Control Top F Knobs once removed are not reusable To remove the Frequency 56 and Volume Knobs 55 1 Hold the radio firmly in one hand so that the top of the radio faces upward and the front of the radio faces you 2 With a pair of pliers grasp the knob and pull it upward until it is free from its shaft NOTE The knobs is designed to be difficult to remove however they will come off If the metal D Clip stays with the knob post remove the D Clip prior to putting on a new knob Frequency Knob 56 f w CS pa Volume Knob 55 Figure 8 28 Remove Knobs 8 7 9 Removal of the Control Top Assembly F NOTE Knob removal is not necessarily to remove the Control Top F i Use a Torx Plus IP8 bit to remove the two Control Top Screws 57 ii Unscrew the Antenna Spanner Nut 27 with the Antenna Spanner Bit and a driver Remove the Antenna Washer 26 below the nut as shown in Figure 8 29 NOTE Ensure the Co
197. ed embedded signaling intermixes system signaling information with digital voice resulting in improved system reliability and the capability of supporting a multitude of advanced features ASTRO APX 6000XE radios are available in two configurations Top Display and Dual Display Table 1 1 describes their basic features Table 1 1 ASTRO APX 6000XE Basic Features Feature Top Display Dual Display Display LCD monochrome LCD Fully bit mapped Top Display monochrome Top Display Front Display color 1line of text 8 characters per line Fully bitmapped 1line of icons Top Display 1line of text 8 characters per line 1line of icons Front Display Dispatch Mode 5 lines of text 14 characters per line List Feature Mode 6 lines of text 14 characters per line 2lines of icons Keypad None Dual Display Limited Keypad Version 3 x 2 Menu Buttons with 4 way Navigation button Dual Display Full Keypad Version 3 x 4 Alphanumeric Keypad Channel Capability 96 1250 Dialing from Prestored List No Yes Programmable Softkeys No Yes 14 FLASHport The ASTRO APX 6000XE radio utilizes Motorola s FLASHport technology FLASHport makes it possible to add software that drives the radio s capabilities both at the time of purchase and later on Previously changing a radio s features and capabilities meant significant modifications or buying a new radio But now similar to how a computer can be loaded with different software the ra
198. ed menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press fm the PTT button or El EEE or E directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Sec 1 7 4 Encryption Erase an Encryption Key 7 4 2 Use the Keypad To select an index using the keypad 1 Press until the display shows KSet 2 Press CM EI or directly below KSet The display shows the last user selected and stored index 3 Using the keypad enter the number of the desired key NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed 4 Press XM EES or ES directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display 5 Press a the PTT button or El EJ or ED directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu f the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone 7 5 Erase an Encryption Key This section describes two methods for erasing an encryption key 7 5 1 Method 1 Key Zeroization Multikey
199. ed values ws APX Family Tuner 4 Home Option Feature Help F Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Windows f Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview File Device pl Windows Themes pl Print sl Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode Pr ogram All E PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025 E Ee Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 E 123ABC1234 o Radio Information 136 025 3559 Bo m El Transmitter Alignments 3578 Reference Oscillator VU 3578 Tx Power Characterization Points 154 225 3624 3624 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 160 125 3644 3644 Tx Deviation Balance 3669 0 m El Performance Testing 168 075 3669 Guer liz m Lal oe 173 975 3683 3683 _ Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 9 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen VHF Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 9 we APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open Ap zoue zoue As Read Device Windows Themes sii Print Ctri P Print Preview File EI Device Windows Themes m Print D Navigation X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode El 123ABC1234 Radio Information 380 025 3028 a E Transmitter Alignments 3041 Refe
200. eer PAD OR COUNTER TRANSMIT gt 30 dB PAD WATTMETER SMA BNC BNG 588038 468 lt RF GENERATOR RECEIVE SET TO APPROX 8mV FOR Tx RADIO 1 AUDIO IN TX AUDIO GENERATOR TE H TEST SET RLN4460 RX SINAD METER NENNEN AC VOLTMETER PROGRAM TEST CABLE MEASURE 3 74Vrms FOR Rx PMKN4013_ NOT USED Figure 5 1 Performance Checks Test Setup Sec 2 5 2 Performance Checks Test Equipment Setup Initial equipment control settings should be as indicated in Table 5 1 and should be the same for all performance checks and alignment procedures except as noted Table 5 1 Initial Equipment Control Settings System Analyzer Test Set Power Supply Monitor Mode Standard Spkr Load Speaker Voltage 7 5 Vdc Receiver Checks PTT OFF center DC On Standby Standby RF Control GEN Output Level 47 dBm Meter Out RX Volt Range 10 Vdc Modulation 1 kHz tone 3 kHz deviation Frequency Set to selected radio RX frequency Meter AC Volts Opt Sel ON Current 2 5 Amps Transmitter Checks RF Control MONITOR Frequency Set to selected radio TX frequency Meter RF Display Modulation Type FM Attenuation 20 dB Use PROJ 25 STD if testing ASTRO Conventional channels Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 5 2 5 2 1 Sec 2 5 3 Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version This section provides instructions for performing tests in display radio test mode Access the
201. embly Main Housing Top Display Green Note X lItem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 1 xviii ASTRO APX 6000 700 800 Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000 700 800 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad H98UCD9PW5_N H98UCF9PW6 N H98UCH9PW7 N Non BT Models FCC ID AZ489FT5859 BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION AZ489FT5863 700 800 APX 6000 Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7015_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 3200935600
202. embly 1 8 23 servicing radio submersibility 1 8 39 softpot 1 6 2 speaker grill assembly assemble 1 8 38 removing 1 8 13 speaker grille assembly servicing 1 8 31 speaker module assemble 1 8 37 removing 1 8 14 servicing 1 8 31 specifications 7 800 radios 1 xvi 1 xxiv 1 xxx UHF1 radios 1 xv 1 xxii 1 xxix UHF2 radios 1 xxiii VHF radios 1 xiv 1 xxi 1 xxviii standards radio submersibility 1 8 39 submergibility radio disassembly 1 8 40 radio reassembly 1 8 40 submersibility specialized test equipment 1 8 40 Sec 1 Index 4 standards 1 8 39 vacuum test 1 8 40 T test equipment recommended 1 4 1 specialized submersibility 1 8 40 test mode entering dual display version 1 5 3 1 5 8 test setup alignment 1 6 1 performance checks 1 5 1 tests receiver ASTRO conventional channels 1 5 12 performance checks 1 5 12 transmitter ASTRO conventional channels 1 5 14 performance checks 1 5 13 theory of operation analog mode 1 3 2 ASTRO mode 1 3 9 controller 1 3 10 ARM 1 3 11 audio 1 3 11 expansion board 1 3 11 user interface block 1 3 11 major assemblies 1 3 1 overview 1 3 1 thermal pads servicing 1 8 24 transmit deviation balance alignment 1 6 15 transmitter ASTRO conventional channel tests 1 5 14 performance checks 1 5 13 test pattern 1 6 24 troubleshooting 1 9 4 transmitting analog mode 1 3 7 ASTRO mode 1 3 9 troubleshooting encryption problems 1 9 4 introduction 1 9 1 operational error codes 1 9 2 power up error c
203. emory DDR SDRAM The Power and Clocks section includes a power management IC MAKO and various external switching regulators and two clock sources 12 MHz and 24 576 MHz from which all other controller digital clocks are derived The Audio section has a CODEC and a class D audio power amplifier that provides the radio with a multiple microphone single speaker design The User Interface section provides communication and control to the top and main Liquid Crystal Displays LCD on the radio as well as a keypad and a side connector interface conforming to Universal Connector specifications The Mace Expansion Board consists on the main class D audio power amplifier and the Type III secure IC MACE In addition to the Mace features the Mace with Apps Expansion Board consists of an e MMC NAND Flash 4GB a combination integrated circuit consisting of a Global Positioning System GPS receiver and a Bluetooth BT 2 1 transceiver an encryption processor MACE and a 3 axes digital accelerometer Battery Supply RF Interface POWER amp CLOCKS CONTROLLERS amp MEMORY AUDIO ARM Processor Data Microphone Voltage Regulators Digital Signal Processor Clocks Sources Expansion Board Audio 12 Mhz Flash Memory Main Amplifier Speaker 24
204. ency Knob 28 1 Hold the radio in one hand so that the top of the radio faces upward and the front of the radio faces you 2 With the other hand grasp the Frequency Knob and pull it upward until it is free from its shaft B Remove the Volume Knob To remove the Volume Knob 29 1 Hold the radio in one hand so that the top of the radio faces upward and the front of the radio faces you 2 With the other hand grasp the Volume Knob and pull it upward i Remove the Torque Adder 30 with the Black Stick ii Unscrew the Volume Spanner Nut 31 using the Volume Spanner Bit with a driver Remove the Volume Washer 32 below the nut iii Unscrew the Antenna Spanner Nut 27 with the Antenna Spanner Bit and a driver Remove the Antenna Washer 26 below the nut as shown in Figure 8 26 Frequency Knob 28 Antenna Washer 26 Figure 8 26 Remove Knobs and Fastener Hardware iv Gently lift the Control Top Bezel 24 and with the aid of the Black Stick pop the Secure Lever 25 off the Frequency shaft as shown in Figure 8 27 Secure Lever 25 Sec 1 8 20 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 7 9 Removal of the Control Top Assembly F i Use a Torx Plus IP8 bit to remove the two Control Top Screws 44 See Figure 8 28 NOTE Ensure the Control Top flex is disconnected from the VOCON Board D to prevent damage to the flex or connector Control Top Screws 44 C
205. ency Range 700 MHz 764 776 794 806 MHz 800 MHz 806 825 851 870 MHz RF Power 700 MHz 1 2 7 Watts 800 MHz 1 3 0 Watts Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 700 MHz 0 000080 800 MHz 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 2 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 66 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice ASTRO APX 6000 VHF Model Chart Sec 1 xv ASTRO APX 6000 VHF Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad H98KGD9PW5_N H98KGF9PW6 N H98KGH9PW7 N AZ489FT3824 AZ489FT3929 VHF APX 6000 Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad ITEM NUMBER DESCRIPTION X X X NHN7015 Sub Assembly Main Chassis X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7021_ Grille Speaker Black X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5
206. end radio to depot Bad Microphone Sensitivity 1 Check Deviation and Compensation Realign if necessary 2 Microphone Send radio to depot No Low signaling PL DPL MDC 1 Programming Check programming 2 VOCON Board Send radio to depot Cannot Set Deviation Balance RF Board Send radio to depot 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Table 9 5 lists the possible causes of and corrections for encryption problems Table 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Corrective Action No KEYLOAD on Radio Display When Keyloading Cable is Attached to the Radio Side Connector 1 Defective Keyload Cable Send radio to depot 2 Defective Radio Keyloader Displays FAIL 1 Wrong Keyloader Type Use correct keyloader type Refer to Keyloader User Guide for more information 2 Bad Keyloader Try another keyloader 3 Defective Radio Send radio to depot Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists This chapter contains exploded views and associated parts lists for the ASTRO APX 6000XE digital portable radios The following table lists the exploded views for the APX 6000XE radio in different configurations Table 10 1 APX 6000XE Exploded Views and Controller Kit View Page APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 2 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 2 10
207. equency deviation meter and Monitor items marked with an asterisk www aeroflex com signal generator for wide range troubleshooting and alignment Digital RMS 100 uV to 300 V Fluke 179 or equivalent AC DC voltage and current Multimeter 5 Hz to 1 MHz www fluke com measurements Audio voltage 10 Mega Ohm Impedance measurements RF Signal 100 MHz to 1 GHz Agilent N5181A Receiver measurements Generator 130 dBm to 10 dBm FM Modulation 0 kHz to 10 kHz Audio Frequency 100 Hz to 10 kHz www agilent com Ramsey RSG1000B www ramseyelectronics com or equivalent Oscilloscope 2 Channel 50 MHz Bandwidth 5 mV div to 20 V div Leader L 88050 www leaderusa com Tektronix TDS1001b www tektronix com or equivalent Waveform measurements Power Meter and Sensor 596 Accuracy 100 MHz to 500 MHz Bird 43 Thruline Watt Meter www bird electronic com or Transmitter power output measurements 50 Watts equivalent RF Millivolt 100 mV to 3 V RF Boonton 92EA Waveform measurements Meter 10 kHz to 1 GHz www boonton com or equivalent Power Supply 0V to 32 V B amp K Precision 1790 Voltage supply 0Ato20A www bkprecision com or equivalent Sec 1 4 2 4 2 Service Aids Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids Service Aids Refer to Table 4 2 for a listing and description of the service aids designed specifically for servicing this family of radios These kits and or parts are
208. er supply Requires RLN4510_ 66009256001 Volume Potentiometer Outer Used to assemble and disassemble the spanner nut on the Spanner Bit volume potentiometer 66009258001 Antenna Spanner Bit Used to assemble and disassemble the spanner nut on the antenna bushing 66009259001 Vacuum Adapter Submersible radios only Connects the vacuum pressure hose to the radio 66009260002 Board Analysis Fixture Special fixture that allows radio s internal board to be mounted externally Provides easy access to electronic circuits required for board level troubleshooting NLN9839 Vacuum Pump Kit Submersible radios only Vacuum pump with gauge and vacuum hose Requires 66009259001 Adapter Kit NTN4265 Pressure Pump Kit Submersible radios only Pressure pump with gauge and pressure hose Requires 66009259001 Adapter Kit RVN5224 Customer Programming CPS allows customer specific programming of modes and Software CPS and Tuner features Tuner software required to perform alignment of Software radio parameters PMKN4012_ Programming Cable Used to program the radio through Customer Programming Software and Tuner Software PMKN4013_ Programming Service Cable Used to program and service the radio through Customer Programming Software and Tuner Software RLN4510_ 7 5 Volt Universal Battery Used in conjunction with the 66009254001 to adjust the Eliminator supply voltage to 7 5 Vdc Allows a multimeter to be attached for monitoring and adjusting voltage and
209. er Screws 41 Vacuum Port Seal Figure 8 56 Insert Center Screws NOTE Ensure the Vacuum Port Seal is in place and the Vacuum Port Seal screw shaft is aligned with the screw hole 2 Insert the two center screws 41 and torque to 10 in Ibs See Figure 8 56 Sec 2 8 40 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility 3 If removed insert the two bottom screws 43 into the screw holes at the bottom of the radio as shown in Figure 8 57 and torque to 10 in lbs Bottom Screws 43 Figure 8 57 Insert Bottom Screws NOTE Refer to the appropriate section in this manual for reinstalling the antenna battery or any other accessory that was previously connected or attached to the radio prior to servicing 8 10 Ensuring Radio Submergibility This section discusses radio submergibility concerns tests and disassembly and reassembly of ASTRO APX 6000XE radios 8 10 1 Standards ASTRO APX 6000XE radio models meet the stringent requirements of U S MIL STD 810C Method 512 1 Procedure MIL STD 810D Method 512 2 Procedure I MIL STD 810E Method 512 3 Procedure l and MIL STD 810F Method 512 4 Procedure I which require the radio to maintain watertight integrity when immersed in six 6 feet of water for two hours 8 10 2 Servicing APX 6000XE radios shipped from the Motorola factory have passed vacuum testing and should not be disassembled If disassembly is necessary refer to qualified service personne
210. er the last display RF TEST is displayed Press the Top Side Button Purple button to advance the test environments from RF TEST CH TEST CID TEST then press the Top Button Orange button to confirm selection Press any other buttons to advance the test Once a test is carried out restart the radio to proceed to another test Sec 1 5 10 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version 5 3 2 3 Do one of the following Press the Top Side Button to stop the displays and toggle between RF test mode and the Control Top test mode The test mode menu CH TEST is displayed indicating that you have selected the Control Top test mode Go to Section 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode on page 1 5 6 NOTE Each press of the Top Side Button Purple button scrolls through RF TEST CH TEST and CID TEST Press the Top Button Orange button to stop the displays and put the radio into the RF test mode The test mode menu 1 CSQ is displayed indicating test frequency 1 Carrier SQuelch mode Go to Section 5 3 2 RF Test Mode below NOTE Once your radio is in a particular test mode you must turn off the radio and turn it back on again to access the other test mode RF Test Mode When the ASTRO APX 6000 radio is operating in its normal environment the radio s microcomputer controls the RF channel selection transmitter key up and receiver muting according to the
211. ersatiion Call private line tone squelch programmable Programmable Read Only Memory PROM PTT Push to Talk radio frequency radio frequency power amplifier Radio Interface Box Radio Service Software random access memory RAM read only memory real time clock Sec 3 Glossary 7 Definition A set of unique features specific to a radio A circuit in which an oscillator is kept in phase with a reference usually after passing through a frequency divider See private line tone squelch See phase locked loop A software feature that has been activated by a qualified radio technician A feature that lets you have a private conversation with another radio user in the group A continuous sub audible tone that is transmitted along with the carrier See also DPL A radio control that can have a radio feature assigned to it A memory chip on which data can be written only once Once data has been written onto a PROM it remains there forever See Programmable Read Only Memory See Push to Talk The switch or button usually located on the left side of the radio which when pressed causes the radio to transmit When the PTT is released the unit returns to receive operation The portion of the electromagnetic spectrum between audio sound and infrared light approximately 10 kHz to 10 GHz Amplifier having one or more active devices to amplify radio signals A service aid used to enable communicatio
212. ery Connector Seal Sec 2 8 44 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Main Chassis including the Control Top Back Chassis 8 Remove the radio from the water container and dry the radio thoroughly Be especially careful to dry the area around the Vacuum Port and the battery contacts area dr To avoid equipment damage keep the area inside the Battery contact pocket is dry before assembling battery Caution 9 With the Radio in an upright position and Control Top up remove the vacuum adapter by squeezing the release latches and pulling the adapter down and away from the radio 10 Re Seat Vacuum Port Door 11 See 8 10 9 Troubleshooting Leak Areas on page 2 8 44 8 10 9 Troubleshooting Leak Areas Before repairing any leak first read all of the steps within the applicable section This will help to eliminate unnecessary disassembly and reassembly of a radio with multiple leaks Troubleshoot only the faulty seal areas listed in 8 10 8 Pressure Test using NTN4265_ on page 2 8 43 and when multiple leaks exist in the order listed NOTES AII disassembly and reassembly methods can be found in Section 8 7 and Section 8 9 If in the field water is found around the battery leads the O ring on the Battery should be inspected and replaced if needed 8 10 9 1 Seal Interfaces f leak occurs at one or more of the seal interfaces disassembly of the component s and inspection o
213. es Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium Ion Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vde Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 2060 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 273 mA Standby Current Drain 142 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 MHz 800 MHz 851 870 MHz Bandwidth 700 MHz 12 MHz 800 MHz 19 MH
214. ess Side Button 2 98 1 appears release 98 0 appears Press the PTT Button 1 1 appears release 1 0 appears Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 5 2 3 2 Keypad Checks for Model III only To continue to the keypad checks Press ES 48 1 appears release 48 0 appears Press UN 49 1 appears release 49 0 appears Press EA 50 1 appears release 50 0 appears Press EK 51 1 appears release 51 0 appears Press 8 52 1 appears release 52 0 appears Press Kal 53 1 appears release 53 0 appears Press E 54 1 appears release 54 0 appears Press 4 55 1 appears release 55 0 appears Press EA 56 1 appears release 56 0 appears Press 57 1 appears release 57 0 appears Press i 58 1 appears release 58 0 appears Press B 59 1 appears release 59 0 appears Press 4 128 1 appears release 128 0 appears Press 129 1 appears release 129 0 appears Press 5 130 1 appears release 130 0 appears Press ll 1131 1 appears release 131 0 appears Press E 132 1 appears release 132 0 appears Press BB 133 1 appears release 133 0 appears Press amp 134 1 appears release 134 0 appears Press a 135 1 appears release 135 0 appea
215. est completed appears Sec 2 5 7 Sec 2 5 8 5 2 5 5 3 5 3 1 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version CID Test Mode To perform the CID Test 1 Press and release Top Button Orange button all pixels are on 2 Press any key Checker box 1 test appears 3 Press any key Checker box 2 test appears 4 Press any key 4 bolder test test appears on the top display 5 Press any key Test completed appears Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version This section provides instructions for performing tests in non display radio test mode Access the Test Mode To enter the display radio test mode 1 Turn the radio on 2 Within 10 seconds after SELF TEST is complete press Side Button 2 five times in Succession The radio shows a series of displays that give information regarding various version numbers and subscriber specific information The displays are described in Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Test Mode Displays Name of Display Description Appears Service The literal string indicates the radio has Always entered test mode Host version The version of host firmware is displayed Always DSP version The version of DSP firmware is displayed Always Secure version Version of the encryption software When the radio is secure equipped KGI algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 1 equipped KG2 algorithms name Type of
216. f the interfaces to determine if there is any damage If no damage is observed re assemble the radio as directed If damage has occurred replacement parts will be needed 8 10 9 2 Speaker Module f leak occurs through the Microphone Membrane 5 or the Speaker Module Seal 35 replace these items f leak occurs elsewhere on the Speaker Module J the module will need to be replaced 8 10 9 3 Battery Contact Seal f leak occurs due to damage to the Battery Connector Seal 13 it will need to be replaced 8 10 9 4 Back Chassis If leak occurs through the Microphone Boot 4 replace it f leak occurs through the Color Display Lens 7 replace it f leak occurs elsewhere on the Back Chassis B N it will need to be replaced 8 10 9 5 Control Top If leak occurs through the antenna or the Control Top Seal 22 replace it f leak occurs elsewhere on the Control Top Assembly F it will need to be replaced Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 2 8 45 8 10 9 6 Main Chassis If leak occurs through the Main Seal 54 it will need to be replaced If leak occurs elsewhere on the Main Chassis 15 it will need to be replaced Sec 2 8 46 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Notes Chapter 9 Basic Troubleshooting This section of the manual contains troubleshooting charts and error codes that will help you to isolate a problem Level one and tw
217. followed by an LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and tunable designs and are used to band limit the incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as Image spur The output of the second pre selector filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 700 800 Front End From the RX TX select switch the signal is routed to an RF switch which selects the 700 or 800 Mhz band signal and routes it through a filter an LNA another filter and another LNA All filters are Surface Acoustic Wave SAW designs used to band limit the received energy and suppress known spurious responses The output of the second filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz Intermediate Frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and an amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 Analog To Digital Converter The ADC IC s front end down converts the first IF to a second IF a 2 25 MHz signal The second IF is sampled at 18 M
218. from the connector go through the internal expansion board before reaching the microcontroller and other devices on the main board Radio with Mace with Apps Expansion Board In addition to the Mace Expansion Board features the Mace with Apps Expansion Board consists of an e MMC 4GB NAND Flash a 3 axes digital accelerometer and an integrated circuit consisting of a Global Positioning System GPS and Bluetooth 2 1 transceiver The 4GB external NAND Flash communicates to the OMAP processor on the VOCON board through the Multi Media Card MMC interface The GPS receiver section of the GPS BT combination IC interfaces with the OMAP processor though a dedicated UART port The GPS receiver also has a dedicated reset controlled solely by the OMAP processor The radio also has the ability to connect to a wireless Bluetooth audio headset This feature is implemented using a combination Bluetooth GPS integrated circuit IC located on the expansion board An optional accessory headset can connect using a low data rate GFSK modulated signal hopping on 79 x 1 MHz wide Bluetooth channels from 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz in the ISM band Each APX accessory that is capable of Bluetooth communication will have its own unique Bluetooth address Bluetooth uses a frequency hopping spread spectrum FHSS technique to spread the RF power across the spectrum to reduce the interference and spectral power density The frequency hopping allows the channel to change up to 1600 time
219. ge 2 5 6 Table 5 10 Transmitter Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels APX 6000XE Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments RF Power Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to continuous VHF 1 6 Watts RF Control Monitor Software not used during UHF1 1 5 Watt Meter RF Display Radio Out of measurement UHF2 1 5 Watt TEST MODE 700 1 2 7 Watt Select a 800 1 3 Watt conventional ASTRO channel Frequency As above As above As above Error lt 1 0 kHz Error Frequency As above Radio Tuner PTT to OFF Den Deviation Software center gt 2 543 kHz but Transmitter Test lt 3 110 kHz Pattern screen is Diow required 2 0 841 kHz but High use Symbol lt 1 037 kHz Rate PAT Use test setup shown in Low use Low Symbol Rate P Figure 6 1 on page 2 6 1 These tests require a communications system analyzer with the ASTRO 25 test options Chapter 6 Radio Alignment Procedures This chapter describes both receiver and transmitter radio alignment procedures 6 1 Test Setup A personal computer PC and tuner software are required to align the radio Refer to the applicable manual for installation and setup procedures for the software To perform the alignment procedures the radio must be connected to the PC and to a universal test set The radio alignment test setup is shown in Figure 6 1 APX 7 5V UNIVERSAL BATTERY ADAPTER BATTERY 66009254001 IL ELIMINATOR RLN451
220. ghted MOTOROLA software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such Motorola software MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced copied distributed modified in any way or used to produce any derivative thereof No other use including without limitation alteration modification reproduction distribution or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise of rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted No license is granted by implication estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights VII Governing Law This Warranty is governed by the laws of the State of Illinois USA viii Commercial Warranty Notes ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li APX 6000XE Digital Portable Radios Section 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Notes Table of Contents Sec 1 i Table of Contents Model Numbering Charts and Specifications 1 x Portable Radio Model Numbering System sss eene nennen nnne nennen nennen rein 1 x ASTRO APX 5000 VHF Model Ghl rt tete etched e eo i adig chine eo Ra ees 1 xi ASTRO APX 5000 UHF1 Model Chart 1 xii ASTRO APX 5000 700 800 Model Chart 1 xiii Specifications for APX 5000 VHF Radios 1 xiv Specifications for APX 5000 UHF1 Radios sss aaa aa aa aaa aaa e eaaa 1 xv S
221. gure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 B Back Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Dual Display Exploded View on page 2 10 2 C RF Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 D VOCON Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 E Main Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 F Control Top Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 G Knobs Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 H Expansion Board Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 J Speaker Module Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 K Speaker Grille Assembly Refer Figure 10 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 2 L Main Housing Assembly Refer Figure 10 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Dual Display Limited Keypad Keypad Exploded View on page 2 10 4 M Main Housing Assembly Refer Figure 10 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View Top Display on page 2 10 5 N Back Chassis Assembly Refer Figure 10 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Exploded View Top Display o
222. he RF Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 19 SR AN Figure 8 19 Remove Antenna Coax Cable Connector 5 Flip the radio over Sec 1 8 16 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly 8 7 4 Removal of the Main Housing Assembly AL Mi 1 Gently stretch both sides of the Main Housing Assembly 1 outwards to clear the radio Then lift it over the radio as shown in Figure 8 20 NOTE For Top Display version ensure the Belt Clip Cover 53 has been removed Stretch Outwards NO F 6 A Figure 8 20 Remove Housing 8 7 5 Removal of the Back Chassis Assembly B N 1 Dual Display versions Gently separate the Back Chassis Assembly B from the Main Chassis Assembly E to allow access to disconnect the two flex connections between both chassis These connectors are located near the top of the radio Use the Black Stick to disconnect the connectors as shown in Figure 8 21 Top Display version Back Chassis Assembly N has no connections and can be removed by just separating the the two chassis apart A N Pull the flex connectors vertically upwards by using black stick Disconnect at two connector locations shown in Figure 8 21 Caution Connectors Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 1 8 17 8 7 6 Removal of the RF Board Assembly C NOTE Reconfirm the coax cable connector on the bottom side of the RF Board is disconnected before removing the RF Board 1 Remove the RF
223. he RF board Assembly C and slide the plug in using the Black Stick Ensure the universal connector flex is not caught under the antenna coax cable Tuck in the Antenna Coax Cable into its grooves as shown in Figure 8 49 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 2 8 37 5 Plug the Expansion Board Assembly H to the VOCON Board Assembly D as shown in Figure 8 50 Make sure the connector is fully engaged 6 Connect the two Flex Connectors to their pairing connectors on the right and left sides of the Expansion Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 50 Expansion Board Assembly 33 Control Top Support Pads Flex Connectors Figure 8 50 Insert Flex Connectors 7 Insert the rounded portion of the Expanded Board Support 61 into the opening of the vacuum test compartment on the expanded side as shown in as shown in Figure 8 52 Locking Feature Portion Rounded Portion Figure 8 51 Expander Board Support 61 Capacitor to avoid Rounded portion of On Expander Board Support Figure 8 52 Insert Expander Board Support 8 Ensure the Rounded portion of the Expander Board Support is secure properly before rotating the Expander Board Support towards the Antenna Coax Connector 9 Slide the Locking Feature of the Expander Board Support between the Antenna Coax connector and the Chassis Wall Sec 2 8 38 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reasse
224. he highlighted Measure Left click the box under Measure Power 2 box for the same frequency field The selected Measure the transmit power of the radio with a service monitor Input the transmit power in watts using two decimal places into the highlighted Measure 1 2 is highlighted 3 5 Power 1 box 6 box is highlighted Power 2 box 9 Repeat steps 2 to 8 for all frequencies 10 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 11 Figure 6 14 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF1 Sec 1 6 12 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments ws APX Family Tuner MA Open Ar zoue zoue As Read Device Windows Z Themes aig Print Ctd P Print Preview Home Option Feature Help File Tu Device G amp Windows Themes Print fa Navigation H X Tx Power Characterization Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency MHz Measured Power 1 Measured Power 2 El 123ABC1234 a sos En E Transmitter Alignments E oa Geli 460 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 29 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 1 60 5 28 Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Align
225. he pad is mating with the top surface of the amplifiers Insert the Inner Thermal Pad 11 without compressing or deforming it dr Thermal pads should always be replaced when RF Board assembly is removed Caution Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 25 8 8 4 3 Back up Battery 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 7 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 2 Remove the battery with the Black Stick NOTE Make sure the positive side is facing upwards 3 Press the new battery into the battery carrier until it is secured and fully snapped into place NOTE There are no serviceable components on the RF Board Assembly 8 8 5 Servicing of Expansion Board Assembly 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 3 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Expansion Board Assembly H Figure 8 35 Expansion Board Assembly NOTE There are no serviceable components on the Expansion Board Assembly 8 8 6 Servicing Back Chassis Assembly B Dual Display Versions 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 5 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Mic Boot 4 Mic Membrane 5 p E Uu Mic Mesh 6 Lens 7 d Color Display 8 44 Back Chassis Assembly 3 Figure 8 36 Back Chassis Assembly Dual Display Versions NOTE Take care not to damage the Color Display during disassembly Sec 2 8 26 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Servic
226. hemes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File e Device m Windows Themes Print ei Navigation H X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode Program SI PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 869 8875 Frequency Softpot Value 869 8875 New Softpot Value 0 2047 E 123ABC1234 Radio Information Lal E Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate 1149 1149 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 8 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 1 Make sure the Communication Analyzer is in Manual mode 2 Setthe base frequency to Table 6 1 Base Frequencies VHF UHF1 UHF2 700 800 173 975 MHz 469 925 MHz 519 975 MHz 869 8875 MHz 3 Adjust the reference oscillator s softpot value with the slider until the measured value is as close as possible to the frequency shown on the screen See Table 6 2 NOTE Increases the slider decreases the frequency and vice versa Table 6 2 Reference Oscillator Alignment Band Target VHF 50 Hz UHF1 50 Hz UHF2 50 Hz 700 800 MHz 50 Hz 4 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values 5 Left click the Close button on the screen to return to the Transmitter Alignments menu Sec 1 6 8 Radio A
227. hes system need to be tested Unsquelch to occur at lt 0 25 uV Preferred SINAD 6 8 dB See Table 5 4 on page 1 5 6 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Bit Error rate Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to OFF BER 0 01 BER Floor RF Control Gen Software Bit Error center Use test setup shown in Output Level 47 dBm Rate screen is Figure 6 1 on page 1 6 1 Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz required Code 1011 Hz PAT Reference As above lower the As above As above Output level 0 35 uV Sensitivity output level until 5 BER 116 dBm is obtained Use test setup shown in Figure 6 1 on page 1 6 1 Performance Checks Transmitter Performance Checks Sec 1 5 13 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels Continued Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Audio Output Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to OFF Distortion lt 3 0 Distortion RF Control Gen Software not used center Output Level 47 dBm Radio Out of Meter selector to Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz TEST MODE Audio PA Code 1011 Hz PAT Select a Spkr Load to Meter Ext Distortion conventional Speaker ASTRO channel Residual Mode Proj 25 Std As above As above Residual Audio Noise Ratio Audio Noise RF Control Gen 45 dB Ratio Output Level 47 dBm Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz Code A 1011 Hz P
228. ically Safe FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 5 dB Dimensions H x W x D 12 5 kHz 47 4 dB Without Battery Radio Only H 6 15 156 3 mm Distortion typical 0 91 96 W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 4 35 5 mm Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz With Slim Li lon Battery H 6 41 162 8 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 5 5 mm With NiMH Battery H 8 41 213 6 mm W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 35 5 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery 13 7 oz 389 g With Li lon Slim 18 7 oz 530 g With Li lon Ultra High Cap 24 1 oz 683 g With NiMH 25 3 oz 717 g Specifications subject to change without notice Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF2 Radios Specifications for APX 6000XE UHF2 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted Sec 2 21 NOTE UHF2 operation within the United Stated is limited to 12 5 kHz Channel Spacing due to the 2011 FCC narrowband regulations GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6
229. ies resonant network which provides a very low capacitive load to the transceiver The signal is routed though a GPS LNA and it s output is applied to the RF Controller interface connector where it is eventually routed to the expansion board for processing by the GPS Bluetooth IC The GPS receiver is setup in an autonomous one track always OTA mode also known as continuous navigation This means the GPS will continuously track satellites for as long as the radio is powered to ensure the best possible accuracy In the event the radio loses visibility of the satellites due to terrain or environmental factors such as driving through a tunnel or entering a building the GPS will temporarily lose its position fix A power savings algorithm will then cycle the GPS in and out of a sleep mode at approximately 90 second intervals until the radio has moved back into an environment where GPS signals are present The user will be able to view the current latitude longitude and time date stamp on the radio s display The radio can also be configured to send its location to the system at predetermined intervals LRRP Depending on system options the user may be able to enable disable the GPS receiver Antenna GPS Receiver Circuit ss PS OMAP gt gt GPS IC W gt Processor Figure 3 6 GPS Diagram VHF Front End From the RX TX select switch the VHF signal is routed to
230. iew 1 10 5 Sec 1 viii Portable Radio Model Numbering System Model Numbering Charts and Specifications Portable Radio Model Numbering System Typical Model Number H 9 8 K G D Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 T L A A A Position 1 Type of Unit A H Hand Held Portable Positions 2 amp 3 Model Series 98 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Position 4 Frequency Band A Less than 29 7MHz P 336 to 410MHz B 29 7 to 35 99MHz Q 380 to 470MHz C 36 to 41 99MHz R 438 to 482MHz D 42 to 50MHz S 470 to 520MHz F 66 to 80MHz T Dual Band Capable G 74 to 90MHz U 764 to 870MHz H Product Specific V 825 to 870MHz J 136 to 162MHz W 896 to 941MHz K 146 to 178MHz Y 1 0 to 1 6GHz L 174 to 210MHz Z 1 5 to 2 0GHz M 190 to 235MHz Values given represent range only they are not absolute Position 5 Power Level A 0 to 0 7 Watts B 0 7 to 0 9 Watts C 1 0 to 3 9 Watts D 4 0 to 5 0 Watts E 5 1 to 6 0 Watts F 6 1 to 10 Watts G 0 to 6 Watts Position 6 Physical Packages A RF Modem Operation B Receiver Only C Standard Control No Display D Standard Control With Display E Limited Keypad No Display F Limited Keypad With Display G Full Keypad No Display H Full Keypad With Display J Limited Controls No Display K Limited Controls Basic Display L Limited Controls Limited Display M Rotary Controls Standard Display N E
231. igation A X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode Program All j PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 El 123ABC1234 m Radio Information 136 025 2922 2922 y EA El Transmitter Alignments S Referee Ond WERT ER po Lal Tx Power Characterization Points 154 225 3070 3070 Tx Power Characterization 160 125 3049 3049 _ Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing 168 075 3085 3085 LJ EA idu 173 975 3116 326 Lei l Figure 6 17 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen VHF Sec 2 6 14 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Home Option Feature Help 51 Open diySave diySave As Read Device amp Windows Themes Device sl Windows Themes amp APX Family Tuner sip Print Ctri P Print Preview File E Print G Navigation A X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode TRANSMITTER OFF 380 025 x New Softpot Value 0 4095 E 123ABC1234 Radio Information mua pa A El Transmitter Alignments n el amie 390 025 3140 A Tx Power Characterization Points 400 025 3152 1 Tx Power Characterization 411 025 3155 Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments 424 925 3143 le Rx Front End Filter m mi crib 435 025 3127 la Bit
232. iii Pump at least 15 inHg iv Watch the gauge for a minute If there is any loss of vacuum repair or replace the tool 3 Ensure that the seal is attached to the Vacuum Adapter 8 10 7 2 Test Procedure Figure 8 55 Attaching Vacuum Adapter 1 Attach the Vacuum Adapter onto the radio in the same manner as a radio battery Ensure both latches are clicked into place 2 Pull the knob on the Vacuum Pump to create vacuum The vacuum test pressure should be between 5 7 inHg The radio has pressure sensitive components that can be damaged if the pressure exceeds this limit d Ensure that the vacuum pressure NEVER exceeds 7 inHg Caution 3 Observe the gauge for approximately 2 minutes Ifthe needle falls less than 2 inHg the radio passes the vacuum test i Ifthe seal passes this inspection this radio is approved for submergibility No additional testing is required Ifthe needle falls more than 2 inHg the radio fails the vacuum test and the radio might leak if submerged Additional troubleshooting of the radio is required i Keep the Vacuum Adapter on but remove the Vacuum Pump from the Vacuum Adapter ii Continue with Pressure Test as described in Section 8 10 8 Sec 1 8 42 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility 8 10 8 Pressure Test using NTN4265 Pressure testing the radio is necessary only if the radio has failed the vacuum test Do not perform the pressure test until
233. interface block 2 3 11 major assemblies 2 3 1 overview 2 3 1 thermal pads servicing 2 8 24 transmit deviation balance alignment 2 6 16 transmitter ASTRO conventional channel tests 2 5 14 performance checks 2 5 13 test pattern 2 6 24 troubleshooting 2 9 4 transmitting analog mode 2 3 7 ASTRO mode 2 3 9 troubleshooting encryption problems 2 9 4 introduction 2 9 1 operational error codes 2 9 2 power up error codes 2 9 1 receiver problem chart 2 9 3 transmitter problem chart 2 9 4 tuner Index bit error rate test 2 6 21 introduction 2 6 1 main menu 2 6 2 performance test 2 6 21 radio information screen 2 6 4 reference oscillator alignment 2 6 4 test setup 2 6 1 transmit deviation balance alignment 2 6 16 transmitter alignment 2 6 4 transmitter test pattern 2 6 24 U UHF1 model chart 2 xii radio specifications 2 xvi UHF2 model chart 2 xiii radio specifications 2 xvii universal connector cover attaching 2 8 12 removing 2 8 11 universal connector insert servicing 2 8 21 user interface block theory of operation 2 3 11 V vacuum test submersibility 2 8 41 VHF model chart 2 xi radio specifications 2 xv view exploded complete top display version 2 10 5 complete dual display version 2 10 2 2 10 4 partial 2 8 2 2 8 3 2 8 4 vocon board assembly assemble 2 8 33 removing 2 8 19 servicing 2 8 23 Ww warning caution and danger notations 2 1 1 ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li APX 6000XE Digital
234. io Submergibility This section discusses radio submergibility concerns tests and disassembly and reassembly of ASTRO APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radios Standards ASTRO APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radio models meet the stringent requirements of U S MIL STD 810C Method 512 1 Procedure l MIL STD 810D Method 512 2 Procedure l MIL STD 810E Method 512 3 Procedure and MIL STD 810F Method 512 4 Procedure I which require the radio to maintain watertight integrity when immersed in six 6 feet of water for two hours Servicing APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radios shipped from the Motorola factory have passed vacuum testing and should not be disassembled If disassembly is necessary refer to qualified service personnel and service shops capable of restoring the watertight integrity of the radio qualified service personnel and service shops This is of paramount importance as irreparable damage to the radio can result from service by Caution unauthorized persons If disassembly is necessary unauthorized attempts to repair the radio may void any existing warranties or extended performance agreements with Motorola It is also recommended that submergibility be checked annually by qualified service personnel 1 It is strongly recommended that maintenance of the radio be deferred to Water Exposure If the radio is exposed to water shake the radio to remove the excess water from the speaker grille and microphone ports areas before opera
235. io frequency See radio frequency power amplifier See Radio Interface Box See read only memory Regulator power control IC See repeater talkaround See Radio Service Software Received Signal Strength Indicator See real time clock Receive Recovered digital data line See Serial Audio CODEC Port Serial Communications Interface Input line A feature that allows you to call a selected individual intended to provide privacy and to eliminate the annoyance of having to listen to conversations of no interest to you Any digital P25 traffic having the correct Network Access Code and the correct talkgroup SSI to and from the GCAP II IC CODEC used to transfer transmit and receive audio data Glossary Term Serial Communication Interface Input Line SCI IN Serial Peripheral Interface signal Signal Qualifier mode softpot software software potentiometer spectrum SPI squelch SRAM SRIB SSI Standby mode static RAM status calls Synchronous Serial Interface system central controllers system select Sec 3 Glossary 9 Definition A full duplex receiver transmitter asynchronous serial interface See Serial Communication Interface Input Line How the microcontroller communicates to modules and ICs through the CLOCK and DATA lines An electrically transmitted electromagnetic wave An operating mode in which the radio is muted but still continues to analyze receive
236. is In addition a different key can be strapped to other features for example dynamic regrouping failsoft or emergency talkgroup The radio can have operator selectable key erasure Select an Encryption Key You can select an encryption key using either the menu or the keypad Use the Menu To select an encryption key using the menu 1 2 Press until the display shows Key Press Ml Ell or ED directly below Key The display shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press RN Ell or directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press fm the PTT button or EN EM or E directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Encryption Select an Encryption Index Sec 1 7 3 7 3 2 Use the Keypad To select an encryption key using the keypad 7 4 7 4 1 1 2 Press until the display shows Key Press Ml ES or EB directly below Key The display shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Using the keypad enter the n
237. is feature is implemented using a combination Bluetooth GPS integrated circuit IC located on the expansion board An optional accessory headset can connect using a low data rate GFSK modulated signal hopping on 79 x 1 MHz wide Bluetooth channels from 2402 MHz to 2480 MHz in the ISM band Each APX accessory that is capable of Bluetooth communication will have its own unique Bluetooth address Bluetooth uses a frequency hopping spread spectrum FHSS technique to spread the RF power across the spectrum to reduce the interference and spectral power density The frequency hopping allows the channel to change up to 1600 times a second 625 us time slot based on a pseudo random sequence If a packet is not received on one channel the packet will be retransmitted on another channel The Bluetooth IC sends data to the AVR32 processor that is also located on the expansion board over an HCI UART link The AVR32 processor communicates to the OMAP processor on the VoCon board through a dedicated USB port Sec 1 3 12 Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section The Bluetooth feature is accompanied by a Low Frequency LF detection circuit that is also located on the expansion board The LF circuit provides the ability of a secure pairing connection with a Bluetooth accessory Once a radio has the Bluetooth feature enabled a user can tap their LF enabled Bluetooth audio accessory with the radio at the pairing spot to establish a secure Bluetooth connection The
238. is pressed to listen to another user who is active on a channel This prevents one user from interfering with another user s conversation See Master Out Slave In An electronic device that combines several signals for transmission on some shared medium e g a telephone wire See multiplexer Network Access Code NAC operates on digital channels to reduce voice channel interference between adjacent systems and sites Nickel cadmium Nickel metal hydride The user will talk on a preprogrammed emergency channel The emergency alarm is sent out on this same channel See over molded pad array carrier A controller configuration that utilizes a microprocessor with extended ROM RAM and EEPROM An electronic device that produces alternating electric current and commonly employs tuned circuits and amplifying components See outbound signaling word See over the air rekeying Data transmitted on the control channel from the central controller to the subscriber unit A Motorola custom IC package distinguished by the presence of solder balls on the bottom pads Allows the dispatcher to remotely reprogram the encryption keys in the radio Power amplifier A one way alert with audio and or display messages One way communication that alerts the receiver to retrieve a message Printed Circuit Board Also referred to as a PCB Glossary Term personality phase locked loop PL PLL preprogrammed Private Conv
239. is routed to the first pre selector filter followed by an LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and tunable designs and are used to band limit the incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as Image spur The output of the second pre selector filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 Sec 2 3 6 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation 3 2 1 4 3 2 1 5 3 2 1 6 UHF2 Front End From the RX TX select switch a UHF2 signal is routed to the first pre selector filter followed by an LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and tunable designs and are used to band limit the incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as Image spur The output of the second pre selector filter is applied to the RF port of the Mixer IC The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 700 800 Front End
240. ists This chapter contains exploded views and associated parts lists for the ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li digital portable radios The following table lists the exploded views for the radio in different configurations Table 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Exploded Views and Controller Kit View Page APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 1 10 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 1 10 4 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View 1 10 5 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Controller Kit Numbers 1 10 6 Sec 1 10 2 Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View NOTE Kit NHN7015_ includes Items 15 21 22 24 32 and 43 When purchasing this kit need to purchase item 23 qty 2 together Figure 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Exploded Views and Parts Lists APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List 10 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List 151 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 NHN7013_
241. it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning Sec 1 8 28 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Ensure the microphone is seated properly with the microphone boot opening Remove the backer from the Microphone Membrane Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone boss area on the Main Chassis Ensure the membrane is flat with no ripples or folds Press down firmly applying 2 3 Ibs of force Repeat step 6 for the microphone mesh Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening 8 8 8 2 Servicing Microphone Boot 4 NOTE When servicing microphone boot microphone membrane and microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Carefully remove the microphone boot out of the Back Chassis opening Pinch the sides of the microphone boot 4 and carefully slide out the microphone cartridge Make sure the flex is not stretched Insert the microphone cartridge into the new microphone boot slot using the black stick Make sure the flex is not stretched Ensure the microphone cartridge is seated properly with the microphone boot Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening Follow Section 8 8 8 1 steps 5 8 to complete assembling and placing the microphone mesh and membrane NOTE There are No serviceable Components on the Back Chassis Assembl
242. ith any objects such as needles tweezers or screwdrivers This could create a leak path into the Caution radio and the radio s submergibility will be lost The APX 6000XE radio has a vent port that allows for pressure The pressure equalization vent is located adjacent to the battery contact opening of the main chassis Never touch the equalization vent Ensure that no oily substances come in contact with this vent The APX 6000XE radio is designed to be submerged to a maximum depth of six 6 feet with a maximum submersion time of 2 hours per U S MIL STD Exceeding either maximum limit may result in damage to the radio For specific U S MIL STD details see Section 8 10 Ensuring Radio Submergibility on page 2 8 40 2 2 1 Care After Submerging If the radio battery contact area has been submerged in water dry and clean the radio battery contacts before attaching a battery to the radio Otherwise the water could short circuit the radio If the radio has been submerged in water shake the radio briskly so that any water that is trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed Otherwise the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio Chapter 3 Basic Theory of Operation 3 1 This chapter discusses the basic operational theory of the ASTRO APX 6000XE radio which is a wideband synthesized radio available in the VHF 136 174 MHz UHF1 380 470 MHz UHF2 450 520 MHz and 764 870
243. l 13 on the RF Board Assembly C for any damage or debris Replace seal if necessary 2 Connect the small coaxial cable connector into the RF Board 9 3 Connect the RF Board to the VOCON Board as shown in Figure 8 46 Sec 2 8 34 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 4 Tighten the RF and VOCON Board screw 45 by hand first to avoid cross threading Then torque the screw with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in lbs NOTE Do not connect the Antenna coax at this time Front Housing Assembly 1 must be snapped in place prior to connecting the coax y RF Board Assembly 9 SSA VE ANS 3 AK S e Small Coax Cable Connector Figure 8 46 Connect RF Board to VOCON Board Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 2 8 35 8 9 1 5 Assemble Back Chassis Assembly B N Dual Display versions 1 2 3 Inspect the Back Chassis Assembly Seal for any debris or foreign material Connect the Back Chassis Flex to the VOCON board D Place the Main Seal 54 onto the main chassis groove Gently seat the seal around the perimeter of the groove ensuring the key feature is oriented as shown in Figure 8 47 Set the Back Chassis Assembly B onto the Main Chassis Assembly E R Connectors Figure 8 47 Place Back Chassis Top Display version Inspect the Back Chassis Assembly N seal for any debris or foreign material Place the Main Seal 54 onto the main chassis groove
244. l A detailed inspection of the interior electronic circuitry is not needed Cleaning The following procedures describe the recommended cleaning agents and the methods to be used when cleaning the external surfaces of the radio External surfaces include the housing assembly and battery case These surfaces should be cleaned whenever a periodic visual inspection reveals the presence of smudges grease and or grime The only recommended agent for cleaning the external radio surfaces is a 0 5 solution of a mild dishwashing detergent in water The effects of certain chemicals and their vapors can have harmful results y on certain plastics Aerosol sprays tuner cleaners and other chemicals should be avoided Caution The detergent water solution should be applied sparingly with a stiff non metallic short bristled brush to work all loose dirt away from the radio A soft absorbent lintless cloth or tissue should be used to remove the solution and dry the radio Make sure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors cracks or crevices Sec 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Basic Maintenance Handling Precautions Handling Precautions Complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS devices and other high technology devices are used in this family of radios While the attributes of these devices are many their characteristics make them susceptible to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD or high voltage charges Damage can
245. l FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner X X X 07009369001 Support Expander PCB O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green X X X NHN7016 Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X NUF6750_ Assembly RF Board 7 800 MHz X X PMLN5817 User Guide CD APX 6000XE Item Included Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories gong xXx xx n nno Specifications for APX 6000XE VHF Radios Specifications for APX 6000XE VHF Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise
246. l Connector Insert 17 with the Black Stick from the Main Chassis Assembly 15 as shown in Figure 8 29 Press the new Universal Connector Insert until it is fully seated and the lock tab is engaged on the chassis 8 8 1 3 Servicing Antenna O ring 1 2 3 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Remove the O ring 16 with the Black Stick Reinstall the O ring by rolling it over the threaded portion of the antenna hub until it sets in its groove NOTE Ensure the O ring is not twisted 8 8 1 4 Servicing Chassis Ground Contact 5 NOTE Chassis Ground Contact 18 will be damaged during disassembly Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Slide the Black Stick under the Chassis Ground Contact 18 through the opening on the RF VOCON PCB side of the radio to lift off the contact Clean the area once the Chassis Ground Contact is removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Remove the backer of the Chassis Ground Contact and place it in the appropriate location with a pair of flat tip tweezers by aligning the hole in the Ground Contact with the post located on the chassis Ensure the Ground Contact is centered in the opening and the outer surface of the Ground Contact is parallel to the area adjacent to it in the chassis as shown in Figure 8 30 Apply pressure to the adhesive to activate it 8 8 1 5 Servicing RF Co
247. l Top Seal 22 with the Black Stick 3 Replace the new seal into the groove provided in the Control Top Assembly s casting 4 Ensure that seal is set properly and not stretched NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Control Top Assembly F 8 8 3 Servicing VOCON Board Assembly D VOCON Board 14 Figure 8 33 VOCON Board Assembly NOTE There are no serviceable components on the VOCON Board Assembly Sec 2 8 24 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 4 Servicing of RF Board Assembly Battery Connector Seal 13 ______ Figure 8 34 RF Board Assembly 8 8 4 1 Battery Seal 1 2 3 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 6 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Slide the Battery Connector Seal 13 from the battery contact header with the Black Stick Use the Black Stick and push the new Battery Connector Seal until it is properly seated onto the RF Board surface 8 8 4 2 Thermal Pads N a oa P D Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 6 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Scrape off both thermal pads 10 and 11 from the amplifiers and or Main chassis with the Black Stick Ensure there are no debris or residue left on the amplifier s surfaces Replace with new thermal pads Peel off the back liner from the thermal pads Insert the Outer Thermal Pad 10 into the shield opening Make sure the bottom surface of t
248. l and service shops capable of restoring the watertight integrity of the radio It is strongly recommended that maintenance of the radio be deferred to dr qualified service personnel and service shops This is of paramount importance as irreparable damage to the radio can result from service by Caution unauthorized persons If disassembly is necessary unauthorized attempts to repair the radio may void any existing warranties or extended performance agreements with Motorola It is also recommended that submergibility be checked annually by qualified service personnel 8 10 3 Water Exposure If the radio is exposed to water shake the radio to remove the excess water from the speaker grille and microphone ports areas before operating otherwise the sound may be distorted until the water has evaporated or is dislodged from these areas Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 2 8 41 8 10 4 Specialized Test Equipment This section summarizes the specialized test equipment necessary for testing the integrity of ASTRO APX 6000XE radios To ensure that the radio is truly a watertight unit special testing test procedures and specialized test equipment are required The special testing involves a vacuum check of the radio and pressure testing troubleshooting for water leaks if the vacuum check fails The specialized test equipment is needed to perform the vacuum check and pressure testing if required 8
249. lay X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUF6750_ Assembly RF Board 7 800 MHz X X X NNTN7930 User Guide CD APX 5000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green Note X ltem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 1 xii Specifications for APX 5000 VHF Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL Specifications for APX 5000 VHF Radios TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vde Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 2060 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio
250. lignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments 6 5 2 Power Characterization Points Tuning of the radio is done through Power Characterization Points tuning screen 1 Select the TX Power Characterization Points alignment screen See Figure 6 9 to Figure 6 12 Set power supply voltage and current limit 3 Adjust softpot value by manipulating the slider bar incrementing the New Softpot Value text box or directly entering the desired value into the New Softpot Value text box until the rated power is indicated on the service monitor For rated power refer to the help text in the Tuner 4 Repeat the steps 2 and 3 for all frequencies 5 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values ws APX Family Tuner 4 Home Option Feature Help F Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Windows f Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview File Device pl Windows Themes pl Print sl Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode Pr ogram All E PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 136 025 E Ee Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 E 123ABC1234 o Radio Information 136 025 3559 Bo m El Transmitter Alignments 3578 Reference Oscillator VU 3578 Tx Power Characterization Points 154 225 3624 3624 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 160 125 3644 3644 Tx De
251. lle Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner X X X 07009369001 Support Expander PCB O Oj O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green X X X NHN7016 Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X MNUE7365 Assembly RF Board UHF1 X X X PMLN5817 User Guide CD APX 6000XE e NHN7069 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Cyrillic Black e NHN7081 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Arabic Black Note X ltem Included O Option available Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batte
252. ltra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 4 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 224 uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 298 uV 5 BER 0 2 uV Intermodulation typical 81 5 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 77 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 66 7 dB Spurious Rejection typical 80 5 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 5 dB 12 5 kHz 47 4 dB Distortion typical 0 91
253. matics and component layout diagrams To obtain FMRs contact the Customer Care and Services Division refer to Appendix B Replacement Parts Ordering Computer Software Copyrights The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs including but not limited to the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyrighted computer program Accordingly any copyrighted Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this manual may not be copied reproduced modified reverse engineered or distributed in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Furthermore the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication estoppel or otherwise any license under the copyrights patents or patent applications of Motorola except for the normal non exclusive license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product Document Copyrights No duplication or distribution of this document or any portion thereof shall take place without the express written permission of Motorola No part of this manual may be reproduced distributed or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the ex
254. mation 764 0125 3710 3710 gt Transmitter Alignments 3710 m Reference Oscillator Ee ES Eun en CA Tx Power Characterization Points 775 9875 3710 3710 Tx Power Characterization O PA Saturation Reference 794 0125 3704 3704 Tx Deviation Balance e El Performance Testing 809 0125 3778 S75 EA Bit Error Rate 3777 Transmitter Test Pattern Hess xu C Sa Factory Override 851 0125 3772 3772 860 0125 3775 3775 de 869 8875 3771 3771 Figure 6 12 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen 700 800MHz Power Characterization Tuning Tuning of the radio is done through Power Characterization tuning screen IMPORTANT Power Characterization Tuning Points must be tuned before tuning Power Characterization Tuning NOTE a The longer the RF cable the more the attenuation of the power reading b Use a standard 50 ohm cable c Remember to set the Communication Analyzer to baseband power Select the TX Power Characterization alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit power to be used See Figure 6 13 to Figure 6 16 Left click the box under Measure Power 1 for the desired frequency field The selected box Click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is transmitting Measure the transmit power of the radio with a service monitor Input the transmit power in watts using two decimal places into t
255. mbly 10 Gently press down the Expander Board Support into place Capacitor to avoid Expander Board Support ji B I7 NM a Figure 8 53 Press Expander Board Support into Place Opt Expansion Board 8 9 1 8 Assemble Speaker Module J Do not touch the speaker cone or the port seal Take extra precaution to make sure neither the speaker nor the breather pad is damaged Caution 1 Ensure the Seal is free from any debris or foreign material 2 Align the Speaker Module s Pin feature located on the bottom edge directly below the speaker into the hole on the chassis hook feature 3 Swing the Speaker Module down and firmly press the top side into the radio as shown in Figure 8 54 Chassis Hook Feature Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 2 8 39 4 While holding the Speaker Module down place the two top screws 42 into the their respective holes and torque the screws to 10 in lbs with an IP8 Torx Bit in a torque driver See Figure 8 55 IMPORTANT For proper sealing Speaker Module J must be held down during the torquing of the screws NS NV 2 NON II wh NN CNN NS ONN NS NOON NS Figure 8 55 Insert Top Screws 8 9 1 9 Assemble Speaker Grille Assembly K 1 Install the Speaker Grille K by inserting the top lip under the Control Cap Assembly 58 and rotating the grille into place See Figure 8 56 Cent
256. me Option Feature Help 51 Open diySave diySave As Read Device amp Windows Themes Device sl Windows Themes amp APX Family Tuner sip Print Ctri P Print Preview File E Print G Navigation A X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode TRANSMITTER OFF 380 025 x New Softpot Value 0 4095 E 123ABC1234 Radio Information mua pa A El Transmitter Alignments n el amie 390 025 3140 A Tx Power Characterization Points 400 025 3152 1 Tx Power Characterization 411 025 3155 Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments 424 925 3143 le Rx Front End Filter m mi crib 435 025 3127 la Bit Error Rate 445 025 3108 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 457 025 3110 A 469 925 3164 i Figure 6 18 PA Saturation Referencing Alignment Screen UHF1 Ww APX Family Tuner e Home Option Feature Help Open Ag Save y Save As P Read Device windows Z Themes eig Print Ctrl P 1 Print Preview File m Device Windows Themes Print EI Navigation X PA Saturation Reference Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 123ABC1234 7 Radio Information 450 025 UHF R2 3616 3616 z Transmitter Alignments E 355 a KEE 460 02
257. ment 1 8 40 standards 1 8 39 vacuum test 1 8 40 test environments 1 5 6 test frequencies 1 5 5 1 5 10 test mode dual display version 1 5 3 top display model 1 5 8 receiver ASTRO conventional channel tests 1 5 12 performance checks 1 5 12 troubleshooting 1 9 3 receiving analog mode 1 3 2 ASTRO mode 1 3 9 reference oscillator alignment 1 6 4 RF board assembly assemble 1 8 34 removing 1 8 17 servicing 1 8 24 rf coax cable servicing 1 8 21 RF test mode dual display version 1 5 5 1 5 10 ruggedized radios Sec 1 Index 3 handling precautions 1 2 2 submergibility checks 1 2 1 S secure kit encryption 1 7 1 secure level servicing 1 8 23 service aids 1 4 2 servicing antenna o ring 1 8 21 back chassis assembly dual display 1 8 25 top display 1 8 27 backup battery 1 8 25 battery seal 1 8 24 chassis ground contact 1 8 21 coin cell pad 1 8 21 color display 1 8 26 control top assembly 1 8 22 control top main seal 1 8 22 expansion board assembly 1 8 25 FM Label 1 8 29 1 8 30 grille label 1 8 32 knobs and top bezel assembly 1 8 23 main housing dual display 1 8 28 top display 1 8 30 main lens 1 8 27 medallion 1 8 29 1 8 30 microphone boot 1 8 26 1 8 28 microphone membrane 1 8 26 1 8 27 1 8 31 microphone mesh 1 8 26 1 8 27 1 8 31 RF board assembly 1 8 24 rf coax cable 1 8 21 secure level 1 8 23 speaker grille assembly 1 8 31 speaker module 1 8 31 thermal pads 1 8 24 universal connector insert 1 8 21 vocon board ass
258. ments 485 025 UHF R2 1 60 5 28 Rx Front End Filter El Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattem 506 025 UHF R2 1 61 5 29 Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 1 61 5 30 Figure 6 15 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF2 ws APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open zoue zoue As E Read Device Ci Windows Themes al Print Ctri P Print Preview Windows Themes lx Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Softpot Configuration Mode Program All E PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 File IE Device Print EI Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Referenc e Tx Deviation Balance E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 16 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 13 6 5 4 PA Saturation Reference Tuning Tuning is done through PA Saturation Referencing screen 1 Select the PA Saturation Reference alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit frequencies to be used See Figure 6 17 to Figure 6 20 2 In Manual Mode set the service monitor to the desired frequency as shown in the frequency list in the PA Saturation Reference alignment screen 3 Adjust the PA Saturation Reference softpot value with the slider
259. n Motorola supplied equipment which adversely affect performance of the Product or interfere with Motorola s normal warranty inspection and testing of the Product to verify any warranty claim F Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible G Rechargeable batteries if H any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering l the damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified J Freight costs to the repair depot K A Product which due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software firmware in the Product does not function in accordance with MOTOROLA s published specifications or the FCC certification labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA L Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not affect the operation of the Product M Normal and customary wear and tear Commercial Warranty vii VI Patent And Software Provisions MOTOROLA will defend at its own expense any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a United States patent and MOTOROLA will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim but such defense and payments are conditi
260. n enne eene nnne enne 1 9 4 9 5 Eneryption Troubleshooting EE 1 9 4 Table of Contents Sec 1 iii Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists 1 10 1 10 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View 1 10 2 10 2 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Full Keypad Exploded View Parts List 1 10 3 10 3 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View 1 10 4 10 4 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Limited Keypad Exploded View Parts List 1 10 4 10 5 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View 1 10 5 10 6 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Top Display Exploded View Parts List 1 10 5 10 7 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Controller Kit Numbers oooooocooocccnoccccoocccononcccnnccnonancnnnnnos 1 10 6 alo co A EE 1 Index 1 Sec 1 iv List of Tables List of Tables Table 1 1 ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Basic Features oooocoicoccccocccncccccccccccnncnnnnnnnos 1 1 2 Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment sss eene eren nnne nnne nnne 1 4 1 Table 4 2 Service Alds NENNEN era ritas dees beds abcess e tup a aa die Re NEEN aee eee ao da dena noes 1 4 2 Table 5 1 Initial Equipment Control Settings sssssssssssseeeeeemeeeen nnns 1 5 2 Table 5 2 Test Mode Displays ennemi nen rennen nnne nene 1 5 3 Table 5 3 Test Frequencie
261. n nennen nnn nn nere rn rrrr rns s nennen nn 2 6 7 Table 6 2 Reference Oscillator Alignment eene 2 6 7 Table 7 1 Kit Numbers for Secure Enabled Expansion BoardS oooooooccccccccccccccccccnconconcnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanns 2 7 1 Table 8 1 APX 6000XE Partial Exploded View Parts let 2 8 5 Table 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies 2 8 6 Table 8 3 Required Tools and Supplies 2 8 6 Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Display 2 9 1 Table 9 2 Operational Error Code Displays oooococccccnccnnnnccccnnccnononoononccnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ono eene 2 9 2 Table 9 3 Receiver Troubleshooting Chart 2 9 3 Table 9 4 Transmitter Troubleshooting Chart 2 9 4 Table 9 5 Encryption Troubleshooting Chart nennen enne nnns 2 9 4 Table 10 1 APX 6000XE Exploded Views and Controller Kit sse 2 10 1 Related Publications APX 6000XE User Guide Model 1 68012003047 APX 6000XE User Guide Model 2 sss ee eere nennen 68012003048 APX 6000XE User Guide Model 3 68012003049 APX 6000XE Quick Reference Card Model PMLN5935 __ APX 6000XE Quick Reference Card Model 72 PMLN5936 APX 6000XE Quick Reference Card Model 3 enne PMLN5934 APX 6000XE Digital Portable Radios Detailed Service Manual 68012002026 APX 6000 APX 7000 Digital Portable Radios User Guide CD PMLN5871 List of Figures Sec 2 11 List of Figures Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Fig
262. n page 2 10 5 Sec 2 8 5 Sec 2 8 6 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Required Tools and Supplies 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies Table 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies Motorola A Supplier Tools Part Number Supplier Part Number Remarks Bit Torx IP8 Torx T8 may be used but Torx Plus IP8 is recommended Bit Antenna 66009258001 Motorola Spanner Black Stick Hexacon MA 800G Electric Co Seater 66009261001 Motorola Secure Lever Driver Torque Vacuum NLN9839 Motorola For Vacuum Test Pump Kit Vacuum 66009259001 Motorola For Vacuum Test and Pressure Test Adapter Pressure NTN4265_ Motorola For Pressure Test Pump Kit 8 3 Fastener Torque Chart Table 8 3 lists the various fasteners by part number and description followed by the torque values and the location where used Torque all fasteners to the recommended value when assembling the radio Table 8 3 Required Tools and Supplies ORRE Description Repair Torque in Ibs 0275891B01 Antenna Spanner Nut 27 16 0375962B01 Top Screw 42 10 0375962B02 Center Screw 41 10 0375962B03 Bottom Screw 43 10 0375962B04 Control Top Screw 44 7 03009304001 RF amp Vocon Board Screw 45 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Antenna Sec 2 8 7 8 4 Antenna This section explains how to attach and remove the antenna 8 4 1 Attach Antenna To attach the antenn
263. n the appropriate location with a pair of flat tip tweezers by aligning the hole in the Ground Contact with the post located on the chassis Ensure the Ground Contact is centered in the opening and the outer surface of the Ground Contact is parallel to the area adjacent to it in the chassis as shown in Figure 8 31 Apply pressure to the adhesive to activate it 8 8 1 5 Servicing RF Coax Cable 1 2 3 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Remove the two screws 44 from the top of the assembly Note the routing of the RF Coax cable 20 as seated onto the chassis grooves Gently remove the cable by sliding it away from the control top Replace the RF Coax Cable Bend and seat the new RF cable within the chassis grooves as noted in step 3 Torque both screws 44 with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in Ibs Chassis Ground Contact 18 Figure 8 31 Remove Chassis Ground Contact NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Main Chassis Assembly E Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 23 8 8 2 Servicing Control Top Assembly F Control Top Assembly 58 Figure 8 32 Control Top Assembly and Control Top Seal 8 8 2 1 Control Top Main Seal 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 2 Remove the Contro
264. nal to the input value See also A D A device that converts digital data into analog signals See also ADC A type of digital communications that utilizes privacy call as well as memory channel and busy channel lock out to enhance communication efficiency A microcontroller specifically designed for performing the mathematics involved in manipulating analog information such as sound that has been converted into a digital form DSP also implies the use of a data compression technique Object code executed by the Digital Signal Processor in an ASTRO subscriber radio The DSP is responsible for computation intensive tasks such as decoding ASTRO signaling An individual who has radio system management duties and responsibilities See Digital Private Line See also PL See digital signal processor See digital signal processor code A feature that allows the dispatcher to temporarily reassign selected radios to a single special channel so they can communicate with each other Electrically Programmable Digital Potentiometer See Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory A special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge An EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off A backup system that allows communication in a non trunked conventional mode if the trunked system fails Federal Communications Commission Sec 3 Glossary 4 Term firmware FGU flash FLASH
265. nd first to avoid cross threading Then torque the screw with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in Ibs 8 9 1 4 Assemble RF Board Assembly C Always replace with new thermal pads See section 8 8 5 2 on page 1 8 24 Caution 1 Inspect the Battery Connector Seal 13 on the RF Board Assembly C for any damage or debris Replace seal if necessary 2 Connect the small coaxial cable connector into the RF Board 9 3 Connect the RF Board to the VOCON Board as shown in Figure 8 46 4 Tighten the RF and VOCON Board screw 45 by hand first to avoid cross threading Then torque the screw with a Torx IP8 Bit and a torque Driver to 8 in lbs NOTE Do not connect the Antenna coax at this time Front Housing Assembly 1 must be snapped in place prior to connecting the coax Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly Sec 1 8 35 Small Coax Cable RF Board Assembly 9 Connector Figure 8 46 Connect RF Board to VOCON Board 8 9 1 5 Assemble Back Chassis Assembly B N Dual Display versions 1 Inspect the Back Chassis Assembly Seal for any debris or foreign material 2 Connect the Back Chassis Flex to the VOCON board D 3 Place the Main Seal 50 onto the main chassis groove Gently seat the seal around the perimeter of the groove ensuring the key feature is oriented as shown in Figure 8 47 4 Set the Back Chassis Assembly B onto the Main Chassis Assembly E Connectors Figure 8
266. ne detected TX mic audio tone 192 8 Hz AST ASTRO RX none TX Digital Voice USQ Carrier RX unsquelch always Unsquelch TX mic audio All deviation values are based on deviation tuning of this mode 5 2 3 Control Top and Keypad Test Mode This test mode is used to verify proper operation of all radio buttons and switches if a failure is suspected 5 2 3 1 Control Top Checks To perform the control top checks 1 10 11 Press and hold the Top Button Orange button the radio icons are displayed and the LED lights amber Release the Top Button 148 0 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the open position Your radio is now in the Control Top and Keypad test mode Press the Top Button again 148 1 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the closed position Rotate the 16 Position Select Switch 4 0 through 4 15 appears which indicates that the selector switch is in mode zone position 1 through 16 Rotate the Two Position Concentric Switch 65 0 and 65 1 appear Cycle through the Three Position A B C Switch 67 0 67 1 and 67 2 appear Rotate the Volume Control 2 0 through 2 255 appear The display values may vary slightly at the upper and lower limits Press the Top Side Button 96 1 appears release 96 0 appears Press Side Button 1 97 1 appears release 97 0 appears Pr
267. ned into the threaded hole Top Hooked End amp il S amp Thumb Screw s Figure 8 12 Engaging Hook and Seating Cover 2 Hand tighten the thumb screw clockwise until secured NOTE Do not overtighten the screw The screw should be snugged and not allow the cover to move Thumb Screw with Hex Head Socket Figure 8 13 Securing the Cover Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 1 8 13 8 7 Radio Disassembly This section contains instructions for disassembling the radio s main subassemblies Prepare the radio for disassembly Turn off the radio by rotating the On Off Volume Knob 29 fully counterclockwise until a click is heard Remove the antenna the battery Belt Clip Cover 53 Top Display Only the Universal Connector Cover 46 and any other accessory connected to the radio 8 7 1 Removal of the Speaker Grille Assemblies K 1 With the Battery removed and the primary loudspeaker side of the radio facing you remove the center two screws 41 and swing out Speaker Grille Assembly K as shown in Figure 8 14 Center Screws 41 Vacuum Port Seal Figure 8 14 Remove Center Screws NOTE Vacuum Port seal can be removed with the left center screw removed 2 Remove the bottom two screws 43 if the Main Housing Assembly A L M is to be removed Refer Figure 8 15 Bottom Screws 43 Figure 8 15 Remove Bottom Screws NOTE Once the sc
268. nessonline Mail Orders Mail orders are only accepted by the US Federal Government Markets Division USFGMD Motorola Solutions 7031 Columbia Gateway Drive 3rd Floor Order Processing Columbia MD 21046 U S A Sec 3 B 2 Replacement Parts Ordering Telephone Orders B 5 B 6 B 7 B 8 Telephone Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization United States and Canada 7 00 AM to 7 00 PM Central Standard Time Monday through Friday Chicago U S A 1 800 422 4210 1 847 538 8023 United States and Canada U S Federal Government Markets Division USFGMD 1 877 873 4668 8 30 AM to 5 00 PM Eastern Standard Time Fax Orders Radio Products and Solutions Organization United States and Canada 1 800 622 6210 1 847 576 3023 United States and Canada USFGMD Federal Government Orders 1 800 526 8641 For Parts and Equipment Purchase Orders Parts Identification Radio Products and Solutions Organization United States and Canada 1 800 422 4210 Product Customer Service Radio Products and Solutions Organization United States and Canada 1 800 927 2744 The Radio Products and Solutions Organization RPSO was formerly known as the Radio Products Services Division RPSD and or the Accessories and Aftermarket Division AAD Glossary This glossary contains an alphabetical listing of terms and their definitions that are applicable to ASTRO portable and mobile subscriber radio products Term
269. never a periodic visual inspection reveals the presence of smudges grease and or grime The only recommended agent for cleaning the external radio surfaces is a 0 596 solution of a mild dishwashing detergent in water The effects of certain chemicals and their vapors can have harmful results on certain plastics Aerosol sprays tuner cleaners and other chemicals should be avoided Caution The detergent water solution should be applied sparingly with a stiff non metallic short bristled brush to work all loose dirt away from the radio A soft absorbent lintless cloth or tissue should be used to remove the solution and dry the radio Make sure that no water remains entrapped near the connectors cracks or crevices Sec 2 2 2 Basic Maintenance Handling Precautions 2 2 Handling Precautions Complementary metal oxide semiconductor CMOS devices and other high technology devices are used in this family of radios While the attributes of these devices are many their characteristics make them susceptible to damage by electrostatic discharge ESD or high voltage charges Damage can be latent resulting in failures occurring weeks or months later Therefore special precautions must be taken to prevent device damage during disassembly troubleshooting and repair Handling precautions are mandatory for this radio and are especially important in low humidity conditions equalization in the radio Never poke this vent w
270. ngs LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2010 2013 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved Jun 2013 Sa gt TAE 68012002028 F
271. nhanced Controls Enhanced Display P Low Profile No Display Q Low Profile Basic Display R Low Profile Basic Display Full Keypad Position 7 Channel Spacing 9 7 A 1 5kHz 5 15kHz 2 6 25kHz 6 20 25kHz 3 10kHz 7 30kHz 4 12 5kHz 9 Variable Programmable P 8 A 5 A 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 W 9 A Positions 13 16 N S P 0 1 SP Model Suffix Position 12 Unique Model Variations C Cenelec N Standard Package Position 11 Version Version Letter Alpha Major Change Position 10 Feature Level 1 Basic 6 Standard Plus 2 Limited Package 7 Expanded Package 3 Limited Plus 4 Intermediate 5 Standard Package 8 Expanded Plus 9 Full Feature Programmable Position 9 Primary System Type A Conventional B Privacy Plus C Clear SMARTNET D Advanced Conventional Stat Alert E Enhanced Privacy Plus F Nauganet 888 Series G Japan Specialized Mobile Radio JSMR H Multi Channel Access MCA J CoveragePLUS K MPT1327 Public L MPT1327 Private M Radiocom N Tone Signalling P Binary Signalling Q Phonenet W Programmable X Secure Conventional Y Secure SMARTNET MPT Ministry of Posts and Telecommunications Position 8 Primary Operation A Conventional Simplex B Conventional Duplex C Trunked Twin Type D Dual Mode Trunked E Dual Mode Trunked Duplex F Trunked Type I G Trunke
272. nless steel backers at the locations shown on Figure 8 50 3 Ifthe RF Board Assembly 9 was NOT removed skip to step 4 Carefully align the Antenna Coax Plug to the Coax Receptacle on the RF board Assembly C and slide the plug in using the Black Stick Ensure the universal connector flex is not caught under the antenna coax cable Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 4 Tuck in the Antenna Coax Cable into its grooves as shown in Figure 8 49 5 Plug the Expansion Board Assembly H to the VOCON Board Assembly D as shown in Figure 8 50 Make sure the connector is fully engaged 6 Connect the two Flex Connectors to their pairing connectors on the right and left sides of the Expansion Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 50 Control Top Support Pads SN V qo Expansion Board Assembly 33 K N A Flex Connectors Figure 8 50 Insert Flex Connectors 8 9 1 8 Assemble Speaker Module J Do not touch the speaker cone or the port seal Take extra precaution to make sure neither the speaker nor the breather GER pad is damaged 1 Ensure the Seal is free from any debris or foreign material 2 Align the Speaker Module s Pin feature located on the bottom edge directly below the speaker into the hole on the chassis hook feature 3 Swing the Speaker Module down and firmly press the top side into the radio as shown in Figure 8 51 Figure 8 51 Insert Speaker Module Sec 1 8 38
273. nne enne 1 8 11 Engaging Hook and Seating Cover 1 8 12 SOCUNING he GOVE T ib dae 1 8 12 Remove Center Screws esses eene terrena 1 8 13 Remove Bottom SCrews co lee eb re Ee Ue En Hr ene uide ker nda 1 8 13 Remove Top Gcrews cece r a aa e aa aaa a P a E e Eaa aaia ani 1 8 14 Remove Speaker Modules iin aaa tnit ie pates id este ait odia dade egene 1 8 14 Remove Flex Connectors and Expansion Board Aesembhy 1 8 15 Remove Antenna Coax Cable Connect 1 8 15 Remove FIousirg ege eoe ee i URBE MERE DO AREE 1 8 16 Remove Back Chassis Assembly from Main Chassis Assembly ssssssss 1 8 16 Remove RF Board Screw ccccccconccccccnononccccconnnnoccnonnnnecnn E chan nnne eran n tnnt enn nne 1 8 17 Remove RF Board Assembly eee R den theses entend thank nnns 1 8 17 Remove VOCON Board Gcrew eene nennen nennen nnn 1 8 18 Remove VOCON Board Assembly sesinin ekain inann aaia E aE nennen 1 8 18 Remove Knobs and Fastener Hardware 1 8 19 Remove Control Top Bezel Assembhy eene 1 8 19 Remove Control Top Aesembhy eee nennen nene 1 8 20 Serviceable Components Main Chassis Aesembhy cnc ninannno 1 8 20 Remove Chassis Ground Contact 1 8 22 Control Top Assembly and Control Top Gezai 1 8 22 Top Bozel Assemb y nirre ED PERDE BREMEN GAB 1 8 23 VOCON Board ASSembly acen EEA E tod EEA Ee ARA 1 8 23 RE Board Assembly tait tun T tons sate a sai na ERR EE 1 8 24 Expansion Board Assembly
274. noted GENERAL Sec 2 19 Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 2060 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 241 mA Standby Current Drain 137 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMNA4403 or Li lon NNTN7038 or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034 or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 6 15 156 3 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 4 60 40 5 mm 1 4 35 5 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 6 41 162 8 mm W 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 5 5 mm With NiMH Battery H 8 41 213 6 mm W1 3 32 84 3 mm 2 39 60 7 mm D 1 65 41 9 mm 1 4 35 5 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 13 7 oz 389 g 18 7 oz 530 g 24 1 oz 683 g 25 3 oz 717 g RECEIVER Frequency Range 136 174 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz An
275. ns between a radio and the programming software DOS based software containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio See also CPS A type of computer memory that can be accessed randomly that is any byte of memory can be accessed without touching the preceding bytes See random access memory A type of computer memory on which data has been prerecorded Once data has been written onto a ROM chip it cannot be removed and can only be read A module that keeps track of elapsed time even when a computer is turned off Sec 3 Glossary 8 Term receiver registers repeater repeater talkaround RESET RF RF PA RIB ROM RPCIC RPT TA RSS RSSI RTC RX RX DATA SAP SCI IN selective call selective switch Serial Audio CODEC Port Glossary Definition Electronic device that amplifies RF signals A receiver separates the audio signal from the RF carrier amplifies it and converts it back to the original sound waves Short term data storage circuits within the microcontroller unit or programmable logic IC Remote transmit receive facility that re transmits received signals in order to improve communications range and coverage conventional operation A conventional radio feature that permits communication through a receive transmit facility which re transmits received signals in order to improve communication range and coverage Reset line an input to the microcontroller that restarts execution See rad
276. ntrol Top flex is disconnected from the VOCON Board D to prevent damage to the flex or connector Antenna Washer and Nut 26 27 Control Top Screws 57 Control Top Assembly F n Figure 8 29 Remove Control Top Assembly iii Gently separate the Control Top Assembly F from the Main Chassis Assembly E NOTE Place the Control Top Assembly F and the remaining Main Chassis Assembly E on an ESD safe surface free from debris Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 21 8 8 Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 1 Servicing Main Chassis Assembly E Universal Connector Insert 17 OY Screws 44 O Ring BI gt RF Coax Cable 20 Chassis Ground Contact 18 Coin Cell Pad 19 299090 228888 zy lt Main Seal 54 ES y NN y E A ES NOTE For assembly ensure the key feature e is aligned as shown Figure 8 30 Serviceable Components Main Chassis Assembly 8 8 1 1 Servicing Coin Cell Pad 1 oa EF oh Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Carefully peel off the pad Use the Black Stick to help remove any difficult sections of the pad s Clean the area once the pad is removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Peel the liner off the ne
277. o 12 5 kHz Channel Spacing due to the 2011 FCC narrowband regulations GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vde Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 1990 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 238 mA Standby Current Drain 134 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403 or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 4 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 4 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3
278. o or system performance DO NOT switch radios in the middle of any alignment Each alignment screen provides the ability to increase or decrease the softpot value by using a slider or by entering the new value from the keyboard directly into the box The slider bar indicates the current softpot value see Figure 6 3 Radio Alignment Procedures Softpot Sec 1 6 3 A gt APX Family Tuner KR Home Option Feature Help Open Ag Save dy Save As g Read Device F3Windows 4 Themes si Print Ctri P Print Preview File fu Device fx Windows Themes m Print fx Navigation A X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode Program All E PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 469 925 Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 2047 E 123ABC1234 a i Radio Information 469 925 1196 Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 3 Typical Softpot Screen Adjusting the softpot value sends information to the radio to increase or decrease the voltage in the corresponding circuit For example left clicking the UP spin button in the New Softpot Value scroll box on the Reference Oscillator screen instructs the radio s microcomputer to increase the v
279. o troubleshooting will support only radio alignment programming battery replacement and knob replacement and circuit board replacement Component level service information can be found in the ASTRO APX 6000XE Portable Radios Detailed Service Manual Motorola publication number 68012002026 9 1 Power Up Error Codes When the radio is turned on power up the radio performs self tests to determine if its basic electronics and software are in working order Problems detected during these tests are presented as error codes on the radio s display For non display radios the problem will be presented at power up by a single low frequency tone The radio should be sent to the depot if cycling power and reprogramming the code plug do not solve the problem The presence of an error should prompt the user that a problem exists and that a service technician should be contacted Self test errors are classified as either fatal or non fatal Fatal errors will inhibit user operation non fatal errors will not Use Table 9 1 to aid in understanding particular power up error code displays Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Displays Error Code Description Corrective Action 01 02 FLASH ROM Codeplug Checksum Non Fatal Error Reprogram the codeplug 01 12 Security Partition Checksum Non Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 81 Host ROM Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 82 FLASH ROM Codeplug Checksum
280. odes 1 9 1 receiver problem chart 1 9 3 transmitter problem chart 1 9 4 Index tuner bit error rate test 1 6 21 introduction 1 6 1 main menu 1 6 2 performance test 1 6 21 radio information screen 1 6 4 reference oscillator alignment 1 6 4 test setup 1 6 1 transmit deviation balance alignment 1 6 15 transmitter alignment 1 6 4 transmitter test pattern 1 6 24 U UHF 1 model chart 1 xii 1 xviii 1 xxv 1 xxvi radio specifications 1 xv 1 xxii 1 xxix UHF2 model chart 1 xix radio specifications 1 xxiii universal connector cover attaching 1 8 12 removing 1 8 11 universal connector insert servicing 1 8 21 user interface block theory of operation 1 3 11 V vacuum test submersibility 1 8 40 VHF model chart 1 xi 1 xvii radio specifications 1 xiv 1 xxi 1 xxviii view exploded complete top display version 1 10 5 complete dual display version 1 10 2 1 10 4 partial 1 8 2 1 8 3 1 8 4 vocon board assembly assemble 1 8 34 removing 1 8 18 servicing 1 8 23 W warning caution and danger notations 1 1 1 ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li APX 6000XE Digital Portable Radios Section 2 APX 6000XE Notes Table of Contents Sec 2 7 Table of Contents Model Numbering Charts and Specifications 2 x Portable Radio Model Numbering System ssssssssssseseeeeee eene nn narran rr rana ER ASIRO APX 6000XE VHF Model Chart tdi eq ea re hag et en RD Ue ieee ie d
281. of Operation Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation Sec 2 3 9 3 2 2 1 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 2 4 3 3 VHF Transmit Once a VHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal An RF switch then routes the signal to the VHF Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal routes the power to the main antenna UHF1 Transmit Once a UHF frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal Then the RF signal is routed to the UHF1 Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to th
282. of recommended test equipment and service aids as well as information on field programming equipment that can be used in servicing and programming ASTRO APX 6000XE radios 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment The list of equipment contained in Table 4 1 includes all of the standard test equipment required for servicing two way portable radios as well as several unique items designed specifically for servicing this family of radios The Characteristics column is included so that equivalent equipment may be substituted however when no information is provided in this column the specific Motorola model listed is either a unique item or no substitution is recommended Table 4 1 Recommended Test Equipment Equipment Characteristics Example Application Service Can be used as a Substitute for Aeroflex 3920 Frequency deviation meter and Monitor items marked with an asterisk www aeroflex com signal generator for wide range troubleshooting and alignment Digital RMS 100 uV to 300 V Fluke 179 or equivalent AC DC voltage and current Multimeter 5 Hz to 1 MHz www fluke com measurements Audio voltage 10 Mega Ohm Impedance measurements RF Signal 100 MHz to 1 GHz Agilent N5181A Receiver measurements Generator 130 dBm to 10 dBm FM Modulation 0 kHz to 10 kHz Audio Frequency 100 Hz to 10 kHz www agilent com Ramsey RSG1000B www ramseyelectronics com or equivalent Oscilloscope 2 Channel 50 MHz Bandwidth 5 mV div
283. oints must be tuned before tuning Power Characterization Tuning NOTE a The longer the RF cable the more the attenuation of the power reading b Use a standard 50 ohm cable c Remember to set the Communication Analyzer to baseband power Select the TX Power Characterization alignment screen The screen indicates the transmit power to be used See Figure 6 13 to Figure 6 16 Left click the box under Measure Power 1 for the desired frequency field The selected box Click the PTT Toggle button on the screen to make the radio transmit The screen indicates whether the radio is transmitting Measure the transmit power of the radio with a service monitor Input the transmit power in watts using two decimal places into the highlighted Measure Left click the box under Measure Power 2 box for the same frequency field The selected Measure the transmit power of the radio with a service monitor Input the transmit power in watts using two decimal places into the highlighted Measure 1 2 is highlighted 3 5 Power 1 box 6 box is highlighted Power 2 box 9 Repeat steps 2 to 8 for all frequencies 10 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 2 6 11 Figure 6 14 Transmit Power Characterization Alignment Screen UHF 1 Sec 2 6 12 Radio Alignment Pro
284. oltage across a varactor in the reference oscillator which increases the frequency In ALL cases the softpot value is just a relative number corresponding to a digital to analog D A generated voltage in the radio Perform the following procedures in the sequence indicated NOTE Some of the following screens may vary depending upon the radio under test and the version of tuner software you are using Refer to the software s online help When keying the radio during a test always transmit into a dummy load Caution Sec 1 6 4 Radio Alignment Procedures Radio Information 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 Radio Information Figure 6 4 shows a typical Radio Information screen This screen is informational only and cannot be directly changed 2 AA E F APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open Save A Save As g Read Device Windows f Themes gig Print Cti P Print Preview File fu Device EI Windows Themes Print EI Navigation H X Radio Information Softpot Configuration Mode Model Number H98QDDSPWSAN X Serial Number 123ABC1234 l 123ABC1234 Host Version L07011709 Radio Information i E Transmitter Alignments DSP Version D04 50 12 Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tuning Codeplug Version RO1 10 00 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing
285. on Type Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Serial number of the Option board is When the radio has an Option displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Bluetooth Address of the Option board is When the radio has an Option Bluetooth Addr displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Option Board Software version of the Option Board is When the radio has an Option SW Version displayed Board Maze with Apps Expansion Board Exp Board Type Type of Expansion Board is displayed When the radio has an Expansion Board NOTE All displays are temporary and will expire without any user intervention If information is longer than the physical length of the radio s display the information will wrap around to the next display After the last display RF TEST is displayed Press the Top Side Button Purple button to advance the test environments from RF TEST CH TEST CID TEST then press the Top Button Orange button to confirm selection Press any other buttons to advance the test Once a test is carried out restart the radio to proceed to another test Sec 2 5 10 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version 5 3 2 3 Do one of the following Press the Top Side Button to stop the displays and toggle between RF test mode and the Control Top test mode The test mode menu CH TEST is displayed indicating that you have selected the Control
286. on fatal errors will not Use Table 9 1 to aid in understanding particular power up error code displays Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Displays Error Code Description Corrective Action 01 02 FLASH ROM Codeplug Checksum Non Fatal Error Reprogram the codeplug 01 12 Security Partition Checksum Non Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 81 Host ROM Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 82 FLASH ROM Codeplug Checksum Fatal Error Reprogram the codeplug 01 84 External EEPROM Blank or SLIC failure Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 88 External RAM Fatal Error Note Not a checksum failure Send radio to depot 01 90 General Hardware Failure Fatal Error Turn the radio off then on 01 92 Security Partition Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 93 FLASHport Authentication Code Failure Send radio to depot 01 94 Internal EEPROM Blank Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 98 Internal RAM Fail Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 A0 ABACUS Tune Failure Fatal Error Send radio to depot 01 A2 Tuning Codeplug Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 02 81 DSP ROM Checksum Fatal Error Send radio to depot 02 88 DSP RAM Fatal Error Note Not a checksum failure Turn the radio off then on Sec 1 9 2 Basic Troubleshooting Operational Error Codes Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Displays Continued Error Code Description Corrective Action 02 90 General DSP Hardware Failure DSP startup message not Turn the radio off then on
287. oned on the following A that MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim B that MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its settlement or compromise and C should the Product or parts become or in MOTOROLA s opinion be likely to become the subject of a claim of infringement of a United States patent that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA at its option and expense either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes noninfringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product The foregoing states the entire liability of MOTOROLA with respect to infringement of patents by the Product or any parts thereof Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyri
288. ontrol Top Assembly F ii Gently separate the Control Top Assembly F from the Main Chassis Assembly E NOTE Place the Control Top Assembly F and the remaining Main Chassis Assembly E on an ESD safe surface free from debris 8 8 Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 1 Servicing Main Chassis Assembly E Screws 44 Chassis Ground Contact 18 Coin Cell Pad 19 lt q Main Seal 50 Universal Connector Insert 17 2 a Te NOTE Forassembly ensure the key feature P dd is aligned as shown Figure 8 29 Serviceable Components Main Chassis Assembly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 21 8 8 1 1 Servicing Coin Cell Pad 1 oo ka Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Carefully peel off the pad Use the Black Stick to help remove any difficult sections of the pad s Clean the area once the pad is removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Peel the liner off the new pad and place in the respective location Apply slight pressure to set the adhesive 8 8 1 2 Servicing Universal Connector Insert 1 2 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Ensure the locking tab is pressed and carefully slide the Universa
289. open position Your radio is now in the Control Top and Keypad test mode Press the Top Button again 148 1 appears which indicates that the Top Button is in the closed position Rotate the 16 Position Select Switch 4 0 through 4 15 appears which indicates that the selector switch is in mode zone position 1 through 16 Rotate the Two Position Concentric Switch 65 0 and 65 1 appear Cycle through the Three Position A B C Switch 67 0 67 1 and 67 2 appear Rotate the Volume Control 2 0 through 2 255 appear The display values may vary slightly at the upper and lower limits Press the Top Side Button 96 1 appears release 96 0 appears Press Side Button 1 97 1 appears release 97 0 appears Press Side Button 2 98 1 appears release 98 0 appears Press the PTT Button 1 1 appears release 1 0 appears Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 5 2 3 2 Keypad Checks for Model III only To continue to the keypad checks Press ES 48 1 appears release 48 0 appears Press UN 49 1 appears release 49 0 appears Press EA 50 1 appears release 50 0 appears Press EK 51 1 appears release 51 0 appears Press 8 52 1 appears release 52 0 appears Press Kal 53 1 appears release 53 0 appears Press E 54 1 appears
290. or to Lens removal Color Display must be removed See Section 8 8 7 3 on page 1 8 26 1 Remove the main Lens 7 carefully and slowly with the Black Stick NOTE To ease the breaking of the adhesive bond place Back Chassis in freezer Ar Over prying may damage the lens Caution 2 Clean the area once the Lens is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Peel the liner off of the adhesive side of the new Lens and place it centered left to right in the lens pocket of the Back Chassis assembly Bias it upwards against the horizontal surface Press the Lens down 5 Ensure the adhesive shows no sign of air entrapments NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Back Chassis Assembly 8 8 8 Servicing Back Chassis Assembly N Top Display Version Mic Boot 4 Mic Membrane 37 Nitin Mic Mesh 36 gt Back Chassis Assembly 52 y FR Figure 8 37 Back Chassis Assembly Top Display Version 8 8 8 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 2 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 37 and Microphone Mesh 36 from the microphone boot 4 3 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure
291. ory 64 MB is required to store the firmware tuning and Codeplug settings which upon initialization get read and stored into SDRAM 32 MB for execution The ARM and DSP core jointly control and configure audio wireless and RF devices linked to the Serial Peripheral Interface SPI and Synchronous Serial Interface SSI buses to enable radio FM and optional wireless communication protocols For encryption a separate ARM processor is used MACE to encode and decode encryption packets coming in from the main OMAP processor through the SSI interface Its firmware is flashed via the main processor during an upgrade request to its internal FLASH memory The MACE encryption processor is located on the expansion board The power and most clocks to the controller devices are provided by the MAKO IC and external switching and linear regulators on board A Complex Programmable Logic Array CPLD IC divides the 24 576 MHz clock from MAKO to source OMAP s 32 kHz Real Time Clock and MACE s 4 MHz main clock OMAP s main clock is supplied externally from an on board 12 MHz crystal The radio has two internal microphones and an internal speaker as well as available microphone and speaker connections for external accessories The internal 4 Ohm speaker is located opposite to the main display and keypad of the radio The internal speaker is driven by a Class D audio amplifier located on the expansion board that is capable of delivering a rated power of 0 5 W The e
292. ous Receiver Transmitter Ultra High Frequency Unique shadow key A microchip with programming that controls a computer s interface to its attached serial devices Interface point for all accessories to the radio An external bus standard that supports data transfer rates of 12 Mbps See Universal Serial Bus Glossary Term VCO vector sum excited linear predictive coding VHF VOCON vocoder vocoder controller voice encoder voltage controlled oscillator Sec 3 Glossary 11 Definition See voltage controlled oscillator A voice encoding technique used in ASTRO digital voice Very High Frequency See vocoder controller An electronic device for synthesizing speech by implementing a compression algorithm particular to voice See also voice encoder A PC board that contains an ASTRO radio s microcontroller DSP memory audio and power functions and interface support circuitry The DSP based system for digitally processing analog signals and includes the capabilities of performing voice compression algorithms or voice encoding See also vocoder An oscillator in which the frequency of oscillation can be varied by changing a control voltage Sec 3 Glossary 12 Glossary Notes MOTOROLA Motorola Solutions Inc 1303 East Algonquin Road Schaumburg Illinois 60196 U S A MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdi
293. output Selecting Mute will disable the audio output NOTE There will be no audio option available for APX 7000 when performing a Bit Error Rate Test BER Integration Time BER Integration Time carries with Test Pattern Type e Number of Frames Number of Frames over which bit error result are accumulated to produce the result Sec 1 6 22 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing NOTE When Continuous Operation Yes all fields will be grayed out while the test is in progress They will be enabled when the STOP button is pressed When Continuous Operation No a wait cursor will be displayed while the test is in progress and return to normal when the test is done Bit Error Rate Figure 6 27 Bit Error Rate Screen VHF Figure 6 28 Bit Error Rate Screen UHF1 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing Sec 1 6 23 TAA XT V Home Option Feature Help 450 000000 Framed 1011 Figure 6 30 Bit Error Rate Screen 700 800 MHz 3 Press Start Stop button to begin or end BER testing Sec 1 6 24 Radio Alignment Procedures Performance Testing 6 7 2 Transmitter Test Pattern The Transmitter Test Pattern test is used to transmit specific test patterns at a desired frequency so that the user can perform tests on the radio s transmitter see Figure 6 31 to Figure 6 34 6 7 2 1 Transmitter Test Fields This screen contains the following fields Tx
294. pecifications for APX 5000 7 800 MHz Radios sss enne 1 xvi ASTRO APX 6000 VHF Model Chart 1 xvii ASTRO APX 6000 UHF1 Model Chart 1 xviii ASTRO APX 6000 UHF2 Model Chart tst ient iic ea decide ceca 1 xix ASTRO APX 6000 700 800 Model Chart 1 xx Specifications for APX 6000 VHF Radios 1 xxi Specifications for APX 6000 UHF1 Radios eem emnes 1 xxii Specifications for APX 6000 UHF2 Radios sss eene em eren nnne nnns 1 xxiii Specifications for APX 6000 7 800 MHz Radios sse eee 1 xxiv ASTRO APX 6000Li VHF Model Chart 1 xxv ASTRO APX 6000Li UHF1 Model Chart 1 xxvi ASTRO APX 6000Li 700 800 Model Chart 1 xxvii Specifications for APX 6000Li VHF Radios ennemi nn nnne nennen 1 xxviii Specifications for APX 6000Li UHF1 Radios 1 xxix Specifications for APX 6000Li 7 800 MHz Radios 1 XXX Chapter 1 Introduction stet PIU 1 1 1 1 4 Manual ei it dte em eite neut aea nee 1 1 1 1 2 Notations Used in This Manual 1 1 1 1 3 Radio Description eie ec Hp ARENS 1 1 2 AGA AEE ASAE S A A Phen ui E c eU AL EI v obti A E A NE 1 1 2 Chapter 2 Basic MalntenancCeccisicinaasiciadairacaniccans cita 1 2 1 24 General Ma intenance TEE 1 2 1 2 2 Hanaling Precautioris eie ode tte t deb oe t tiet oe eaa Pet pete reet 1 2 2 Chapter 3 Basic Theory of Operation 1 3 1 331 Major Assemblies i ioi He s alo tl ea 1 3 1 3 2 Analog Mode of Operation eene denen tnnt nnne tana Lin
295. perly grounded with antistatic grounding system approved for electronics handling Caution This section contains the APX 6000XE radio partially exploded views NOTES Refer to Figure 8 1 on page 2 8 2 the Partial Exploded View and Table 8 1 on page 2 8 5 the Partial Exploded View Parts List Letters in parentheses refer to item letters in Figure 8 1 on page 2 8 2 and Table 8 1 on page 2 8 5 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Subassemblies Sec 2 8 2 Figure 8 1 APX 6000XE Dual Display Partial Exploded View Sec 2 8 3 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Subassemblies gt Figure 8 2 APX 6000XE Dual Display Limited Keypad Partial Exploded View Sec 2 8 4 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Subassemblies Figure 8 3 APX 6000XE Top Display Partial Exploded View Disassembly Reassembly Procedures APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Subassemblies Item Letter Table 8 1 APX 6000XE Partial Exploded View Parts List Description Exploded View and Parts List A Main Housing Assembly Refer Fi
296. press written permission of Motorola Disclaimer The information in this document is carefully examined and is believed to be entirely reliable However no responsibility is assumed for inaccuracies Furthermore Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products herein to improve readability function or design Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the applications or use of any product or circuit described herein nor does it cover any license under its patent rights nor the rights of others Trademarks MOTOROLA MOTO MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS and the Stylized M logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings LLC and are used under license All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 2010 2011 Motorola Solutions Inc All rights reserved ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li APX 6000XE Digital Portable Radios Basic Service Manual Contents Section 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Radio Section 2 APX 6000XE Radio Section 3 Appendices Document History DocumentHistory The following major changes have been implemented in this manual since the previous edition Edition Description Date 68012002028 A Initial edition Dec 2010 68012002028 B Added APX 6000XE Info Apr 2011 68012002028 C Added APX 5000 and APX 6000Li Info Aug 2011 68012002028 D Added UHF2 for APX 6000 and APX 6000XE Nov 2011 68
297. prying may damage the lens Caution 2 Clean the area once the Lens is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Peel the liner off of the adhesive side of the new Lens and place it centered left to right in the lens pocket of the Back Chassis assembly Bias it upwards against the horizontal surface Press the Lens down 5 Ensure the adhesive shows no sign of air entrapments NOTE There are no other serviceable components on the Back Chassis Assembly 8 8 7 Servicing Back Chassis Assembly N Top Display Version Mic Boot 4 Mic Membrane 5 Nitin ee Mic Mesh 6 gt Figure 8 37 Back Chassis Assembly Top Display Version Sec 2 8 28 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 7 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 2 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 5 and Microphone Mesh 6 from the microphone boot 4 3 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning Ensure the microphone is seated properly with the microphone boot opening 5 Remove the backer from th
298. ption being used When the radio is secure equipped KG2 algorithms name Encryption Type 2 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 2 or more algorithms are loaded KG3 algorithms name Encryption Type 3 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 3 or more algorithms are loaded KG4 algorithms name Encryption Type 4 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 4 or more algorithms are loaded KG5 algorithms name Encryption Type 5 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 5 or more algorithms are loaded KG6 algorithms name Encryption Type 6 Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure equipped and 6 or more algorithms are loaded number Model number The radio s model number as Always programmed in the codeplug Serial number The radio s serial number as programmed Always in the codeplug ESN The radio s unique electronic serial Always Sec 1 5 4 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version Table 5 2 Test Mode Displays Continued Name of Display Description Appears ROM Size The memory capacity of the host FLASH Always part FLASHcode The FLASH codes as programmed in the Always codeplug RF band 1 The radio s operating frequency Always Tuning Ver Version of Tuning codeplug Always Proc
299. r APX 6000 UHF1 Radios Specifications for APX 6000 UHF1 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Bandwidth 90 MHz RF Power 380 470 MHz 5W Power Supply Analog Sensitivity typical Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH 12 dB SINAD 0 224 yV Frequency Stability typical or Lithium lon Battery Li lon 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000035 Digital Sensitivity typical Battery Voltage 1 BER 0 298 uV Emission typical conducted 75 dBc Nominal 7 5 Vde 5 BER 0 2 uV Range 6 to 9 Vdc FM Hum and Noise typical Intermodulation typical 81 5 dB Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 5 dB Transmit Current Drain Typical 1960 mA 12 5 kHz 52 dB Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 242 mA Selectivity typical Standby Current Drain 133 mA 25 kHz Channel 77 dB Distortion typical 196 12 5 kHz Channel 66 7 dB Recommended Battery Modulation Limiting 25 kHz chnls 5 0 kHz Li lon Slim PMN4403_ Spurious Rejection typical 80 5 dB 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz or Li lon NNTN7038_ 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ Frequency Stability or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc or NiMH NNTN
300. r amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio 700 800 MHz Transmit Once a 700 800 MHz frequency for transmit has been selected the Trident IC and its accompanying logic circuitry enable the correct voltage controlled oscillator which then generates the desired transmit frequency This transmit signal is then routed to the TX buffer amplifier which amplifies the signal An RF switch then routes the signal to the 700 800 MHz Driver amplifier and then to the discrete final stage The signal is then filtered by a harmonic filter and passed through a RF switch into a directional coupler The Log Amp power detector monitors the output of the directional coupler and adjusts the control voltages to the driver amplifier and the discrete final Finally the RF signal comes to a Single Pole double throw SP2T RF switch which can route the power to the main antenna or to the Universal Connector port of the radio Digital ASTRO Mode of Operation In the ASTRO digital mode of operation the transmitted or received signal is limited to a discrete set of frequency deviation levels The receiver handles an ASTRO mode signal identically to an analog mode signal up to the point where the DSP decodes the received data In the ASTRO receive mode the DSP uses a different algorithm to recover data In the
301. r of MOTOROLA Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation maintenance or service of the Product MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment and all such equipment is expressly excluded from this warranty Because each system which may use the Product is unique MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range coverage or operation of the system as a whole under this warranty Il General Provisions This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLA S responsibilities regarding the Product Repair replacement or refund of the purchase price at MOTOROLA s option is the exclusive remedy THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT FOR ANY LOSS OF USE LOSS OF TIME INCONVENIENCE COMMERCIAL LOSS LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW vi Commercial Warranty
302. r the bottom on the sides of the battery Battery Latch other one on opposite side Figure 8 9 Squeezing the Release Latches 2 While squeezing the latches remove the battery by sliding it out as shown Qe Figure 8 10 Removing the Battery Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Universal Connector Cover Sec 1 8 11 8 6 Universal Connector Cover This section explains how to remove and attach the Universal Connector Cover 46 When the universal connector is not in use keep it covered with the Universal Connector Cover Caution 8 6 1 Remove Universal Connector Cover To remove the Universal Connector Cover 46 1 Unscrew the thumb screw If the screw is too tight a hex driver may be used NOTE Do not remove the screw It should remain captive in the cover Thumb Screw with Hex Head Socket Figure 8 11 Removing the Thumb Screw 2 Slightly swing the Universal Connector Cover away from radio before sliding it upward to disengage the hook feature 3 Pull the Universal Connector Cover away from the radio Sec 1 8 12 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Universal Connector Cover 8 6 2 Attach Universal Connector Cover To attach the Universal Connector Cover 46 1 Insert the hooked end of the cover into the pocket Engage the hook beneath the undercut and swing the cover down onto the radio Ensure the cover is seated properly and the screw is alig
303. ransmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance E Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter El Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Program AN EL PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 469 925 Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 2047 469 925 1196 1196 Figure 6 3 Typical Softpot Screen Adjusting the softpot value sends information to the radio to increase or decrease the voltage in the corresponding circuit For example left clicking the UP spin button in the New Softpot Value scroll box on the Reference Oscillator screen instructs the radio s microcomputer to increase the voltage across a varactor in the reference oscillator which increases the frequency In ALL cases the softpot value is just a relative number corresponding to a digital to analog D A generated voltage in the radio Perform the following procedures in the sequence indicated NOTE Some of the following screens may vary depending upon the radio under test and the version of tuner software you are using Refer to the software s online help Caution When keying the radio during a test always transmit into a dummy load Sec 2 6 4 Radio Alignment Procedures Radio Information 6 4 6 5 6 5 1 Radio Information Figure 6 4 shows a typical Radio Information screen This screen is informational onl
304. rd Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030_ Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014 Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X MNUE7365 Assembly RF Board UHF X X X NNTN7930_ User Guide CD APX 5000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green Note X ltem Included O Option available e Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories ASTRO APX 5000 700 800 Model Chart Sec 1 xi ASTRO APX 5000 700 800 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad H98UCD9PWS5 NI H98UCF9PW6 NI H98UCH9PW7 NI Non BT Models FCC ID AZ489FT
305. re Help Open zoue dy Save As Read Device Windows f Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File s lunas windows pl ihn Print T Navigation A X Tx Deviation Balance Softpot Configuration Mode Program ANE PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 PTT Tone Low O High x Frequency New Softpot Value 0 32767 123ABC1234 ars de mee Raa homain 764 0125 19593 19593 A Transmitter Alignments 19930 f LS Reference Ostillstor 769 0125 19930 J A Tx Power Characterization Points 775 9875 20592 20592 n T Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 794 0125 18793 18793 A de Tx Deviation Balance Performance Testing 809 0125 19380 19380 Le Bit Error Rate 20634 Transmitter Test Pattern E id _ al Ki Factory Override 851 0125 18525 18525 CH m 860 0125 18570 18570 m f CH 869 8875 18977 18977 lal m Figure 6 24 Transmit Deviation Balance Alignment Screen 700 800 MHz 9 Left click the PTT Tone High button 10 Adjust the softpot value until the measured deviation voltage when using the high tone is within 1 5 of the value observed when using the Low Tone 11 Left click the PTT Toggle to de key the radio 12 Repeat the steps 4 to 10 for all frequencies 13 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values Radio Alignment Procedures Front En
306. received correctly 09 10 Secure Hardware Error Turn the radio off then on 09 90 Secure Hardware Fatal Error Turn the radio off then on Hardware board absent Expansion board is not connected properly to the radio Ensure the Expansion Hardware board absent board is fixed in place then Man Down Hw error Note If the corrective action does not fix the failure send the radio to the depot 9 2 Operational Error Codes During radio operation the radio performs dynamic tests to determine if the radio is working properly Problems detected during these tests are presented as error codes on the radio s display The presence of an error code should prompt a user that a problem exists and that a service technician should be contacted Use Table 9 2 to aid in understanding particular operational error codes Table 9 2 Operational Error Code Displays Error Code Description Corrective Action FAIL 001 Synthesizer Out of Lock 1 Reprogram external codeplug 2 Send radio to depot FAIL 002 Selected Mode Zone Codeplug Reprogram external codeplug Checksum Error Basic Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Receiver Troubleshooting Table 9 3 lists the possible causes of and corrections for receiver problems Sec 1 9 3 Table 9 3 Receiver Troubleshooting Chart Symptom Possible Cause Correction or Test Measurements at Room Temperature Radio Dead Display Does Not Turn On
307. rence 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 56 8 dB 12 5 kHz 50 29 dB Distortion typical 1 57 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz Frequency Range 136 174 MHz RF Power 136 174 MHz 1 6 W Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnis 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting 25 kHz 75 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc ACPR typical Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Specifications for APX 5000 UHF1 Radios Specifications for APX 5000 UHF1 Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER Sec 1 xiii Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium lon Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 1960 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 242 mA Standby Current Drain 133 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMNA4403 or Li lon NNTN7038 or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon U
308. rence Oscillator Sikes LES t g En 400 025 3055 3055 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 411 025 3068 3068 Tx Deviation Balance r1 m Receiver Alignments 424 925 3084 3084 lu dz Rx Front End Filter euni 3094 Pi Performance Testing E E c Bit Error Rate 445 025 3104 3104 1 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 457 025 3116 3116 469 925 3131 3131 di Figure 6 10 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHF1 at Js APX Family Tuner j AA a Home Option Feature Help E Open diySave Jy Save As Read Device Windows 4Themes ei Print Ctri P Print Preview File Ta Device Gi Windows Themes Print fa Navigation H X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 123ABC1234 a Radio Information 450 025 UHF R2 3339 3339 Transmitter Alignments E 3350 m KEE 460 025 UHF R2 3350 m EA Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 3361 3361 TY Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 3375 3375 Tx Deviation Balance e e Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 3375 3375 3 d Rx Front End Filter S 3386 a Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 3386 E t EA Bit Error Rate 505 025 UHF R2 3395 3396
309. ress the Medallion 8 8 9 2 FM Label NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the FM Label 1 Scrape off the FM Label 47 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the FM Label is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Label in the recess Press the Label NOTE There are No Other serviceable components on the Main Housing Assembly M Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 2 8 31 8 8 10 Servicing Speaker Module J 1 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 2 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Speaker Module Seal 35 e EN bg NOTE For assembly ensure ECT the seal key feature is a N aligned on top as shown NN N Speaker Module 34 Figure 8 41 Speaker Module 8 8 10 1 Servicing Microphone Membrane Microphone Mesh NOTE When servicing microphone membrane microphone mesh part will also need to be replaced 1 Carefully peel off the Microphone Membrane 5 and Microphone Mesh 6 from the Speaker Module 2 Clean the area once the Microphone Membrane and Microphone Mesh are removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Ensure nothing comes in contact with the microphone while cleaning 3 Remove the backer from the Microphone Membrane 4 Carefully place the Microphone Membrane centered on the top surface of the microphone opening with no ripples
310. rews have been removed both Thermal Pads 10 11 should be replaced Sec 1 8 14 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Do not touch either the speaker cone or the Vacuum Port Take extra precaution to make sure neither the speaker nor the breather pad is damaged Caution 8 7 2 Removal of the Speaker Module J 1 Remove the top two screws 42 as shown in Figure 8 16 Top Screws 42 2 Carefully pick out the Speaker Module 34 with the Black Stick and swing it out of the Main Chassis Assembly E as shown in Figure 8 17 Speaker Cone N Be careful not to damage the speaker cone or the Vacuum Port during the disassembly process Caution Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 1 8 15 8 7 3 Removal of the Expansion Board Assembly H 1 Using the Black Stick unplug the two flex connectors located on the left and right side of the Expansion Board Assembly 33 Unfold and straighten the flex located on the right side as shown in Figure 8 18 Figure 8 18 Remove Flex Connectors and Expansion Board Assembly 2 Remove the Expansion Board Assembly H by gently lifting up the right side of the PCB as shown in Figure 8 18 3 If the VOCON Board Assembly D is to be removed from the radio then unplug the Control Top Assembly flex as shown in Figure 8 18 4 Ifthe RF Board Assembly C is to be removed use the Black Stick to unplug the antenna coax cable from t
311. ries and other applicable accessories ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF2 Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000XE UHF2 Model Chart MODEL NUMBER Top Display Model Dual Display Limited Keypad Dual Display Full Keypad Non BT Models FCC ID BT Models FCC ID MODEL DESCRIPTION H98SDD9PW5_N H98SDF9PW6_N H98SDH9PW7_N AZ489F T4858 AZ489FT4903 UHF2 APX 6000XE Top Display Model Dual Display Model Limited Keypad Dual Display Model Full Keypad X X X NHN7033_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis NHN7042_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Yellow NHN7043_ Sub Assembly Main Chassis Green X X NHN7020_ Display Color X X X NHN7034_ Grille Speaker Black NHN7036_ Grille Speaker Yellow NHN7037_ Grille Speaker Green X X X 0375962B01 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 30 1 mm X X X 0375962B02 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 24 45 mm X X X 0375962B03 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 9 2 mm X X X 0375962B04 Screw Chassis M2 5 x 7 0 mm X X X 1575250H01 Cover Universal Connector X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacu
312. rly sealed watertight radio should have minimal change in pressure during the test Before starting the vacuum test Remove the battery and antenna Remove the Universal Connector Cover 46 or any other accessories to expose the universal connector NOTE Refer to the exploded view diagrams and parts lists found in Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists on page 2 10 1 Sec 2 8 42 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility 8 10 7 1 Vacuum Tool Setup 1 Attach one end of the hose to the Vacuum Pump Attach the other side of the hose to the Vacuum Adapter 2 Tool Leak Test i Block the open end of the Vacuum Adapter ii Pull the knob on the Vacuum Pump to create vacuum iii Pump atleast 15 inHg iv Watch the gauge for a minute If there is any loss of vacuum repair or replace the tool 3 Ensure that the seal is attached to the Vacuum Adapter 8 10 7 2 Test Procedure Figure 8 58 Attaching Vacuum Adapter 1 Attach the Vacuum Adapter onto the radio in the same manner as a radio battery Ensure both latches are clicked into place NOTE Vacuum Port door must be opened and held out of the way prior to assembly of the Vacuum Adaptor 2 Pullthe knob on the Vacuum Pump to create vacuum The vacuum test pressure should be between 5 7 inHg Ensure that the vacuum pressure NEVER exceeds 7 inHg The radio has pressure sensitive components that can be damaged if the pressure ex
313. rophone boot 4 out of the Back Chassis opening Pinch the sides of the microphone boot and carefully slide out the microphone cartridge Make sure the flex is not stretched Insert the microphone cartridge into the new microphone boot slot using the black stick Make sure the flex is not stretched Ensure the microphone cartridge is seated properly with the microphone boot Ensure the microphone boot is correctly seated with the chassis opening Follow Section 8 8 7 1 steps 5 8 to complete assembling and placing the microphone mesh and membrane 8 8 7 3 Servicing Color Display 1 2 Disconnect the Back Chassis Flex from the back of the Color Display 8 Gently pry the Color Display out of the Back Chassis Assembly 3 by using the Black Stick against the white section of the frame upper right corner at the back of the Color Display Remove any remnants of the Display s Pad if it does not come off completely with the Color Display from the Back Chassis Assembly Clean the area to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris once the Display is completely removed Ensure there are no foreign material on the new Color Display or the Lens 7 Remove the liner from the new Color Display and seat it into the Back Chassis Assembly Ensure the Display is oriented correctly and seated properly Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 27 8 8 7 4 Servicing the Main Lens NOTE Pri
314. rs Press e 136 1 appears release 136 0 appears 5 2 4 RGB Test Mode To perform the RGB Color Test 2 00 mS OV ON gt Press and release Top Button Orange button Press any key Crosstalk test patterns appears Press any key White color test appears Press any key Red color horizontal lines appears Press any key until all 13 red color horizontal lines appears Press any key Green color vertical line appears Press any key until all 13 green color vertical lines appears Press any key Black color test appears Press any key Blue color test appears Press any key Vendor specific display test appears Press any key Test completed appears Sec 1 5 7 Sec 1 5 8 5 2 5 5 3 5 3 1 Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version CID Test Mode To perform the CID Test 1 Press and release Top Button Orange button all pixels are on 2 Press any key Checker box 1 test appears 3 Press any key Checker box 2 test appears 4 Press any key 4 bolder test test appears on the top display 5 Press any key Test completed appears Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version This section provides instructions for performing tests in non display radio test mode Access the Test Mode To enter the display radio test mode 1 Turn the radio on 2 Within 10 seconds after SELF TEST is complete press Side Button 2 five times in S
315. rystal solution between them An electric current passed through the liquid causes the crystals to align so that light cannot pass through them Local oscillator 150 baud digital data sent to the radio during trunked operation while receiving audio See low speed handshake SPI data line from a peripheral to the MCU SPI data line from the MCU to a peripheral See microcontroller unit Motorola Digital Communications A software activated feature shown at the bottom of the display Selection of a feature is controlled by the programming of the buttons on the side of the radio See Megahertz One million cycles per second Used especially as a radio frequency unit Also written as uC A microprocessor that contains RAM and ROM components as well as communications and programming components and peripherals See Master In Slave Out Sec 3 Glossary 6 Term mode mode slaving monitoring MOSI multiplexer MUX Network Access Code NiCd NiMH non tactical revert OMPAC open architecture oscillator OSW OTAR outbound signaling word over molded pad array carrier over the air rekeying PA page paging PC Board Glossary Definition A programmed combination of operating parameters for example a channel or talkgroup A radio programmed to automatically provide the proper operation for a given selected mode Used in conventional operation where the programmed monitor button
316. s MHZ cccecscccceeseeeccceeeeseeecneeeseeeaceeaeeseeaceaeeeenecaaeaeeseeaceeeeseeeeeesaeeneaes 1 5 5 Table 5 4 Test Environments ET 1 5 6 Table 5 5 ERT 1 5 8 Table 5 6 Test Frequencies MHZ n ri EEA T ELTE EEES AEA thereto EAN RE EEE 1 5 10 Table 5 7 Receiver Performance Check 1 5 12 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels ceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseees 1 5 12 Table 5 9 Transmitter Performance Checks APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li 1 5 13 Table 5 10 Transmitter Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels APX 5000 APX 6000 APX GOD0Li cee ce eee ee ceeecee eee cece eee ee ee eeaeaaeaeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeesenccasaeeaeeeeeeeeteteees 1 5 14 Table 6 1 Base Frequencies 0 ccceceeceeeeeececeecee cee eeee cece ea ceaeaaeaecceeeseeeeeeeesesenaaeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesenea 1 6 7 Table 6 2 Reference Oscillator Alignment nennen 1 6 7 Table 7 1 Kit Numbers for Secure Enabled Expansion BoardS oooocccccccccccnnccncononnnononnnnnnnannnnnnnannnnnos 1 7 1 Table 8 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Partial Exploded View Parts List 1 8 5 Table 8 2 Required Tools and Supplies 1 8 6 Table 8 3 Required Tools and Supplies 1 8 6 Table 9 1 Power Up Error Code Display 1 9 1 Table 9 2 Operational Error Code Displays sssssssssesseseeeenemee emere nennen 1 9 2 Table 9 3 Receiver Troubleshooting Chart 1 9 3 Table
317. s a second 625 us time slot based on a pseudo random sequence If a packet is not received on one channel the packet will be retransmitted on another channel The Bluetooth IC sends data to the AVR32 processor that is also located on the expansion board over an HCI UART link The AVR32 processor communicates to the OMAP processor on the VoCon board through a dedicated USB port Sec 2 3 12 Basic Theory of Operation Controller Section The Bluetooth feature is accompanied by a Low Frequency LF detection circuit that is also located on the expansion board The LF circuit provides the ability of a secure pairing connection with a Bluetooth accessory Once a radio has the Bluetooth feature enabled a user can tap their LF enabled Bluetooth audio accessory with the radio at the pairing spot to establish a secure Bluetooth connection The LF circuit uses a 125 kHz radiated signal to communicate the secure pairing information between the Bluetooth accessory and low frequency receiver The low frequency receiver is programmed by the AVR32 processor through a dedicated SPI bus and transfers the pairing data through a dedicated UART There is a digital accelerometer on the expansion board that detects the 3 axis force of gravity which can be used to determine the radio s orientation The accelerometer s position is communicated to the AVR32 processor through a SPI bus Chapter 4 Recommended Test Equipment and Service Aids This chapter provides lists
318. s and Parts Lists on page 1 10 1 and the diagrams that accompany the text Items in parentheses throughout this chapter refer to item numbers in the exploded view diagrams and their associated parts lists This chapter also has procedures for removing and installing the APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio s standard accessories and changing the Volume and Frequency Knobs Exploded View Main Subassemblies When servicing electronics always ensure that you are properly grounded with antistatic grounding system approved for electronics handling Caution This section contains the APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio partially exploded views NOTES Refer to Figure 8 1 on page 1 8 2 the Partial Exploded View and Table 8 1 on page 1 8 5 the Partial Exploded View Parts List Letters in parentheses refer to item letters in Figure 8 1 on page 1 8 2 and Table 8 1 on page 1 8 5 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Exploded View Main Subassemblies Sec 1 8 2 amp 0 00 Figure 8 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Dual Display Partial Exploded View Sec 1 8 3 s Exploded View Main Subassemblies embly Reassembly Procedure Disass JD oy quom S FA 7 Ly Figure 8 2
319. s been submerged in water shake the radio briskly so that any water that is trapped inside the speaker grille and microphone port can be removed Otherwise the water will decrease the audio quality of the radio Chapter 3 Basic Theory of Operation 3 1 This chapter discusses the basic operational theory of the ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio which is a wideband synthesized radio available in the VHF 136 174 MHz UHF1 380 470 MHz UHF2 450 520 MHz and 764 870 MHz frequency bands All ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radios are capable of both analog operation 12 5 kHz or 25 kHz bandwidths ASTRO mode digital operation 12 5 kHz only and X2 TDMA mode 25 kHz only Major Assemblies The ASTRO APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li radio includes the following major assemblies See Figure 3 1 VOCON Board contains a dual core processor which includes both the microcontroller unit MCU and a digital signal processor DSP core the processor s memory devices an audio and power supply support integrated circuit IC a digital support IC and external audio power amplifier Transceiver XCVR Board contains all transmit receive and frequency generation circuitry including the digital receiver back end IC and the reference oscillator Expansion Board Mace contains the internal audio power amplifier circuitry and a Type III secure IC Mace with Apps contains the internal audio power amplifier circ
320. sembly D is to be removed from the radio then unplug the Control Top Assembly flex as shown in Figure 8 20 7 Ifthe RF Board Assembly C is to be removed use the Black Stick to unplug the antenna coax cable from the RF Board Assembly as shown in Figure 8 21 Figure 8 21 Remove Antenna Coax Cable Connector 8 Flip the radio over Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 2 8 17 8 7 4 Removal of the Main Housing Assembly AL Mi 1 Gently stretch both sides of the Main Housing Assembly 1 outwards to clear the radio Then lift it over the radio as shown in Figure 8 22 NOTE For Top Display version ensure the Belt Clip Cover 53 has been removed Stretch Outwards 4 WP LA AY M A oof Figure 8 22 Remove Housing 8 7 5 Removal of the Back Chassis Assembly B N 1 Dual Display versions Gently separate the Back Chassis Assembly B from the Main Chassis Assembly E to allow access to disconnect the two flex connections between both chassis These connectors are located near the top of the radio Use the Black Stick to disconnect the connectors as shown in Figure 8 23 Top Display version Back Chassis Assembly N has no connections and can be removed by just separating the the two chassis apart dr Pull the flex connectors vertically upwards by using black stick Disconnect at two connector locations shown in Figure 8 23 Caution Connectors WES QNS A UT 2 N D
321. sher 32 onto the Volume Shaft See Figure 8 44 3 Tighten the Volume Spanner Nut 31 by hand first to avoid cross threading Then torque the nut with the Volume Spanner Bit at 8 in Ibs 4 Place the Antenna washer 26 onto the antenna threaded hub as shown in Figure 8 44 5 Tighten the Antenna Spanner Nut 27 by hand first to avoid cross threading Then torque the nut with the Antenna Spanner Bit at 16 in Ibs 6 Slide and ensure the Torque Adder 30 is fully seated onto the Volume Potentiometer s Hub 7 Align the D shaped part of the Volume Shaft with the D shape hole in the Volume Knob 29 and press the Volume Knob into place 8 Align the D shaped part of the Frequency Shaft with the D shape hole in the Frequency Knob 28 and press the Frequency Knob into place Sec 1 8 34 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Reassembly 8 9 1 3 Assemble VOCON Board Assembly D Figure 8 45 Insert VOCON Board 1 Inspect the Main Chassis 15 sealing surfaces to make sure there is no surface irregularities such as scratches or indentations Clean any debris or other foreign material 2 Orient the Main Chassis 15 with the Frequency Knob 28 on top Insert the VOCON Board Assembly 14 into the chassis starting at a 45 angle and rotate the board into place Ensure the control top flex is located below the PCB and is not being pinched between the PCB and the casting See Figure 8 45 3 Tighten the Vocon Board screw by ha
322. splay Bar Graphs programmed performance UHF1 0 8 ppm Freq Selected radio TX conventional check 289 Hz freq channel UHF2 0 8 ppm 329 Hz 700 800 MHz 0 8 ppm 709 Hz Rated Audio RF Control Gen As above PTT to OFF Set volume control to Output Level 47 dBm center 3 74 Vrms Freq Selected radio RX Load Selector A freq Mod 1 kHz tone 3 kHz dev Meter AC Volts Distortion As above except As above As above Distortion 3 096 Meter Ext Dist Sensitivity As above except As above As above RF input to be lt 0 35 uV SINAD Meter SINAD Noise Squelch Set as for rated audio Out of TEST As above Set volume control to Threshold check MODE select a 3 74 Vrms only radios conventional Set RF level to 130 dBm with system and raise until radio conventional unsquelches system need to be tested Unsquelch to occur at lt 0 25 uV Preferred SINAD 6 8 dB See Table 5 4 on page 2 5 6 Table 5 8 Receiver Tests for ASTRO Conventional Channels Test Name System Analyzer Radio Test Set Comments Bit Error rate Mode Proj 25 Std Radio Tuner PTT to OFF BER 0 01 BER Floor RF Control Gen Software Bit Error center Use test setup shown in Output Level 47 dBm Rate screen is Figure 6 1 on page 2 6 1 Proj 25 Dev 2 83 kHz required Code 1011 Hz PAT Reference As above lower the As above As above Output level lt 0 35 uV Sensitivity output level until 5 BER 1
323. ss Caution Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Sec 2 8 15 8 7 3 Removal of the Expansion Board Assembly H 1 Using the Black Stick pull up the locking feature side of the Expander Board Support 61 Be careful not to damage the flex or any component during the process f 20 No ERE Capacitor to avoid Expander Board Support a p pp Figure 8 18 Pull Expander Board Support Opt Expansion Board 2 Rotate the Expander Board Support vertically 3 Remove the rounded portion from the Expander side opening of the vacuum test compartment prc Capacitor to avoid Mo ic Rounded portion of Ov Expander Board Support Figure 8 19 Remove Expander Board Support N Be careful not to damage the capacitor during the disassembly process Caution 4 Using the Black Stick unplug the two flex connectors located on the left and right side of the Expansion Board Assembly 33 Unfold and straighten the flex located on the right side as shown in Figure 8 20 Sec 2 8 16 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Control Top Assembly Flex Flex Connectors Figure 8 20 Remove Flex Connectors and Expansion Board Assembly 5 Remove the Expansion Board Assembly H by gently lifting up the right side of the PCB as shown in Figure 8 20 6 Ifthe VOCON Board As
324. steps 2 4 for all frequencies 6 Left click the Program All button on the screen to save the tuned values in the radio f AA dy gt APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Open dy Save dy Save As g Read Device Windows File Tx Device a Navigation Softpot Configuration Mode Help 7 Themes Windows Themes amp y A X Rx Front End Filter E 123ABC1234 Radio Information Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance E Receiver Alignments E Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override x ee Print Ctrl P Program All Radio RSSI Autotune Test Signal Frequency 160 775 L Print Preview G Test Signal Amplitude 4 0 Frequency 160 775 170 775 180 775 191 775 205 675 215 775 225 775 237 775 250 675 Softpot Value 960 1190 1295 1535 1920 2130 2335 2600 2920 New Softpot Value 0 4095 aen 1190 1295 1535 1920 2130 2335 2600 2920 Figure 6 25 Front End Filter Alignment Screen UHF1 E JE JE JE JE JE JE E E Sec 1 6 20 Radio Alignment Procedures Front End Filter Alignment Home APX Family Tuner Option Feature Help Open BySave dy Save As Read Device 3Windows Z Themes eig Print
325. successfully you will hear On single key radios a short tone On multikey radios an alternating tone The secure kits for APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li are identified by the following kit numbers Table 7 1 Kit Numbers for Secure Enabled Expansion Boards Kit Number Description NNTN8171 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li DVP XL Expansion Board NNTN8172 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li DVP XL Expansion Board with Apps NNTN8173 AES Expansion Board NNTN8174 AES Expansion Board with Apps NNTN8175 DES DES XL DES OFB Expansion Board NNTN8176 DES DES XL DES OFB Expansion Board with Apps NNTN8177 Expansion Board NNTN8178 Expansion Board with Apps Sec 1 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 1 Encryption Multikey Feature Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with multiple encryption keys It can support two or more encryption algorithms simultaneously e g AES and DES XL D Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied strapped on a one per channel basis In addition the radio can have operator selectable keys operator selectable indices and operator selectable key erasure If talkgroups are enabled in conventional then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per talkgroup or announcement group bas
326. t setup shown in Low use Low Symbol Rate P Figure 6 1 on page 1 6 1 These tests require a communications system analyzer with the ASTRO 25 test options Chapter 6 Radio Alignment Procedures This chapter describes both receiver and transmitter radio alignment procedures 6 1 Test Setup A personal computer PC and tuner software are required to align the radio Refer to the applicable manual for installation and setup procedures for the software To perform the alignment procedures the radio must be connected to the PC and to a universal test set The radio alignment test setup is shown in Figure 6 1 APX 7 5V UNIVERSAL BATTERY ADAPTER BATTERY 66009254001 IL ELIMINATOR RLN4510_ SMA BNC 5880384G68 RADIO COMPUTER Figure 6 1 Radio Alignment Test Setup SYSTEM ANALYZER SUB FAD OR COUNTER TRANSMIT gt 30 dB PAD WATTMETER BNC lt RF GENERATOR RECEIVE SET TO APPROX 8mV FOR Tx AUDIO IN TX AUDIO GENERATOR 4 TEST SET IF RLN4460 RX SINAD METER AC VOLTMETER PROGRAM TEST CABLE MEASURE 3 74Vrms FOR Rx PMKN4013 DM Caution These radio alignment procedures should only be attempted by qualified service personnel Failure to perform
327. th the Battery removed and the primary loudspeaker side of the radio facing you remove the center two screws 41 and swing out Speaker Grille Assembly K as shown in Figure 8 14 taking care to ensure the sound dampener 59 stays with the Speaker Grill Assembly Center Screws 41 Vacuum Port Seal Fi A rz K WY WAI Figure 8 14 Remove Center Screws NOTE Vacuum Port seal can be removed with the left center screw removed 2 Remove the bottom two screws 43 if the Main Housing Assembly A L M is to be removed Refer Figure 8 15 Bottom Screws 43 Figure 8 15 Remove Bottom Screws NOTE Once the screws have been removed both Thermal Pads 10 11 should be replaced Sec 2 8 14 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Radio Disassembly Take extra precaution to make sure neither the speaker nor the breather pad is damaged d Do not touch either the speaker cone or the Vacuum Port Caution 8 7 2 Removal of the Speaker Module J 1 Remove the top two screws 42 as shown in Figure 8 16 Kg e K JS Top Screws 42 Speaker Cone BAN Figure 8 16 Remove Top Screws 2 Carefully pick out the Speaker Module 34 with the Black Stick and swing it out of the Main Chassis Assembly E as shown in Figure 8 17 Speaker Cone ON NS X o XA NS Figure 8 17 Remove Speaker Module Be careful not to damage the speaker cone or the Vacuum Port during the disassembly proce
328. the Back Chassis Assembly B N for any damage or foreign material Inspect the seal on the Speaker Module J for any damage or foreign material Inspect the Battery Connector Seal 13 on the RF Board Assembly C for any damage PON Inspect the mating seal surfaces on the Main Chassis 15 for all of the above seals for damage or foreign material that might prevent the seals from sealing properly Continue reassembling the radio according to section 8 9 on page 1 8 32 Tighten all hardware that was loosened or removed Vacuum Test The Vacuum Test uses a Vacuum Pump to create a negative pressure condition inside the radio The gauge measures this pressure and is used to monitor any pressure changes in the radio A properly sealed watertight radio should have minimal change in pressure during the test Before starting the vacuum test Remove the battery and antenna Remove the Universal Connector Cover 46 or any other accessories to expose the universal connector NOTE Refer to the exploded view diagrams and parts lists found in Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists on page 1 10 1 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility Sec 1 8 41 8 10 7 1 Vacuum Tool Setup 1 Attach one end of the hose to the Vacuum Pump Attach the other side of the hose to the Vacuum Adapter 2 ToolLeak Test i Block the open end of the Vacuum Adapter ii Pull the knob on the Vacuum Pump to create vacuum
329. the vacuum test has been completed Pressure testing involves creating a positive pressure condition inside the radio submerging the radio in water and observing the radio for a stream of bubbles leak Since all areas of the radio are being checked observe the entire unit carefully for the possibility of multiple leaks before completing this test NOTES When Radio is placed under the water there will be some air trapped which will be released This is not a failure Refer to the exploded view diagrams and parts lists found in Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists on page 1 10 1 If the radio is still set up from vacuum test skip steps 1 through 4 To conduct the pressure test 1 Ensure that an seal is attached to the Vacuum Adapter 2 Attach the Vacuum Adapter onto the radio in the same manner as a radio battery Ensure both the latches are clicked into place 3 Attach one end of the hose to the Pressure Pump Attach the other side of the hose to the Vacuum Adapter 4 Operate the pump until the gauge reads approximately 1 psig Pressure must remain between 0 5 psig and 1 5 psig Pressure lower then 0 5 psig may allow water into the radio Caution which will damage the radio Ensure that the pressure NEVER exceeds 1 5 psig The radio has pressure sensitive components that can be damaged if the pressure exceeds this limit Caution 5 Maintain the pressure around 1 psig and submerge the radio into
330. ting otherwise the sound may be distorted until the water has evaporated or is dislodged from these areas Sec 1 8 40 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Ensuring Radio Submergibility 8 10 4 Specialized Test Equipment This section summarizes the specialized test equipment necessary for testing the integrity of ASTRO APX 5000 R APX 6000 R radios To ensure that the radio is truly a watertight unit special testing test procedures and specialized test equipment are required The special testing involves a vacuum check of the radio and pressure testing troubleshooting for water leaks if the vacuum check fails The specialized test equipment is needed to perform the vacuum check and pressure testing if required 8 10 4 1 Vacuum Pump Kit NLN9839_ The Vacuum Pump Kit includes a Vacuum Pump with gauge and a Vacuum Hose The Vacuum Adapter p n 66009259001 which connects the vacuum pump to the radio must be ordered separately 8 10 4 2 Pressure Pump Kit NTN4265__ 8 10 5 8 10 6 8 10 7 The Pressure Pump Kit includes a Pressure Pump with gauge and a Pressure Hose As with the Vacuum Pump Kit above the Vacuum Adapter connects the pressure pump to the radio Disassembly Disassemble the radio according to section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Reassembly dr Do not reassemble the radio without first performing the following preliminary inspection procedure Caution To reassemble the radio 1 Inspect the seal on
331. tion Analyzer Press the green Automatic Operation button on the analyzer Press the FREQ key Type 7 1 followed by SPCL button to set the 8901B modulation analyzer for maximum accuracy To align the reference oscillator Select the Reference Oscillator alignment screen See Figure 6 5 to Figure 6 8 APX Family Tuner AA Qe Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As L Read Device Windows Themes ee Print Ctrl P Print Preview File G Device m Windows Themes Print e Navigation v A X Reference Oscillator Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 173 975 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 2047 E 123ABC1234 em 7 xal 173 975 1150 1150 _ A Radio Information El Transmitter Alignments Tx Power Characterization Points Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance El Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 5 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen VHF Sec 1 6 6 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Figure 6 6 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen UHF1 Figure 6 7 Reference Oscillator Alignment Screen UHF2 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 7 Y APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open dy Save dy Save As d Read Device Z amp Windows T
332. to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone 7 5 2 Method 2 All Keys Erased To erase all encryption keys at one time With the radio on press and hold the Top Side button and while holding this button down press the Top button NOTE DO NOT press the Top button before pressing the Top Side button unless you are in an emergency situation This sends an emergency alarm Before the keys are erased the display shows PLEASE WAIT When all the encryption keys have been erased the display shows ALL KEYS ERASED Chapter 8 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures 8 1 This chapter provides detailed procedures for disassembling reassembling and ensuring submergibility of the APX 6000XE radios When performing these procedures refer to Chapter 10 Exploded Views and Parts Lists on page 2 10 1 and the diagrams that accompany the text Items in parentheses throughout this chapter refer to item numbers in the exploded view diagrams and their associated parts lists This chapter also has procedures for removing and installing the APX 6000XE radio s standard accessories and changing the Volume and Frequency Knobs APX 6000XE Exploded View Main Subassemblies When servicing electronics always ensure that you are pro
333. tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Select an Encryption Index This feature lets the user select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio For example the radio could have a group of three keys structured to one index and another group of three different keys structured to another index Changing indices makes the radio automatically switch from one set of keys to the other Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied will now have the equivalent new key instead Use the Menu To select an index using the menu 1 2 Press P until the display shows KSet Press RN Ell or directly below KSet The display shows the last user selected and stored index Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press 8 KA or directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press fm the PTT button or El EEE or E directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Sec 2 7
334. tor X X X 43009291001 Insert Universal Connector X 1575356H01 Cover Belt Clip Top Display X X X 75009418001 Pad Controls Flex Support X X X 3271829H02 Seal Battery Connector X X X 3275623B03 Pad Thermal Outer X X X 32009356002 Seal Vacuum Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977 Std Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display X NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X X NUE7366 Assembly RF Board UHF2 X X X PMLN5335 User Guide CD APX 6000 NHN7022_ Grille Speaker Green NHN7023_ Grille Speaker Yellow e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Ass
335. ttery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15 7 oz 445 g 21 1 oz 559 g 22 3 oz 631 g Frequency Range 380 470 MHz Bandwidth 90 MHz Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 224 uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 298 uV 5 BER 0 2 uV Intermodulation typical 81 5 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 77 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 66 7 dB Spurious Rejection typical 80 5 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 53 5 dB 12 5 kHz 47 4 dB Distortion typical 0 91 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz TRANSMITTER Frequency Range 380 470 MHz RF Power 380 470 MHz BW Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 0 000035 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 49 5 dB 12 5 kHz 52 dB Distortion typical 1 25 kHz chnls 5 0 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting ACPR typical 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 68 dBc Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Sec 1 xxviii Specifications for APX 6000Li 7 800 MHz Radios Specifications for APX 6000Li 7 800 MHz Radios All specifications are per Telecommunications Industri
336. uccession The radio shows a series of displays that give information regarding various version numbers and subscriber specific information The displays are described in Table 5 5 Table 5 5 Test Mode Displays Name of Display Description Appears Service The literal string indicates the radio has Always entered test mode Host version The version of host firmware is displayed Always DSP version The version of DSP firmware is displayed Always Secure version Version of the encryption software When the radio is secure equipped KGI algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 1 equipped KG2 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 2 equipped and 2 or more algorithms are loaded KG3 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 3 equipped and 3 or more algorithms are loaded KG4 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 4 equipped and 4 or more algorithms are loaded KG5 algorithms name Type of encryption being used When the radio is secure Encryption Type 5 equipped and 5 or more algorithms are loaded Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Top Display Version Sec 1 5 9 Table 5 5 Test Mode Displays Continued Name of Display Description Appears KG6 algorithms name Encryption Type 6 Type of encryption being
337. uest to its internal FLASH memory The MACE encryption processor is located on the expansion board The power and most clocks to the controller devices are provided by the MAKO IC and external switching and linear regulators on board A Complex Programmable Logic Array CPLD IC divides the 24 576 MHz clock from MAKO to source OMAP s 32 kHz Real Time Clock and MACE s 4 MHz main clock OMAP s main clock is supplied externally from an on board 12 MHz crystal The radio has two internal microphones and an internal speaker as well as available microphone and speaker connections for external accessories The internal 4 Ohm speaker is located opposite to the main display and keypad of the radio The internal speaker is driven by a Class D audio amplifier located on the expansion board that is capable of delivering a rated power of 0 5 W The external accessory speaker is driven by a Class AB audio amplifier on the MAKO IC that is capable of delivering 0 5 W of power into a 16 Ohm load Both speaker paths use the CODEC for volume control and to convert the audio signal from digital to analog Both internal and external microphones use the CODEC s ADC to deliver digital audio samples to the DSP controller The user interface block consists of a top and main or data side display a keypad top controls and the accessory side connector The side connector Universal Connector provides audio USB RS232 and RF communication for accessories All signals to and
338. uitry a combination Global Positioning System GPS Bluetooth 2 1 IC and support circuitry a 3 axes digital accelerometer an e MMC NAND flash and a Type III secure IC Top Display 112 pixels x 32 pixels transflective monochrome liquid crystal display LCD Control Top contains five switches On Off amp Volume Knob a 16 position Channel Frequency Knob with concentric 2 position switch for Secure Enable Disable operation a 3 position toggle switch for Zone Selection and a push button switch used for Emergency calling The control top also includes an TX RX LED that is solid amber upon receive red on PTT and blinks amber on secure TX RX Front Display Dual Display Version only 130 pixels x 130 pixels transflective color LCD Keypad Dual Display Version Only Dual Display version Limited Kaypad Version has a 3 x 2 Menu keypad with 4 way navigation button and Full Keypad Version has a 3 x 4 alphanumeric keypad Sec 1 3 2 Antenna a Transceiver Board 40 Basic Theory of Operation Analog Mode of Operation Bluetooth Antenna Expansion 16 External Accessory Connector Board External Antenna 80 22 Front Display 20 Keypad VOCON Board 50 20 Top Display Controls Top 30 Figure 3 1 APX 5000 APX 6000 APX 6000Li Overall Block Diagram 3 2 Analog Mode of Operation This section provides an overview of
339. um Port X X X 33009261001 Label Grille Top APX 6000 X X X 33009273001 Label FM External X X X 33009273002 Label FM Internal X X X 75009299002 Pad Thermal Inner X X X 07009369001 Support Expander PCB O O O HLN5978_ Opt Expansion Board Kit X X X HLN5977_ Std Expansion Board Kit xX X X HLN5979_ Assembly VOCON Board X NHN7024_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Black e NHN7025_ Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Yellow e NHN7026 Assembly Main Housing Dual Display Full Keypad Green X NHN7027 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad e NHN7028 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Yellow e NHN7029 Assmbly Main Housing Dual Display Limited Keypad Green X NHN7030 Assembly Main Housing Top Display e NHN7031 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Yellow e NHN7032 Assembly Main Housing Top Display Green X X X NHN7016_ Assembly Speaker Module X X NHN7013_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Dual Display NHN7014_ Sub Assembly Back Chassis Top Display X X NUE7366_ Assembly RF Board UHF2 X X PMLN5817 User Guide CD APX 6000XE Item Included Option available OXZ x xx nonu Option available Can be serviced in depot and ordered thru AAD Refer Appendix A for antennas batteries and other applicable accessories Sec 2 18 ASTRO APX 6000XE 700 800 Model Chart ASTRO APX 6000XE 700
340. umber of the desired key NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press RN KA or directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press f the PTT button or EN KA or ER directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Select an Encryption Index This feature lets the user select one or more groups of several encryption keys from among the available keys stored in the radio For example the radio could have a group of three keys structured to one index and another group of three different keys structured to another index Changing indices makes the radio automatically switch from one set of keys to the other Every channel to which one of the original keys was tied will now have the equivalent new key instead Use the Menu To select an index using the menu 1 2 Press P until the display shows KSet Press RN Ell or directly below KSet The display shows the last user selected and stored index Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press 8 KA or directly below the desir
341. unications Industries Association TIA 603 unless otherwise noted GENERAL RECEIVER TRANSMITTER Temperature Range Operating 30 C to 60 C Storage 40 C to 85 C Power Supply Nickel Metal Hydride Battery NiMH or Lithium Ion Battery Li lon Battery Voltage Nominal 7 5 Vdc Range 6 to 9 Vdc Transmit Current Drain Typical 700 MHz 1410 mA 800 MHz 1696 mA Receive Current Drain Rated Audio 250 mA Standby Current Drain 142 mA Recommended Battery Li lon Slim PMN4403_ or Li lon NNTN7038_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap NNTN7034_ or Li lon Ultra High Cap and FM NNTN7033 or NiMH NNTN7037 or NiMH Ruggedized NNTN7573 or NiMH FM Factory Mutual NNTN7036 or Li lon Ruggedized and FM NNTN8092 or NiMH Ruggedized and FM NNTN7035 FM Intrinsically Safe Dimensions H x W x D Without Battery Radio Only H 5 50 139 7 mm W1 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 60 40 5 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With Slim Li lon Battery H 5 76 146 3 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm With NiMH Battery H 7 76 197 1 mm W 2 98 75 7 mm 2 37 60 2 mm D 1 65 41 8 mm 1 37 34 7 mm Note H Height W Width D Depth 1 Width Top Width PTT 2 Depth Bottom Depth PTT Weight w o Antenna Less Battery With Li lon Slim With Li lon Ultra High Cap With NiMH 10 7 oz 303 g 15
342. ure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 5 1 Figure 6 1 Figure 6 2 Figure 6 3 Figure 6 4 Figure 6 5 Figure 6 6 Figure 6 7 Figure 6 8 Figure 6 9 Figure 6 10 Figure 6 11 Figure 6 12 Figure 6 13 Figure 6 14 Figure 6 15 Figure 6 16 Figure 6 17 Figure 6 18 Figure 6 19 Figure 6 20 Figure 6 21 Figure 6 22 Figure 6 23 Figure 6 24 Figure 6 25 Figure 6 26 Figure 6 27 Figure 6 28 Figure 6 29 Figure 6 30 Figure 6 31 Figure 6 32 Figure 6 33 Figure 6 34 Figure 8 1 Figure 8 2 Figure 8 3 Figure 8 4 APX 6000XE Overall Block Diagram sse eene nnns 2 3 2 Receiver Block Diagram VHB sse eene ener enne 2 3 3 Receiver Block Diagram UHF 1 eeeeesiieesee isses essei ee nennen nennen nnd nd 2 3 3 Receiver Block Diagram UHF2 sse emen nennen 2 3 4 Receiver Block Diagram 700 800 MHz 2 3 4 GPS Diagralris ich teen tie tec edem i e eU Ere E Tau ddp tne c n 2 3 5 Transceiver VHF Block Diagram eee nnne 2 3 7 Transceiver UHF 1 Block Diagram sse eem nennen 2 3 7 Transceiver UHF2 Block Diagram ssssssssseene eene nnns 2 3 8 Transceiver 700 800 MHZ Block Diagram seen emen 2 3 8 Controller Block Diagram sse nennen nennen nennen enn 2 3 10 Performance Checks Test Setup sssssssssssssssssssseeeeenenen enne 2 5 1 Radio Alignment Test Setup cccececcccceeeeecccceeedeeeceeeeeeedecaeeeed
343. us two way data communications path between the central controller and all radios on the system Typically refers to radio to radio communications sometimes through a repeater Frequencies are shared with other users without the aid of a central controller to assign communications channels See also trunking A scan list that includes only conventional channels See Customer Programming Software A visual tracking marker a blinking line that indicates a location on a display Software with a graphical user interface containing the feature set of an ASTRO radio See also RSS See digital to analog conversion See digital to analog converter Displayed by the radio after three failed attempts to unlock the radio The radio must be powered off and on prior to another attempt A pre defined set of parameters Glossary Term digital digital to analog conversion digital to analog converter Digital Private Line digital signal processor digital signal processor code dispatcher DPL DSP DSP code dynamic regrouping EEPOT EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Failsoft FCC Sec 3 Glossary 3 Definition Refers to data that is stored or transmitted as a sequence of discrete symbols from a finite set most commonly this means binary data represented using electronic or electromagnetic signals See also analog Conversion of a digital signal to a voltage that is proportio
344. using Assembly 1 p Figure 8 39 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Limited Keypad 8 8 8 1 Medallion NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the Medallion 2 Scrape off the Medallion 2 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the Medallion is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Medallion in the recess 4 Press the Medallion 8 8 8 2 FM Label 1 Scrape off the FM Label 47 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the FM Label is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Label in the recess Press the Label NOTE There are No Other serviceable components on the Main Housing Assembly A L Sec 2 8 30 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 9 Servicing Main Housing M Top Display Version Medallion 2 gt FM Label 47 2 O Front Housing Assembly 1 Sif Figure 8 40 Main Housing Assembly Top Display Version 8 8 9 1 Medallion NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the Medallion 2 1 Scrape off the Medallion 2 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the Medallion is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhersive liner and place the Medallion in the recess 4 P
345. ust the softpot value until the measured deviation voltage when using the high tone is within 1 5 of the value observed when using the Low Tone 11 Left click the PTT Toggle to de key the radio 12 Repeat the steps 4 to 10 for all frequencies 13 Left click the Program All button on the screen to dekey the radio and save the tuned values Radio Alignment Procedures Front End Filter Alignment 6 6 Front End Filter Alignment DM Caution This procedure should only be attempted by qualified service technicians Sec 1 6 19 The alignment procedure adjusts the front end receiver bandpass filters for the best receiver sensitivity and selectivity This procedure should be performed for all test frequencies to allow for proper software interpolation of frequencies between the test frequencies in the band see Figure 6 25 and Figure 6 26 NOTE Rx Front End Filter Alignment is required after replacing or servicing the transceiver board 6 6 1 Procedure for UHF Range 1 and UHF Range 2 Auto Tune Tuning of the radio is done through Rx Front End Filter tuning screen 1 Select the Rx Front End Filter alignment screen See Figure 6 25 and Figure 6 26 2 Click on the slider or the New Softpot Value text box to select which frequency to tune 3 Apply RF test signal input with no modulation at 14 dBm on the Test Signal Frequency displayed at the top of the screen Left click the Autotune button Repeat the
346. ut Level 47 dBm Meter Out RX Volt Range 10 Vdc Modulation 1 kHz tone 3 kHz deviation Frequency Set to selected radio RX frequency Meter AC Volts Opt Sel ON Current 2 5 Amps Transmitter Checks RF Control MONITOR Frequency Set to selected radio TX frequency Meter RF Display Modulation Type FM Attenuation 20 dB Use PROJ 25 STD if testing ASTRO Conventional channels Performance Checks Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version 5 2 5 2 1 Sec 1 5 3 Display Radio Test Mode Dual Display Version This section provides instructions for performing tests in display radio test mode Access the Test Mode To enter the display radio test mode 1 Turn the radio on 2 Within 10 seconds after SELF TEST is complete press Side Button 2 five times in succession The radio shows a series of displays that give information regarding various version numbers and subscriber specific information The displays are described in Table 5 2 Table 5 2 Test Mode Displays Name of Display Description Appears Service The literal string indicates the radio has Always entered test mode Host version The version of host firmware is displayed Always DSP version The version of DSP firmware is displayed Always Secure version Version of the encryption software When the radio is secure equipped KGI algorithms name Encryption Type 1 Type of encry
347. viation Balance 3669 0 m El Performance Testing 168 075 3669 Guer liz m Lal oe 173 975 3683 3683 _ Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 9 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen VHF Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments Sec 1 6 9 we APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open Ap zoue zoue As Read Device Windows Themes sii Print Ctri P Print Preview File EI Device Windows Themes m Print D Navigation X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode El 123ABC1234 Radio Information 380 025 3028 a E Transmitter Alignments 3041 Reference Oscillator Sikes LES t g En 400 025 3055 3055 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 411 025 3068 3068 Tx Deviation Balance r1 m Receiver Alignments 424 925 3084 3084 lu dz Rx Front End Filter euni 3094 Pi Performance Testing E E c Bit Error Rate 445 025 3104 3104 1 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 457 025 3116 3116 469 925 3131 3131 di Figure 6 10 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHF1 at Js APX Family Tuner j AA a Home Option Feature Help E Open diySave Jy Save As Read Device Windows 4Themes ei Print Ctri P Print Preview File Ta De
348. vice Gi Windows Themes Print fa Navigation H X Tx Power Characterization Points Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 450 025 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 123ABC1234 a Radio Information 450 025 UHF R2 3339 3339 Transmitter Alignments E 3350 m KEE 460 025 UHF R2 3350 m EA Tx Power Characterization Points 471 025 UHF R2 3361 3361 TY Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference 484 975 UHF R2 3375 3375 Tx Deviation Balance e e Receiver Alignments 485 025 UHF R2 3375 3375 3 d Rx Front End Filter S 3386 a Performance Testing 495 025 UHF R2 3386 E t EA Bit Error Rate 505 025 UHF R2 3395 3396 Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override 519 975 UHF R2 3411 3411 Figure 6 11 Transmit Power Characterization Points Alignment Screen UHF2 Sec 1 6 10 Radio Alignment Procedures Transmitter Alignments A Home Option Open dy Save Ey Save As File fu Feature Help Read Device Ze3Windows Device Windows APX Family Tuner f Themes bail Themes ee Print Ctri P Print Preview EI Navigation A X Tx Power Characterization Points E 123ABC1234 6 5 3 Softpot Configuration Mode Program All PTT Toggle TRANSMITTER OFF 764 0125 x Frequency Softpot Value New Softpot Value 0 4095 Radio Infor
349. ving through a tunnel or entering a building the GPS will temporarily lose its position fix A power savings algorithm will then cycle the GPS in and out of a sleep mode at approximately 90 second intervals until the radio has moved back into an environment where GPS signals are present The user will be able to view the current latitude longitude and time date stamp on the radio s display The radio can also be configured to send its location to the system at predetermined intervals LRRP Depending on system options the user may be able to enable disable the GPS receiver Antenna GPS Receiver Circuit ss PS OMAP gt gt GPS IC W gt Processor Figure 3 6 GPS Diagram VHF Front End From the RX TX select switch the VHF signal is routed to a pre selector filter followed by a Low Noise Amplifier LNA and a second pre selector filter Both filters are discrete and fixed designs and are used to band limit incoming energy and suppress known spurious responses such as image and 7 IF spur The Mixer IC is also excited by a Local Oscillator LO signal at the LO port to down convert the RF signal to a 109 65 MHz intermediate frequency IF The down converted IF signal is passed through a crystal filter and IF amplifier which drives the input of the Abacus 3 Analog to Digital Converter IC AD9864 UHF1 Front End From the RX TX select switch a UHF1 signal
350. w pad and place in the respective location Apply slight pressure to set the adhesive 8 8 1 2 Servicing Universal Connector Insert 1 2 Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 4 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Ensure the locking tab is pressed and carefully slide the Universal Connector Insert 17 with the Black Stick from the Main Chassis Assembly 15 as shown in Figure 8 30 Press the new Universal Connector Insert until it is fully seated and the lock tab is engaged on the chassis 8 8 1 3 Servicing Antenna O ring Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Remove the O ring 16 with the Black Stick Reinstall the O ring by rolling it over the threaded portion of the antenna hub until it sets in its groove NOTE Ensure the O ring is not twisted Sec 2 8 22 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 1 4 Servicing Chassis Ground Contact 5 NOTE Chassis Ground Contact 18 will be damaged during disassembly Complete steps from Section 8 7 1 through Section 8 7 9 of section 8 7 on page 2 8 13 Slide the Black Stick under the Chassis Ground Contact 18 through the opening on the RF VOCON PCB side of the radio to lift off the contact Clean the area once the Chassis Ground Contact is removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris Remove the backer of the Chassis Ground Contact and place it i
351. with Apps NNTN8173 AES Expansion Board NNTN8174 AES Expansion Board with Apps NNTN8175 DES DES XL DES OFB Expansion Board NNTN8176 DES DES XL DES OFB Expansion Board with Apps NNTN8177 Expansion Board NNTN8178 Expansion Board with Apps Sec 2 7 2 7 2 7 3 7 3 1 Encryption Multikey Feature Multikey Feature This feature allows the radio to be equipped with multiple encryption keys It can support two or more encryption algorithms simultaneously e g AES and DES XL D Conventional Multikey The encryption keys can be tied strapped on a one per channel basis In addition the radio can have operator selectable keys operator selectable indices and operator selectable key erasure If talkgroups are enabled in conventional then the encryption keys are strapped to the talkgroups Trunked Multikey If the radio is used for both conventional and trunked applications strap the encryption keys for trunking on a per talkgroup or announcement group basis In addition a different key can be strapped to other features for example dynamic regrouping failsoft or emergency talkgroup The radio can have operator selectable key erasure Select an Encryption Key You can select an encryption key using either the menu or the keypad Use the Menu To select an encryption key using the menu 1 2 Press until the display shows Key Press Ml Ell or ED directly below Key The displa
352. xploded View 1 8 4 Sec 1 vi Figure 8 4 Figure 8 5 Figure 8 6 Figure 8 7 Figure 8 8 Figure 8 9 Figure 8 10 Figure 8 11 Figure 8 12 Figure 8 13 Figure 8 14 Figure 8 15 Figure 8 16 Figure 8 17 Figure 8 18 Figure 8 19 Figure 8 20 Figure 8 21 Figure 8 22 Figure 8 23 Figure 8 24 Figure 8 25 Figure 8 26 Figure 8 27 Figure 8 28 Figure 8 29 Figure 8 30 Figure 8 31 Figure 8 32 Figure 8 33 Figure 8 34 Figure 8 35 Figure 8 36 Figure 8 37 Figure 8 38 Figure 8 39 Figure 8 40 Figure 8 41 Figure 8 42 Figure 8 43 Figure 8 44 Figure 8 45 Figure 8 46 Figure 8 47 Figure 8 48 Figure 8 49 Figure 8 50 Figure 8 51 Figure 8 52 Figure 8 53 Figure 8 54 Figure 8 55 Figure 10 1 Figure 10 2 List of Figures Attaching the Antenna eese seien ee tetendit a eaaa iaiia 1 8 7 Removing the Antenna etii tee tae esed be te dhe eee be lE Rudd Lee ta Ende e 1 8 7 Attaching Battery Battery Gezai 1 8 8 Attaching Battery Vacuum Port Geal enm 1 8 9 Attaching Battery Slide into Position oooonnnccccnnnnocccccnnncannccconnonncncnnnnn nn ccn nana nccccnnnnnncnnnns 1 8 9 Squeezing the Release Latches 00 ccecccccceeeseeccceeeesneccceeeeseucecenensnececeenteneadaeeensaenceceneenee 1 8 10 Removing the Battery cic tela restado sal 1 8 10 Removing the Thumb Screw sse nennen nennen nennen e
353. xternal accessory speaker is driven by a Class AB audio amplifier on the MAKO IC that is capable of delivering 0 5 W of power into a 16 Ohm load Both speaker paths use the CODEC for volume control and to convert the audio signal from digital to analog Both internal and external microphones use the CODEC s ADC to deliver digital audio samples to the DSP controller The user interface block consists of a top and main or data side display a keypad top controls and the accessory side connector The side connector Universal Connector provides audio USB RS232 and RF communication for accessories All signals to and from the connector go through the internal expansion board before reaching the microcontroller and other devices on the main board Radio with Mace with Apps Expansion Board In addition to the Mace Expansion Board features the Mace with Apps Expansion Board consists of an e MMC 4GB NAND Flash a 3 axes digital accelerometer and an integrated circuit consisting of a Global Positioning System GPS and Bluetooth 2 1 transceiver The 4GB external NAND Flash communicates to the OMAP processor on the VOCON board through the Multi Media Card MMC interface The GPS receiver section of the GPS BT combination IC interfaces with the OMAP processor though a dedicated UART port The GPS receiver also has a dedicated reset controlled solely by the OMAP processor The radio also has the ability to connect to a wireless Bluetooth audio headset Th
354. y 8 8 9 Servicing Main Housing A L Dual Display Versions Medallion 1 pe FM Label 47 ___ p O Front Housing Assembly 1 ke gt a Figure 8 38 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Full Keypad Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies Sec 1 8 29 Medallion 2 x S Ny FM Label 47 KS il Front Housing Assembly 1 Figure 8 39 Main Housing Assembly Dual Display Version Limited Keypad 8 8 9 1 Medallion NOTE There is no need to remove any components in order to service the Medallion 2 Scrape off the Medallion 2 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the Medallion is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Medallion in the recess 4 Press the Medallion 8 8 9 2 FM Label Scrape off the FM Label 47 with the Black Stick 2 Clean the area once the FM Label is completely removed to ensure it is free of adhesive and debris 3 Remove the adhesive liner and place the Label in the recess 4 Press the Label NOTE There are No Other serviceable components on the Main Housing Assembly A L Sec 1 8 30 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 10 Servicing Main Housing M Top Display Version Medallion 2 gt FM Label 47 2 O Front Housing Assembly 1
355. y and cannot be directly changed 2 AA E F APX Family Tuner Home Option Feature Help Open Save A Save As g Read Device Windows f Themes gig Print Cti P Print Preview File fu Device EI Windows Themes Print EI Navigation H X Radio Information Softpot Configuration Mode Model Number H98QDDSPWSAN X Serial Number 123ABC1234 l 123ABC1234 Host Version L07011709 Radio Information i E Transmitter Alignments DSP Version D04 50 12 Reference Oscillator Tx Power Characterization Points Tuning Codeplug Version RO1 10 00 Tx Power Characterization PA Saturation Reference Tx Deviation Balance Receiver Alignments Rx Front End Filter Performance Testing Bit Error Rate Transmitter Test Pattern Factory Override Figure 6 4 Radio Information Screen Transmitter Alignments Reference Oscillator Alignment Adjustment of the reference oscillator is critical for proper radio operation Improper adjustment will result not only in poor operation but also in a misaligned radio that will interfere with other users operating on adjacent channels For this reason the reference oscillator should be checked every time the radio is serviced or once a year whichever comes first The frequency counter used for this procedure must have a stability of 0 1 ppm or better Also checking this parameter when the product is placed in service is especially important if the produ
356. y applicable to Dual Display configured radios Erasing an encryption key only applicable to Dual Display configured radios Load an Encryption Key Keys will be loaded from the KVL to the radio in either clear or encrypted form depending on the configuration of the CPS parameter KVL FIPS Level 3 Approved Mode If the parameter is disabled keys will be sent in clear form if the parameter is enabled keys will be sent to the radio in encrypted form NOTE A KVL3000 Plus with software version R03 52 45 or greater must be used to load keys to a radio with KVL FIPS Level 3 Approved Mode enabled To load an encryption key 1 Referto the key variable loader KVL manual for equipment connections and setup 2 Attach the KVL to the radio The top display shows KEYLOAD whereas KEYLOADING is shown on the front display of a Dual Display configured radio All other radio functions except for power down backlight and volume are locked out 3 Referto the KVL manual for how to load the encryption keys into the radio When the key is loaded successfully you will hear On single key radios a short tone On multikey radios an alternating tone The secure kits for APX 6000XE are identified by the following kit numbers Table 7 1 Kit Numbers for Secure Enabled Expansion Boards Kit Number Description NNTN8171 APX 6000 DVP XL Expansion Board NNTN8172 APX 6000 DVP XL Expansion Board
357. y shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Press or to scroll through the list of encryption keys NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press RN Ell or directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press fm the PTT button or EN EM or E directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail tone If the selected key is not allowed the display shows ILLEGAL KEY and the radio sounds a momentary illegal key tone Encryption Select an Encryption Index Sec 2 7 3 7 3 2 Use the Keypad To select an encryption key using the keypad 7 4 7 4 1 1 2 Press until the display shows Key Press Ml ES or EB directly below Key The display shows the last user selected and stored encryption key Using the keypad enter the number of the desired key NOTE If a deleted key is selected ERASED KEY will be displayed Press RN KA or directly below the desired menu SEL saves the newly selected key and returns to the home display Press f the PTT button or EN KA or ER directly below Exit or turn the 16 Position Select knob to exit this menu If the selected key is erased the display shows KEY FAIL and the radio sounds a momentary keyfail
358. z Analog Sensitivity typical 12 dB SINAD 0 25uV Digital Sensitivity typical 1 BER 0 375 uV 5 BER 0 24 uV Intermodulation typical 80 05 dB Selectivity typical 25 kHz Channel 75 87 dB 12 5 kHz Channel 65 58 dB Spurious Rejection typical 82 16 dB Frequency Stability 30 60 C 25 C reference 0 000086 Rated Audio Internal Speaker 500 mW External Speaker 500 mW FM Hum and Noise typical 25 kHz 54 dB 12 5 kHz 47 92 dB Distortion typical 1 74 96 Channel Spacing 12 5 25 kHz Frequency Range 700 MHz 764 776 794 806 MHz 800 MHz 806 825 851 870 MHz RF Power 700 MHz 1 2 7 Watts 800 MHz 1 3 0 Watts Frequency Stability typical 30 to 60 C 25 C ref 700 MHz 0 000080 800 MHz 0 000080 Emission typical conducted 75 dBc FM Hum and Noise typical Companion Receiver 25 kHz 47 dB 12 5 kHz 45 dB Distortion typical 2 25 kHz chnls 5 kHz 20 kHz chnls 4 kHz 12 5 kHz chnls 2 5 kHz Modulation Limiting 25 kHz 72 dBc 12 5 kHz 66 dBc ACPR typical Emissions Designators 11KOF3E 16KOF3E 8K10F1D 8K10F1E 8K10F1W 20KOF1E Specifications subject to change without notice Chapter 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 This manual contains information needed for Levels One and Two radio servicing Level One servicing consists of radio programming radio alignment knobs replacement and installation and removal of the antenn
359. zel Assembly G Frequency Knob 28 ja Volume Knob 29 Antenna Spanner Nut 27 ____ Antenna Washer 26 gt Secure Lever 25 Figure 8 32 Top Bezel Assembly 8 8 3 1 Secure Lever 1 Complete steps from Section 8 7 8 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 2 Pull the Secure Lever 25 straight out of Top Bezel Assembly 24 as shown in Figure 8 32 3 Insert the lever s arm into the bezel s slot NOTE All serviceable components on the Top Bezel Assembly are shown in Figure 8 32 8 8 4 Servicing VOCON Board Assembly D VOCON Board 14 Figure 8 33 VOCON Board Assembly NOTE There are no serviceable components on the VOCON Board Assembly Sec 1 8 24 Disassembly Reassembly Procedures Serviceable Components of the Main Sub Assemblies 8 8 5 Servicing of RF Board Assembly Battery Connector Seal 13 ______ Figure 8 34 RF Board Assembly 8 8 5 1 Battery Seal 1 2 3 Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 6 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Slide the Battery Connector Seal 13 from the battery contact header with the Black Stick Use the Black Stick and push the new Battery Connector Seal until it is properly seated onto the RF Board surface 8 8 5 2 Thermal Pads N a oa P D Complete steps 8 7 1 through 8 7 6 of section 8 7 on page 1 8 13 Scrape off both thermal pads 10 and 11 from the amplifiers and or Main chassis with the Black Stick

ASTRO APX 5000/ APX 6000

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents